Tag Archives: audience

Podcast

Your Podcast Strategy – PTC 360

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

How is your podcast strategy? Do you even have one?

Lots of podcasters struggle with finding constructive, intentional ways to get the word out about their show. The marketing stuff can get tricky.

Many podcasters I talk with would be happy to have enough downloads to get 2 or 4 coaching clients paying a fee. How do you bring a few listeners through the funnel?

Let’s look at your whole strategy today on this episode.

BOOTCAMP

Before we jump into it, I want to invite you to a powerful event I am holding where I will help you build your podcast monetization strategy. We actually get stuff done in this day-long bootcamp.

So many times, we go to webinars hoping to learn something only to find out it is full of fluff. We might walk away with one or two ideas after an hour. But we are really only there for the sales pitch.

You now have a chance to join me for a 6-hour Podcast Profits Bootcamp where I will walk you through the entire process to build your podcast monetization strategy. It’s actually 7 hours, but you get an hour for lunch.

During this event, we will build a few ways to monetize your show that are perfect for you. This isn’t one size fits all. It is specific to your podcast.

You can enroll at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

You will get a workbook that will help you stay on track as we develop your strategy. During the bootcamp, we walk through the workbook step-by-step.

HOW IT WORKS

We will start with your foundation to ensure you are building on solid ground. Then, we will develop your purpose. I’ll show you why most podcasts don’t make money, so you can avoid those pitfalls.

Many people think ads and sponsorships are the way to make money with your show. That is a myth. It is the worst way. Sponsorships require a very large audience and a lot of sales time. Ads also have a revenue ceiling.

I’ll show you a better way during the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. I won’t just show you, we will build it together. We will discuss the various ways you can monetize your show, and we will pick the strategy that is right for you.

Finally, you will have plenty of time to ask me questions to refine your strategy.

This is so much more than a webinar or workshop. It is a bootcamp where we will actually get things done.

Where most webinars last an hour, this is an all day event.

REGISTER

Registration for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp is $197 for this 6-hour bootcamp and your workbook. More importantly, you walk away with your monetization strategy for your show.

Right now, you can enroll for $197. Enroll now and secure your spot.

You can enroll at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

If you are ready to build your podcast monetization strategy, the Podcast Profits Bootcamp is for you. You’ve spent enough time attending empty webinars and trying to find sponsors. Now is the time to build a real strategy.

Let’s sweeten the deal for you a little more. If you enroll in the Podcast Profits Bootcamp, you will also get a bonus prep call to get you ready for the event. This is where we help you gather all of the information and ideas you’ll need before the bootcamp begins.

Let’s get you registered for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. Jump in right now at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

BEGIN YOUR STRATEGY

As you build relationships with your content, start with the end in mind. This is where your strategy begins.

What do you want your listener to take away from this episode?

Decide what emotions do you want to stir?

What do you want your listener to do when the episode is over?

When you know those goals, your content will be easy to create.

On your podcast, stir emotion by talking about the “why” to your solution. Agitate the hopes, needs, fears and dreams of your listener.

Then, give your listener a little of your “what”. Let them engage with your coaching, courses or other offerings for the “how”.

MONETIZATION STRATEGY

Then, you need to determine your revenue goal.

You make money with your podcast, not from your podcast.

The podcast doesn’t generate any income. Ads are a lot of work with very little return.

To monetize your show, leverage the attention you have built to drive your business. How does the podcast fit into your overall marketing plan?

Start with the goal.

Your podcast is the top of your funnel. This is where you build the relationship with your prospective client.

So, what do you want them to do when the show is over?

Have one clear, concise call-to-action. Get them started on their journey with you.

This could be a free download, strategy call, webinar, or ask me anything session. Give them something in return for their name and email address.

Nurture the relationship, serve them well and move them through the sales journey.

MARKETING STRATEGY

When it comes to marketing, begin again with the end goal in mind. Intentionally build the marketing plan for your business.

I was looking at the calendar the other day and realized we are 8 weeks from New Year’s Eve.

The new year always brings new goal and a renewed energy to what we are doing.

Unfortunately, studies show that 60%-80% of people give up on their resolutions by the middle of February.

You’re probably saying, “Erik, we just finished Halloween! What’s all this resolution stuff?”

Well, I believe most people give up on their resolutions, because they don’t have a clear plan to achieve their goals.

Lose weight. Start my own business. Grow my podcast audience. Spend more time with my kids.

Those are all great. But, they are not specific and are not connected to a plan.

Now is the time to start planning. Create your strategy to reach those goals.

Spend the next 2 months getting things in place to execute your plan when the resolution kicks in.

A plan is something like go to the gym 3 times a week, appear on 2 other podcasts a week or have one-on-one time with each kid once a week.

That’s a plan.

If you build your strategy now, you will have a much better chance of reaching your goals.

On top of that, who says it needs to be January 1st to start working on a new goal?

Get after it.

AUDIENCE STRATEGY

In radio, we had a saying. Frequency to the target.

The first time a prospect hears your marketing message, it goes in one ear and out the other.

The second time, the message might start to sink in.

The third time, it might ring a bell in their memory.

When your prospect hears your message the fourth, fifth and sixth time, he might begin to remember it.

Therefore, you need to deliver your message to your prospect six or eight times prior to the moment he is making a buying decision.

You cannot try a marketing tactic once and decide if it works. It requires frequency to the target.

Don’t expect your audience to grow overnight. Your prospective listeners need to hear about your show multiple times before they will push play.

How many times have you said, “Oh yeah, I’ve been meaning to listen to that podcast.”

It’s like snowfall. Mother Nature doesn’t make it snow for 3 minutes and then think, “Well, that didn’t work.”

It takes millions of little flakes over time to create a 5 foot drift.

As you work to grow your audience, be consistent.

Pick three marketing strategies. This could be other podcasts, appearing on summits and stages, social media, YouTube, partners, guest blogging or various other ways.

Select three that you enjoy and can do consistently.

Then, spend 30 minutes each day taking action on those vehicles to get in front of new potential listenes.

Over time, your audience grows.

YOUR PLAN

Are you frustrated because your podcast makes no money?

So many podcasters come to me struggling to find a path to riches.

It is possible to monetize your podcast. However, you need to understand that it takes three things to make that happen.

  1. Something to sell
  2. A strategy to sell it using your podcast
  3. Patience

If you have those three things, you have a much better chance to use your podcast to build and grow a business.

If you are willing to put in the time and effort, good things will happen.

GET SPECIFIC

One of the most common questions from podcasters is, “How do I monetize my podcast?”

I’ve tried it all.

When I first started, I put everything I knew about building great shows into a comprehensive course. It was a masterpiece.

Then reality cracked me upside the head.

Nobody wants a comprehensive course. They want a focused solution to their problem.

To monetize your show, you must …

  • Have something to sell
  • Ask for the sale
  • Serve first
  • Find your listener’s true pain
  • Explain their transformation with your solution
  • Build rappport

As you develop something to sell, find what works for you. It should be something that …

  • You enjoy
  • People want (different than need)
  • You can deliver
  • Can scale

TAKE ACTION

Those are the steps. If you would like my help crafting your monetization strategy, join me for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp.

Join me for a 6-hour Podcast Profits Bootcamp where I will walk you through the entire process to build your podcast monetization strategy. It’s actually 7 hours, but you get an hour for lunch.

During this event, we will build a few ways to monetize your show that are perfect for you. This isn’t one size fits all. It is specific to your podcast.

You can enroll at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

You will get a workbook that will help you stay on track as we develop your strategy. During the bootcamp, we walk through the workbook step-by-step.

If you enroll in the Podcast Profits Bootcamp, You will also get a bonus prep call to get you ready for the event. This is where we help you gather all of the information and ideas you’ll need before the bootcamp begins.

Let’s get you registered for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. Jump in right now at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

Podcast

Answers To Your Podcast Questions – PTC 359

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

I did a Facebook Live “Ask Me Anything” the other day on the Podcast Talent Coach Facebook Page. On it, you got answers to your podcast questions.

We talked about everything from selling and monetizing your show to using text messaging as a way to interact with your listeners.

I thought I would share those answers with you today.

BOOTCAMP

Before we jump into it, I want to invite you to a powerful event I am holding where I will help you build your podcast monetization strategy. We actually get stuff done in this day-long bootcamp.

So many times, we go to webinars hoping to learn something only to find out it is full of fluff. We might walk away with one or two ideas after an hour. But we are really only there for the sales pitch.

You now have a chance to join me for a 6-hour Podcast Profits Bootcamp where I will walk you through the entire process to build your podcast monetization strategy. It’s actually 7 hours, but you get an hour for lunch.

During this event, we will build a few ways to monetize your show that are perfect for you. This isn’t one size fits all. It is specific to your podcast.

You can enroll at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

You will get a workbook that will help you stay on track as we develop your strategy. During the bootcamp, we walk through the workbook step-by-step.

We will start with your foundation to ensure you are building on solid ground. Then, we will develop your purpose. I’ll show you why most podcasts don’t make money, so you can avoid those pitfalls.

Many people think ads and sponsorships are the way to make money with your show. That is a myth. It is the worst way. Sponsorships require a very large audience and a lot of sales time. Ads also have a revenue ceiling.

I’ll show you a better way during the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. I won’t just show you, we will build it together. We will discuss the various ways you can monetize your show, and we will pick the strategy that is right for you.

Finally, you will have plenty of time to ask me questions to refine your strategy.

This is so much more than a webinar or workshop. It is a bootcamp where we will actually get things done.

Where most webinars last an hour, this is an all day event.

REGISTER

Registration for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp is $197 for this 6-hour bootcamp and your workbook. More importantly, you walk away with your monetization strategy for your show.

Right now, you can enroll for $197. Enroll now and secure your spot.

You can enroll at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

If you are ready to build your podcast monetization strategy, the Podcast Profits Bootcamp is for you. You’ve spent enough time attending empty webinars and trying to find sponsors. Now is the time to build a real strategy.

Let’s sweeten the deal for you a little more. If you enroll in the Podcast Profits Bootcamp, You will also get a bonus prep call to get you ready for the event. This is where we help you gather all of the information and ideas you’ll need before the bootcamp begins.

Let’s get you registered for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. Jump in right now at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

QUESTIONS

My biggest challenge is growing the audience. What’s the best way? – David

How do I maximize the content while minimizing the time & effort? – Anne

I’d love to know if you have any thoughts on SMS text marketing? I think I’d be able to get more engagement if my busy moms could simply text me a question about a product or service instead of sending in a voicemail or sending an email. Do you have any recommendations for a service provider to work with? – Laura

How do I direct people to more than the freebie. – Karen

How do you know your worth? I’m not good at selling. – Mike

Offer things without making it sound like an ad. Hard to make yourself likable while selling something. – Cheryl

How does the podcast fit into the whole marketing plan? – Bruce

GET ANSWERS – ASK ME ANYTHING

I will be doing more “ask me anything” sessions on the Podcast Talent Coach Facebook page. If you are not following me there yet, head to PodcastTalentCoach.com/Facebook.

I would love to have you join us and get your questions answers to your podcast questions.

BOOTCAMP

Come join us for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. It is a powerful event that will help you build your podcast monetization strategy.

So many times, we go to webinars hoping to learn something only to find out it is a big sales pitch. We might walk away with one or two ideas after an hour. But we are really only there for the sale.

You have a chance to join me for a 6-hour Podcast Profits Bootcamp where I will walk you through the entire process to build your podcast monetization strategy.

During this event, you will discover 9 different ways to monetize your show. Then, we will build your specific way to generate revenue that is perfect for you. This isn’t one size fits all. It is specific to your show.

You will get a workbook that will help you stay on track as we develop your strategy. During the bootcamp, we walk through the workbook step-by-step.

We will start with your foundation to ensure you are building on solid ground. Then, we will develop your purpose.

Many people think ads and sponsorships are the way to make money with your show. That is a myth. It is the worst way. Sponsorships require a very large audience and a lot of sales time. Ads also have a revenue ceiling.

I’ll show you 9 better ways during the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. I won’t just show you, we will build it together. We will discuss the various ways you can monetize your show, so you can pick the strategy that is right for you.

Finally, you will have plenty of time to ask me questions to refine your strategy.

This is so much more than a webinar or workshop. It is a bootcamp where we will actually get things done.

Where most webinars last an hour, this is a 6-hour, all day event.

REGISTER

Registration for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp is $197 for the 6-hour bootcamp, your workbook and your monetization strategy for your show.

You can get the details at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

If you are ready to build your podcast monetization strategy, the Podcast Profits Bootcamp is for you. You’ve spent enough time attending empty webinars and trying to find sponsors. Now is the time to build a real strategy.

Let’s get you registered for the Podcast Profits Bootcamp. Jump in right now at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/bootcamp.

Podcast

Use Events To Grow Your Audience – PTC 349

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Events are a great way to grow your audience. However, you need a strategy.

Many of us go to great events and collect a lot of great information and meet a lot of great people. We then return home to our to do lists and do nothing.

The notes and names go in a drawer in the desk and we take no action. We have good intentions. We just have other priorities.

In order to get the most out of your events, have a plan.

To help, grab my Building Relationships At Events worksheet at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/events. This will give you the full strategy to use events to grow your audience.

STRATEGY

When developing your strategy, you need to consider your actions before, during and after the event. Your actions need to be focused and deliberate.

Before the event, you need to plan your attack. Lay out your goals and tools.

During the gathering, you have limited time. Use every minute you have in ways that help you grow.

After the event, tie up the loose ends. This is where the real work takes place.

Let’s look at each of these phases.

BEFORE EVENTS

Before events, it is all about planning. You need to have a goal and purpose.

Do your research. Research the attendees that fit your goal before the event. Find the individuals you’re hoping to meet (and impress).

Dress to impress. As the saying goes, you only have one chance to make a first impression. Don’t blow it.

DURING EVENTS

When you arrive, use your time wisely. Make the most of every opportunity.

Have questions ready for every session you attend for the open Q&A at the end.

Don’t spread yourself too thin. Don’t work the room. Focus on quality vs. quantity. Join in the conversation.

When you meet people, consider their network. Can you help each other make connections? Be a connector. How can you help them?

Listen first, then speak. Ask a lot of questions.

  • “Who are you?”
  • “What do you podcast about?”
  • “How did you get into that?”
  • “If someone wanted to get into that niche, where would they begin?”
  • “I’ve enjoyed our conversation. How can we stay in touch?”

Swap business cards to stay in touch. Be sure you don’t use your business cards as spam by giving a card to every person you meet. Give them with a purpose.

Take notes about each meeting. Write on their business card.

AFTER EVENTS

The real results come from your actions after events. This is where the real work takes place.

Follow up is critical. Reach out to each person you’ve met while you are on the trip home. Don’t let this valuable time slip away. Make an impression.

Have a purpose to reach out. Focus on helping them. This is not a time to sell.

Use this sample script: “I enjoyed our conversation at ____. Your story about _____ was fascinating/intriguing/hilarious. Would you be willing to discuss ____/be on my podcast to promote your _____/tell me more about ______.”

LIVE VS. VIRTUAL

Many live events are coming back. Pick and choose the right gatherings and conferences that will help you meet the right people.

Find people who are already talking to the audience you want to attract.

While live events return, continue to work the online events. Many online events will continue to operate, because they are convenient and come with lower costs. Again, find the events that will make the biggest impact in your growth.

WORKSHEET

To help you grow and develop your strategy, grab my Building Relationships At Events worksheet at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/events. This worksheet lays out the entire strategy you can use events to grow your audience.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Your Step-By-Step Audience Growth Strategy – PTC 348

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Whether you are brand new, or you’ve been publishing for years, we are all looking for audience growth. Unfortunately, few of us have a strategy. We are just trying random things and gaining no traction.

CLEANING

I was cleaning the basement the other day. After hours of work, it looked like I had done nothing.

We collect everything down there. The basement is where everything goes when we don’t have a place to put it.

We have a pool table down there that doubles as a ping pong table. The table came from some friends that just wanted it out of their basement. I quickly learned why.

The table has now become the place where my son does his school work … and sorts his baseball cards … and leaves his spare hockey gear.

My office space is down there. We have book shelves and storage shelves and a couch where we go when tornado warnings fire up.

One day, I decided to clean the basement. I started putting a stack of books on the book shelves. That’s when I realized some of my hockey coaching material was on one of the shelves. That belonged in binders in my office space.

While I was putting the hockey stuff away, I noticed I had some podcast notes in a stack on my desk. I started getting that squared away. On my desk was a shoebox I was using when I was recording a video.

I took the shoebox over to the baseball cards where it belonged. Next thing I know, I am arranging the baseball cards on the pool table. My son had a few jerseys on the table that got taken to the laundry room.

This went on for hours. When I finally stepped back to admire my work, it didn’t even look like I had been there. There was no change.

Why? I had no plan. My work wasn’t focused. I needed to work on one area until it was done.

INTENTIONAL AUDIENCE GROWTH

Be intentional to grow your audience and get people to listen.

Create a plan and stick to it. What activities will bring in new listeners if you do those activities on a consistent, regular basis?

About a year ago, I joined JV Insider Circle and my podcast took off.

JVIC connects you with people who run podcasts, radio shows, tele-summits and live events. Members of this community have large lists in your target market.

You can find details on JVIC at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/JVIC.

By attending the bi-weekly calls and various virtual events they hold, I met a variety of influencers who were talking to my potential audience. I started participating on their summits and in their giveaways. They had me on their podcasts and you’ve heard a few of them here.

Next thing I know, my audience was growing by leaps and bounds. I simply focused on this strategy and took regular action.

Instead of trying everything, find two or three things that you enjoy doing, will get you in front of new listeners and you can and will do on a regular basis.

Then, focus on those actions for a month. See where it takes you.

CONTENT

Before you invite people to your party, make sure you’ve cleaned the house.

The first thing you need to do is make sure your content is solid and entertaining. Ask yourself if you would listen to your show if it wasn’t your show.

Oscar spent the first year of his podcast interviewing other people. His show wasn’t growing or driving his business. He came to me for some help.

We restructured his show to highlight his expertise. The show still included other experts. However, we created space specifically for Oscar to talk about what he did and the service he provide.

After we got the show working, we started inviting people to the party. That’s when his audience began to grow.

Tighten up your content before you bring more listeners to the show. You only get one shot at a great first impression.

NEW AUDIENCE

Once your content it tight, go get in front of new people. You can’t grow your audience until you find people who are not yet aware of you and your show.

As we discussed, JVs are a great way to find new listeners. You can also be present in social groups. You can appear on podcast interviews. People can discover you on summits.

There are many ways you can get in front of people. Find the activities you love and will commit to doing consistently.

Again, you can check out www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/jvic to learn about finding joint venture partners.

INVITATION

Once you get in front of a new pool of potential listeners, invite them to listen.

So many people get interviewed or get on a stage in front of an audience and forget to tell people to listen.

If your goal is audience growth, ask people to listen to your show. Tell them where to find you and why they will love the show.

REASONS

Telling people to listen isn’t enough. You need to give them a specific reason to listen. Why will they love it?

When you ask people to listen, give them a specific episode that they will love. If you have interviewed someone special or taugh something really cool, send them to that episode.

Asking people to check out a generic show will give you a few listeners, but not great growth. Telling them why they will love your episode that was downloaded more than any other episode will bring people in.

Remember, they are asking, “What’s in it for me?” Give them a reason.

REMIND THEM

Getting them to listen isn’t enough for audience growth. You need to bring them back episode after episode.

Remind your listeners to come back using your e-mail list and social media.

Stay top of mind so the new listeners add to your current listeners. If your current listeners are leaving, you do not achieve audience growth. You maintain. New listeners are just replacing old listeners.

Give your current listeners a reason to come back next week by teasing effectively. Create some fear of missing out.

YOUR AUDIENCE GROWTH PLAN

This week, get to working on your audience growth plan. Start small with a plan that you can stick with. Do the work consistently and watch your audience grow.

Next week, we will talk about ways to use events to create audience growth. Events are coming back. Let’s be strategic to use these events in the best way. You’ll get a bunch of ideas for your plan next week.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Grow Your Podcast Downloads – PTC 342

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

There are three important steps to growing your podcast downloads. The three steps are awareness, attraction and retention. I like to call it promotion, programming and personality. Today, I want to help you grow your downloads by focusing on promotion.

TRAINING

I will be holding a free training called “How To Make Money With A Free Podcast … Without Ads and Sponsorships.” This is the exact step-by-step process to grow your audience, attract your ideal customers and clients, and make money with your podcast.

You can join us for free. Register at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

On this free training you are going to discover:

  • How to create a successful podcast using your personality
  • Why some podcasts don’t make money and how to avoid those pitfalls
  • How to attract your ideal clients with your podcast
  • How to keep listeners coming back episode after episode
  • And more!

Register for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

DOWNLOADS

Before you can make money with your podcast, you need to grow your podcast downloads. You don’t necessarily need a big audience. To drive your business, you need the right audience.

Less than 7% of all podcasts have an audience large enough to attract big sponsors and advertisers. There are much better ways to monetize your podcast.

Many people believe sponsorships and advertising are the only ways to make money with a podcast. Untrue.

In fact, you shouldn’t clutter up your show with ads. Instead, use your podcast as a powerful marketing tool for your business.

Podcasting is huge. You have incredible power in front of you. Let me show you some numbers.

There are just under 2 million podcasts today. On the other hand, there are over 600 Million blogs and more than 1.3 billion YouTube videos. Where do you want to compete?

Podcast search engine Listen Notes reports there were 246,782 podcast debuts in 2019 alone. Today, more than 90 million people in the U.S.— approximately 32% of the U.S. population over the age of 12 — have listened to a podcast in the past month according to Edison Research.

According to The Nielsen Company, the total podcast audience is growing at a compound average growth rate of 20%. And that could mean the overall audience for the medium could double within the next five years. Now is the time to stake your claim in your niche. Get noticed and build your audience.

Let’s talk about why many podcasts don’t make money. There are a 6 reasons podcasts don’t make money or attract clients. Let me give you the big two.

You already know that ads and sponsorships are a tough sell, especially if you are not in the top 7%. If you are part of the other 93%, how can you make money?

It’s all about the right audience.

WHAT ARE YOU SELLING?

The first issue most podcasters face is you don’t have anything to sell.

When podcasters contact me for coaching, our first step is a podcast strategy session. During that call, we define goals and the strategy to achieve those goals.

Though the questions vary, one seems to consistently come up. “How can I make money with my podcast?” I ask, “What are you selling?”

Can your listeners currently give you money for anything?

As coaches and content creators, you probably have something to sell. You just need more people to buy it.

ARE YOU ASKING?

The second problem is you are not asking for the sale

Podcasters say, “Yeah, Erik. I have a course for sale. Nobody is buying it.”

Have you told anyone about it?

One of my buddies has a great course available. I had known him for six months before I knew anything about it.

Once you build your rapport through your podcast, the “yes” should become a formality if you actually ask for the sale and help your listener succeed.

THE RIGHT PODCAST DOWNLOADS

The big challenge is the audience. You need to find an audience full of your ideal clients.

When I started building my e-mail list, I developed multiple lead magnets that would help my podcast audience. I then offered those on my show.

My list grew nicely. My podcast downloads grew as well.

Before too long, I had about 500 people on my e-mail list. My show was getting about 200 downloads an episode.

Then it happened. I hit that plateau. Has that happened to you?

My podcast downloads stopped growing.

What I discovered was what worked yesterday doesn’t necessarily work today. That doesn’t mean you need to chase the next big thing. It simply means you need multiple streams of traffic.

That’s when I discovered my ability to diversify my traffic.

I participated in a few gift giveaways. My list doubled. My podcast downloads grew as well.

Then I gave a few presentations on summits and did a few podcast interviews. My downloads ended up doubling in a few months.

If you want to grow your downloads, find ways to get in front of your ideal audience.

MULTIPLE STREAMS

You should not try everything at once. Pick 3 that you enjoy and can do well.

My former coach Marc Mawhinney calls this his three pillars. What three traffic sources are you going to use to reach your ideal clients and potential listeners?

You could use stages. By stages I don’t only mean physical stages. The term stage refers to any platform where you can speak in front of a group of people.

Stages could include real stages. It also includes podcasts, radio shows, summits, webinars, Facebook lives and other speaking opportunities.

You could also use social media as a strategy. Be active in groups.

Gift giveaways are a great way to reach new people. This is where a group of similar experts team up to provide a bunch of valuable free gifts to their e-mail lists.

In a gift giveaway, each expert contributes a gift. All experts typically e-mail their list a few times and post on social media inviting people to get the gifts. When people opt in for your gift, they are added to your e-mail list.

Gift giveaways are a great way to build your list and reach a new audience.

YOUR LIST

Building your e-mail list is a great way to start the relationship with your listener. By e-mailing your list with valuable resources and information, you build your credibility and trust.

You need to serve when you e-mail. Send information your listeners can use.

When I send my daily e-mail, it always contains a tip or piece of information my listeners can use. This varies from content to growth to monetization. Every e-mail begins with something my listeners can use.

The tip is typically followed by an opportunity to go deeper and get even more help. Sometimes this is from me. Other times it is from one of my partners.

My e-mails are rarely 100% focused on sales. There is always value. If I only send sales e-mail or only send when I have a pitch, people stop opening my e-mails.

I understand your inbox is valuable. Therefore, I deliver value.

MONETIZATION

If you want to monetize your podcast, it all begins with building the right audience.

You need to find ways to promote yourself to new listeners. Continuing to market to the same pool will not help you grow. Find new fans.

Once you find listeners, find ways to help them. Then, keep them coming back again and again.

Those are the three steps to grow your podcast downloads. Promotion, programming and personality.

JOIN US

Come join my on my new training called “How To Make Money With A Free Podcast … Without Ads and Sponsorships.” This is the exact step-by-step process to grow your audience, attract your ideal customers and clients, and make money with your podcast.

This is the process I use. I will teach it to you in this training. You can join us for free. Register at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

On this training you are going to discover:

  • How to create a successful podcast using your personality
  • Why some podcasts don’t make money and how to avoid those pitfalls
  • How to attract your ideal clients with your podcast
  • How to keep listeners coming back episode after episode
  • And more!

Register for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply, click the button and apply to have a chat with me. We will develop your plan and see how I can help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

Overcoming 3 Podcast Growth Challenges – PTC 332

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Podcast growth isn’t some secret, but it comes with challenges. I realize many podcast gurus tell you they have the magic formula. It isn’t magic. Growth is a method.

There are two ways to grow your downloads. Get more people to listen. Or, get people to listen more.

There are three challenges podcasters face when developing podcast growth. Today, I want to help you overcome those challenges.

MAKE IT EASY

The first of the challenges most podcasters face is making podcast growth too complicated. The process is simple to understand. It is difficult to implement.

Let’s reverse engineer this process by starting with our goal of podcast growth.

To grow your podcast, you need to get more people to listen to your podcast. That is pretty obvious. More people to listen is the easy part to understand.

In order to get more people to listen, we need to get in front of potential listeners and invite them to the party. We need to tell them why our show is exactly what they are looking for and give them a real benefit to listening.

If we want to get in front of those potential listeners, we need to figure out where they are. Who is talking to your ideal listener right now. Which experts already have your ideal listeners in their audience? Let’s partner with those people.

Where do we find those experts? We need to define our ideal listener first. Once we know everything there is to know about our ideal listener, we can then figure out who they follow, trust and admire. Those will be our partners.

We start by defining our ideal target listener and follow the path.

On the other side of the coin, we need to keep our current listeners coming back for more. Entertain your listeners. Give them a real reason to come back next week for the next episode by creating a powerful tease. Generate a real sense of intrigue. 

STRATEGY

The next of the three challenges podcasters face is a lack of a solid growth strategy to follow.

We just talked about the process. Now we need to develop the strategy to execute.

After we develop our ideal target listener and determine who they follow, we can begin creating partnerships. Those partnerships will help us grow.

Reach out to those influencers and ask for a conversation. Tell them you would like to discuss how you can help each other grow. Partners help each other.

When you get on the call with your potential partners, start with them. Ask them what they are working on and how you might support those efforts. Find ways to help them. This should take about twenty minutes.

Next, explain what you are trying to accomplish. Let them offer ways they might support you. In this step, you are simply looking for ways to invite people to your show.

You are looking for stages to speak on. This could be podcast interviews, summit appearances, presentation opportunities or a variety of other stages.

Once you develop your strategy, work on it everyday. Find one influencer each day and make a connection. Not every connection will become a partner. However, your network will definitely grow in a big way.

MENTOR

The final and most important of the challenges podcasters have is not having a mentor. They are not learning from someone who has done it.

When you find someone who can show you the way, you can ease so much pain. The time you spend trying to figure it out will be cut way back. You will have fewer headaches and a lot more fun.

A mentor who is ahead of you on the path can give you the map. Rather than trying to figure out the next step, you can instead enjoy the journey. You can also get to your goal much quicker.

Have you ever got tired of trying to figure out something and finally asked for help. Someone shows you how to do it and you say, “Ugh, why didn’t I think of that!?!”

There are times when you don’t know what you don’t know and that’s ok. Let someone show you and move to the next step. Progress over pride. If you want to fast-track your success, find someone to teach you. You will be happy that you did.

LASER COACHING

If you’re looking to grow your podcast audience, I’ve got a 3-step system that will help you overcome the challenges and get you there:

Step One: Define your ideal target listener so you can …

Step Two: determine which experts already speak to them in order to …

Take Step Three: create partnerships and get in front of those potential listeners which allows you to …

Grow your audience and drive your business.

This system works really well, and if you’d like some help growing your podcast audience, I’ve got great news!

You see, normally I charge $997 per month to coach clients to get these results. We typically meet for one to two hours per week which can take a lot of your time … and mine.

And you know, those marathon coaching sessions take a lot out of me.

So I’m opening up an opportunity for you.

You can now get UNLIMITED Podcast Growth Laser Coaching!

This is a coaching model that is ideal for growing your audience with my 3-step system. I ran a beta opportunity for four podcasters a few months ago, and it is going very well. So, I’ve opened 6 more spots for this opportunity.

For less than 84 bucks a month, you can get a full year of UNLIMITED 15-Minute Laser Coaching sessions with me.

Yep. Unlimited. You can have as many coaching sessions with me as you like for a full year for less than 84 bucks a month.

HOW IT WORKS

Here’s how it works:

1. Go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply and apply to have a chat with me to see if you are a good fit for Podcast Growth Laser Coaching. Remember, there are only 6 spots available. I need to pace myself to ensure each client gets the attention they deserve.

2. If this makes sense, you’ll get an email from me with a link to my calendar so we can have our first coaching session.

3. Your first call is 30 minutes to make sure the coaching is perfect for you and we come up with a custom plan to help you grow your audience.

4. At the end of our call, and each call thereafter, we’ll agree on “homework” that will move you forward and keep you accountable.

5. After each call, I’ll send you a recording of the call, confirmation of your homework, and a link to schedule your next call.

6. Once your homework is complete, you can schedule your next 15-minute call.

For example, you have your coaching session on a Wednesday, do your homework right after the call, and you can schedule your next call that very same day. It is truly Unlimited Coaching!

And don’t worry, if you get stuck on the homework or need support between calls, I’m just an email away.

APPLY NOW

Go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply and apply to have a chat with me to see if you are a good fit for Podcast Growth Laser Coaching. I’ll select six to participate and get the coaching, and I’d love for you to be one of them.

There is a guarantee. We both need to be comfortable with each other for this to work and get your results. If, during our first 30-minute call, either of us feels like this is not a perfect solution to help you grow your audience, I’ll refund your money immediately. No Risk!

If you would like to be one of the six, go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/apply and apply. You and I can have a chat to see if you are a good fit for Podcast Growth Laser Coaching. 

Let’s make it less complicated, develop your strategy to grow, and see how I can take your hand, show you the way, and help and support you to achieve your podcast goals.

Podcast

How A Meathead Podcast Makes Money – PTC 328

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Podcasters often think you need to be a business coach or teach people how to make money online in order to make money with your podcast. That isn’t the case. To make money with your podcast, you simply need a passionate, thirsty audience.

Then, you need to be willing to take some smart chances until you find what works.

Today, I want to show you a podcast that is less than a year old and well on their way to generating income with their podcast. Grab a pen and paper. You’ll definitely want to take notes.

FREE TRAINING

Before we jump into it. Let me give you a great resource to help you make money with your podcast.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way to grow your audience and make money with your podcast, please go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth and join us for a free training to see if we can help you get some clarity, build a plan and reach your goals.

Come join us as I present “6 Ways To Use Your Content To Attract Your Ideal Clients”.

On this free training you are going to discover:

  • How to develop your personality to attract your ideal clients
  • Why sponsorships and ads are NOT the ideal way to generate revenue
  • How to grow your network with your podcast
  • And more!

It happens on Saturday, March 27th at 11a ET, 8a PT. Sign up for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

If you are looking for a mentor who can help you shortcut the process of making money with your podcast and avoid all of the pain of trial and error, this free training is for you. Let’s grow your community and start making money with your show.

MEATHEADS

Let me give a case study today of how this works. Sadie took my training, followed my program and launched her podcast with her cohost Sausha.

Their podcast is called Meathead Test Kitchen. The world of fitness and nutrition can be intimidating, but they are here to help make it a whole lot less scary. That’s what the podcast is all about.

They launched Meathead Test Kitchen in August. Their first episode was released on August 16th.

BE UNIQUE

The first thing you will notice about Meathead Test Kitchen is that it isn’t your middle-of-the-road podcast. These two have a definite style, swagger and personality. This isn’t your mom’s fitness and nutrition podcast.

If you want to stand out and get noticed, develop a brand and stand for something. You don’t have to be brash or in your face. You do need to pick a side and defend it. If you try to please everyone, you will please no one.

The reviews of Meathead Test Kitchen shows how they cut through. Here are some of their reviews.

“Dieting and fitness doesn’t have to be boring or tedious. Sadie and Sausha are here to prove it! Fun hosts and honest, easy to understand advice.”

“These ladies don’t beat around the bush, they are honest and easy to relate to. If swear words offend you, find another podcast.”

Pick a side and get noticed.

CONNECTION

Next, make powerful connections. If you want to grow and make money with your show, you need to connect with the right people.

Sadie and Sausha are growing their audience by connecting with the right influencers.

They are 31 episodes in. Just over six months of episodes and they have interviewed local business owners, a Titan games athlete and current Mrs. America contestant. They have interviewed a Bellator MMA fighter, CrossFit Games competitors, coaches, and a world record holding power lifter.

Sadie and Sausha use these guests to help get their show noticed. When influencers talk about your show, people take notice. Give them a reason to talk by interviewing them on your podcast.

If you want to make money with your podcast, you need to have the right people listening. These people should be your ideal clients. Interview guests who are already talking to this audience.

THIRSTY AUDIENCE

Gaining an audience isn’t enough. It needs to be the right audience.

The one thing you need to make money with your show is a thirsty audience. If you were selling water in the desert, you wouldn’t need much of a pitch to sell it at a great price. You just need a thirsty audience.

Don’t try to sell something without asking your ideal listener what they need. I know you feel like you already know. Believe me, you don’t. I thought I knew as well until I built 4 different offers that nobody wanted.

When I finally started doing market research before I built the course, people started buying before the course was even complete. Do your homework. If you want to know how to do that, let’s connect.

BE WHERE THEY ARE

Once you know who your ideal listers are, go play where they are already playing.

Sadie and Sausha recently started releasing the podcast with a full video component on their YouTube channel. They discovered their listeners were also big consumers of exercise videos.

They also have their podcast distributed through all major streaming platforms. Give your listeners plenty of options.

GIVE ‘EM WHAT THEY WANT

Now that they have built the audience, they can start offering the listeners solutions to their problems to make money with their show. They can also begin building a tribe of raving fans.

Sadie and Sausha recently started selling Meathead Test Kitchen merchandise, and have partnered with a local athleisure company to boost both brands. Again, leveraging more powerful influencers.

FIND OPTIONS

Sadie and Sausha will be releasing the first of many cookbook projects in the next few months. On their website you will find a “Shop” page with Amazon affiliate links to things their audience is already purchasing along with things the two mention on the show.

It is all about multiple streams of income selling things your listeners want to buy. They also have some other cool stuff up their sleeves for when the pandemic is over.

THE MAKE MONEY PLAN

Here is your plan. Build your brand. Stand for something. Find a thirsty audience. Figure out what they want. Build it and sell it to them. Then, build solutions to their other problems for multiple streams of income.

Everyone wins. Your listeners solve their problems. You make money with your show. Don’t overcomplicate it.

ARE YOU SERIOUS?

Are you really serious about building your audience and making money with your show? Have you been talking about it long enough and really ready to take action?

A hope and a wish isn’t going to make it happen. You need to get serious and take action. Take that first step.

If you don’t have a mentor who can take your hand and walk you every step of the way to grow your audience and make money with your podcast, please go to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth and join us for a free training to see if we can help you get some clarity, build a plan and reach your goals.

Come join us as I present “6 Ways To Use Your Content To Attract Your Ideal Clients”.

On this free training you are going to discover:

  • How to develop your personality to attract your ideal clients
  • Why sponsorships and ads are NOT the ideal way to generate revenue
  • How to grow your network with your podcast
  • And more!

It happens on Saturday, March 27th at 11a ET, 8a PT. Sign up for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

If you are looking for a mentor who can help you shortcut the process of making money with your podcast and avoid all of the pain of trial and error, this free training is for you. Let’s grow your community and start making money with your show.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

5 Ways To Grow Your Podcast This Week – PTC 325

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

If you want to grow your audience, you need to find ways to reach new listeners. Promoting to your current listeners over and over again won’t do much to bring in new listeners. Find ways to get in front of people who are unaware of your show and invite them to listen.

On the show today, I am going to show you five ways you can find those new listeners over the next few days. You simply need to take action.

Before we jump into the five ideas, I have a little housekeeping.

PODCAST EDITING

First, if you want to free up time in your week that you spend editing your show, I can give you some help. I offer editing services for your show. This includes everything from basic show editing to full production and show notes.

Imagine what you could do to promote your show and grow your business if you had that time back every week. You can start with the basic package which will give you four shows a month. Or, you can check out the premium package with comes with one-on-one coaching, SEO-optimized show notes, images and thumbnails and more.

Visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/edit. Click on the “show me what is in each package” to see the full details of each. I would liove to give you back some time in your week.

Next, let me turn you on to a fantastic opportunity.

FIND PARTNERS

There is an event coming up March 3rd through the 5th. It is called Collaborate. This is an incredible way to find true partners who can help you grow.

During this virtual event, you are placed in small breakout rooms of around 8 people just like you. These are online experts in various niches such as online business, mindset, health and more.

Attendees are coaches, authors, speakers, program leaders, producers of podcasts, radio shows and events. Every attendee is looking to connect and partner with others to help each other grow their businesses, impact and income.

When you are placed in the breakout room, each person in the room has 2 minutes to tell others who they are, what they do, what support they can offer other attendees and what support they need.

If you find someone who might make a good partner and fits your niche, you agree to connect in the next few days to determine how you might help each other.

You will literally meet over 100 people. Not all will fit your niche. That will depend on your target.

Let’s say you help small businesses set up their accounting books. In a breakout room you meet a coach who helps small business leaders with their sales process. The two of you have the same target audience but offer different services. That is where the collaboration comes in.

RESERVE YOUR SPOT

You can reserve your spot for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

However, there is an upgrade VIP option for only $47. I would highly recommend going VIP. You will find so much more value. You also get a directory of everyone who attends to help you find even more partners.

Get signed up. It will be the best three days you can invest to explode your next year.

I have attended Collaborate three times now. I’ve always gone VIP. This event has done more for my show and business than anything I’ve done. There were 40 people in my niche alone that I met at just one event. I meet more and more each time I attend.

Join Collaborate at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

Let’s talk about other things you can do over the next week to grow your show.

GET INTERVIEWED

First, get interviewed on another show. We talk about this a ton. Finding complimentary shows in your niche is a great way to grow.

Reach out to a podcaster in your niche to begin the discussion. I’m sure you listen to a few shows who target the same audience you target. Let’s chat with those podcasters first.

Send the podcaster a note. Start with something specific you liked about an episode. “Hey, Erik! Great episode on growing your show. I’ve just sent three e-mails to other podcasters to see if we can swap interviews. Love the idea.” Keep it short.

Next, tell the podcaster that it appears you target the same audience in complimentary ways. “As I was listening to your show, it hit me. It sounds like you help coaches refine their funnel so they can get more clients. I help coaches transform their information into entertainment on their podcast to get more clients.”

Finally, ask for an opportunity to talk. You are NOT asking for an interview. Ask for a chat. “Would you have time over the next week to jump on a call to see how we might partner and help each other grow?”

Get the call booked. Spend the first 20 minutes finding out what they do. Then, spend the next 20 minutes telling them what you do. Spend the last 20 minutes brainstorming ways you can support each other.

A podcast interview on both sides might come of this. However, bigger opportunities might show up that you didn’t even consider.

This is the way Collaborate works. Rather then sending a cold e-mail, you are in a room for people looking for connections just like you. Again, find details at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

YOUR GUESTS

Your guests are a great resource to help you promote your show. Though you cannot expect it of them, it sure is nice when they share your interview with their audience.

Reach out to the person you interviewed or mentioned in the podcast. Tell them the episode is live. Then, tell them you would greatly appreciate it if they would mention it to their following.

Make it easy for them. Write the copy. Create the social media graphic. The easier you can make it for your guest to share the episode, the more likely it will be that they actually share it.

The same is true when you answer questions on your show. If you receive an e-mail and you include that question on the show, reply to the e-mail and let them know you answered their question on the episode. Give them a link. Ask them to share it the same way you would ask your guest.

SWAP

To promote your show, you could swap mentions with another podcaster. So many podcasters think the only way to partner with another show is to get interviewed on the show. There are many other ways.

One great way to get your show promoted is to swap mentions in your newsletter. Connect with another podcaster in your niche who has a decent e-mail list. You will know they do if they have frequent lead magnets are mailing often.

Connect just like we talked about. Reach out to let them know you appreciate what they do. Be specific. Tell them you have similar audiences. Ask if they would like to partner to grow. If you connect, simply mention each other’s show in your e-mails to your audience.

You could say something like, “Hey, I found a really cool podcast I thought you might enjoy. As you are trying to grow your audience and make money with your show, you need to be sure your process is solid. Check out the Yadda Yadda show. They help you build your process from lead magnet to shopping cart.”

You can find partners just like this at Collaborate. Check it out at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/colllaborate.

SUPERFANS

The fourth way to promote your show is by leveraging your superfans. These people will be evangelists for your show, because they love it. If anyone will promote your show, it will be these people. You simply need to empower them.

First, create a list of superfans. Find the people that comment on your episodes, send you e-mail about the show and interact with you on Facebook. You know who they are. You might have 3 or 37. Write them down.

Next, create a post on Facebook and tag your superfans. Be sure to ask a question, so the post starts getting some interaction and gets seen by others.

This could be something like, “Just want to thank a bunch of the listeners to Podcast Talent Coach. Thanks to Bruce, Elaine, Greg, Josh, TaVona, Oscar, Laura, Chris, Rick, Prasha, Andy, Cat, Tony, Kim, Christine and so many others. I really appreciate you listening to the show. What is one idea you’ve picked up from the show that has helped your podcast?”

Be sure to respond to everyone who comments. Interact. If you can get some traction with the post, friends of your superfans will start to see the interaction. Mention your show by name so others can find it.

ADD A LINK

My final idea today is to add a link to your show in your e-mail signature. Make it easy to find your show.

Next, add some valuable content in the email with a call-to-action. This could be a free download or checklist or top 5 ideas. Make it something your audience can use. Make sure it is valuable.

Finally, invite your subscribers to share it with a friend. Say something like, “If you know someone who could use this information as well, please forward this e-mail to them. They can have this free resource as well.”

TAKE ACTION

There you go. Five ideas to grow your audience this week. Now, these ideas will do nothing to grow your audience unless you actually take action and do something.

Pick one of these ideas and take action. If you can get one done, select another and take more action. I would rather see you complete one than start all five and complete none of them.

If you want to start making powerful connections with others who can help you grow, I really encourage you to attend Collaborate. It is an amazing event that can help you skyrocket your growth. Get all of the details for Collaborate at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

Have a great week.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Attract Clients With Your Podcast [Part 2] – PTC 321

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Roger Killen and the Vancouver Business Network recently invited me to present to their group. I taught them how to attract clients with a podcast.

Over the course of an hour, these entrepreneurs learned how to grow a podcast audience and attract their ideal clients with their content. I thought you might benefit from the content as well.

This presentation was an hour long. Rather than doubling the length of my typical episode, I’ve divided it into two episodes.

This is the is the second half of that presentation. You can hear part on in episode 320.

TRAINING

I have a few great resources for you this week.

I am doing another free workshop for you. It is called “6 Ways To Make Money With Your Podcast”. If you want to make money with your podcast, this will help you develop your strategy.

This workshop will go deeper than the training I’ve given you on these two episodes. We will actually develop ideas for your show. You will receive a workbook to give you a clear focus for your strategy.

Do you want to leverage your audience and authority in your niche to monetize your show?

Do you want to grow your audience to consistently produce and promote your content in just a few minutes a day?

On this training, you will discover …

  • How to transform your show into a successful podcast using your personality
  • Why some podcasts don’t make money and how to avoid these pitfalls
  • How to attract your ideal clients with your podcast
  • How to keep listeners coming back episode after episode to grow your audience
  • And much more

Get registered at www.podcasttalentcoach.com/growth.

LIBSYN

If you need a host for your audio, be careful of the free services. Companies that offer their service for free often have a difficult time making money. If they aren’t making money, they can’t stay in business very long.

If your hosting company closes their doors and goes away, your audio goes away as well. All of your work is down the drain. Find a solid company and pay for great service.

I am now an affiliate of Libsyn. My show has been hosted on Libsyn since it began back in 2013. They also have fantastic support to help you set up your feed and move your show if you need it.

You can get your first month free using the coupon code PTC at Libsyn.com.

PODCAST EDITING

If you are spending too much time editing and posting your podcast and not enough time trying to attract listeners or building a business around your show, I now have a team ready to takeover your editing.

There are three packages available. You can start with the basic service that includes simple editing, mixing and mastering. Or you can go all in with the premium service that handles YouTube video, promoting, SEO, timestamps, show notes, and more.

You can find all of the packages at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/editing.

TRAINING

In this second half of the training I did for the Vancouver Business Network, I will show you the 3 big challenges most podcasters face when growing their audience and how you can overcome those challenges.

The 6 reasons podcasts don’t make money are laid out in this episode.

Many people make podcasting more difficult than it needs to be. I will show you how to make it much easier.

You also will learn the three Ps necessary for successful content. These are secrets most podcast gurus don’t teach you.

LAUNCH HELP

If you haven’t launched your podcast yet, I offer a free mini-course in this presentation as well. You can find it at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/launch.

I also mention 7 ways to attract your ideal clients using a podcast. You can find that free training atwww.PodcastTalentCoach.com/attract.

Again, you can catch up with the first part of this presentation on in episode 320.

Enjoy the session.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Attract Clients With Your Podcast [Part 1] – PTC 320

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Roger Killen and the Vancouver Business Network recently invited me to present to their group. I taught them how to attract clients with a podcast.

Over the course of an hour, these entrepreneurs learned how to grow a podcast audience and attract their ideal clients with their content. I thought you might benefit from the content as well.

This presentation was an hour long. Rather than doubling the length of my typical episode, I’ve divided it into two episodes.

COURSE CREATION SUMMIT

I have a few great resources for you this week.

When I built Audience Explosion Blueprint, I already had four paid participants before I even launched the course. To make it even better, they told me what I should put in the program to make it easy for them to give me money for it. How great is that!?!?!

Would you like to learn how to fill up your classes with paying clients before you have even launched your program? Join the upcoming Course Creation Summit FOR FREE! Experts will share with you their secrets for how you can create profitable online courses.

In fact, I will be part of the summit on Thursday, January 28th around 11:30a Central Time.

Courses allow you to do the work once and then sell it over and over again.

Get your free ticket now to course creation summit. The event runs all week. If you want to do the work once and sell it over and over again, a course can help you do that. Come learn how.

You can get your seat for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/CreateMyCourse.

LIBSYN

If you need a host for your audio, be careful of the free services. Companies that offer their service for free often have a difficult time making money. If they aren’t making money, they can’t stay in business very long.

If your hosting company closes their doors and goes away, your audio goes away as well. All of your work is down the drain. Find a solid company and pay for great service.

I am now an affiliate of Libsyn. My show has been hosted on Libsyn since it began back in 2013. They also have fantastic support to help you set up your feed and move your show if you need it.

You can get your first month free using the coupon code PTC at Libsyn.com.

PODCAST EDITING

If you are spending too much time editing and posting your podcast and not enough time trying to attract listeners or building a business around your show, I now have a team ready to takeover your editing.

There are three packages available. You can start with the basic service that includes simple editing, mixing and mastering. Or you can go all in with the premium service that handles YouTube video, promoting, SEO, timestamps, show notes, and more.

You can find all of the packages at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/editing.

MENTORSHIP

Finally, this is the last call for my Podcast Profits Mentorship. This opportunity is very limited.

This is a special no-risk opportunity for a very limited number of podcasters.

You won’t have to pay thousands or even a few dollars to join this exclusive group. However, you will need to be a great fit.

In this group, I will help you grow your podcast and make money with your show. It comes with no risk to you.

I am looking for 6 podcasters to join Podcast Profits Mentorship.

In this exclusive group, you will …

  • Grow your audience and influence
  • Develop a product or service to sell
  • Build a framework to make money with your show
  • Participate in a small mastermind to help you reach your goals

Membership in this group comes with no risk. You pay me nothing up front. I only get paid a commission of 20% when you make money with your show, similar to most affiliate programs.

To keep the group small, 6 podcasters will be selected from all applications. I want to be sure I have time to give each member the attention they need to succeed.

To qualify for the group, you must …

  • Have published 25 episodes
  • Be willing to attend a 90-minute call every week
  • Be willing to spend 30 minutes a day to grow your audience and business
  • Share with me your download and revenue data during the program
  • Allow me to use your success as a case study

The program begins February 2, 2021. Application deadline is Thursday, January 28, 2021.

If you fit and you’re hungry to grow and win, click here to apply:

www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/mentor

TRAINING

In this training, you will discover three ways you can use your content to attract your ideal clients.

You will discover why now is the ideal time to begin using your podcast to turn your ideal listener into your ideal client.

In this training, I also give you a way to repurpose your content across multiple platforms without adding a lot of extra work to your week.

On the next episode, I will show you the 3 big challenges most podcasters face when growing their audience and how you can overcome those challenges.

The 6 reasons podcasts don’t make money are laid out in the next episode.

Many people make podcasting more difficult than it needs to be. I will show you how to make it much easier.

You also will learn the three Ps necessary for successful content. These are secrets most podcast gurus don’t teach you.

That second part of the training comes next week.

LAUNCH HELP

If you haven’t launched your podcast yet, I offer a free mini-course in this presentation as well. You can find it at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/launch.

I also mention 7 ways to attract your ideal clients using a podcast. You can find that free training at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/attract.

Enjoy the session.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Audience GROWTH With Lead Generation – PTC 319

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Growing your audience begins with lead generation. These are people who share your interest in your niche. Where do you find those people who can become subscribers?

Audience growth is a process. To increase your downloads, you need to generate more leads. Then, you need to convert those leads into subscribers just like a sales funnel.

LINKS

Links mentioned in this episode:

Joe Sayles Jr. summit –

www.FlipYourMarketingFlops.com

Podcast production with Podcast Talent Coach –

www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/editing

Podcast hosting with Libsyn –

www.Libsyn.com

Podcast Profits Mentorship application –

www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/mentor

Ultimate Course Formula with Iman Aghay –

www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/UCF

Before we get into the process, let me tell you about a few opportunities for you and your podcast.

PRODUCTION

First, I have started offering podcast production. If you are spending too much time each week editing, posting and promoting your show, I can help. I have a team that can handle these tasks, so you can spend more of your time finding clients and building your brand and business.

There are three different levels ranging from simple editing to a full service done-for-you package. You can see your options and find a package that is right for you at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/editing.

HOSTING

Second, if you do not have a hosting service for your podcast, I am now an affiliate for Libsyn. I have been hosting my podcast with Libsyn since I started the show in 2013. Some of the biggest shows are hosted by Libsyn. They also have amazing support.

If you would like your first month free, visit www.Libsyn.com and use the coupon code PTC for Podcast Talent Coach.

MENTORSHIP

The final opportunity is very limited.

This is a special no-risk opportunity for a very limited number of podcasters.

You won’t have to pay thousands or even a few dollars to join this exclusive group. However, you will need to be a great fit.

In this group, I will help you grow your podcast and make money with your show. It comes with no risk to you.

I am looking for 6 podcasters to join Podcast Profits Mentorship.

In this exclusive group, you will …

  • Grow your audience and influence
  • Develop a product or service to sell
  • Build a framework to make money with your show
  • Participate in a small mastermind to help you reach your goals

Membership in this group comes with no risk. You pay me nothing up front. I only get paid a commission of 20% when you make money with your show, similar to most affiliate programs.

To keep the group small, 6 podcasters will be selected from all applications. I want to be sure I have time to give each member the attention they need to succeed.

To qualify for the group, you must …

  • Have published 25 episodes
  • Be willing to attend a 90-minute call every week
  • Be willing to spend 30 minutes a day to grow your audience and business
  • Share with me your download and revenue data during the program
  • Allow me to use your success as a case study

The program begins February 2, 2021. Application deadline is Sunday, January 24, 2021.

If you fit and you’re hungry to grow and win, click here to apply:

www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/mentor

WHO DO YOU FOLLOW?

Let’s talk about leads and who you follow.

I have found my greatest success when I pick one expert and follow that person until I’ve gone as far as possible. Chances are good that your followers are the same.

Have you ever binged content? It happens all the time with podcasts.

There will be those days when you see a bit spike in your downloads. This isn’t a big influx of listeners. This is most likely one or two listeners getting all they can.

Over the past four days, I drove 2,000 miles taking my daughter back to college. Dropping her off doesn’t look like it is going to get any easier anytime soon.

On our drive, we spent 12 hours consuming TEDx talks from an event put on by Sarah Lawrence. It was all about positive change.

I discovered Sarah through Iman Aghay with Success Road Academy. I have been following Iman for about a year now, consuming all I can from him.

Iman has a program called Ultimate Course Formula. It helps you build your program in 6 weeks. This leads into his higher level coaching programs. My personal coach teaches in these programs. That is how I discovered Iman.

Over the past 12 months, I’ve been watching all of the videos in the courses. I have watched most of Iman’s YouTube videos. He has a member call every week that I attend. There isn’t anything I haven’t consumed. I want it all.

More importantly, I tell people like you about Iman. This is how his audience and influence grows. Word-of-mouth is powerful. It is how you find leads for your podcast and business.

Lead generation is a key step in growing your tribe.

LEADS

Leads are people you want to pursue to see if they qualify to be a listener, client or customer. This could simply be an audience or list of names.

Once you determine they have an interest in your subject or niche, they become a qualified lead. They are now a name with an interest.

As they become aware of your content, material or offerings, you determine they are a fit for what you do. Now they are a qualified prospect.

From here, you build rapport. You grow the know, like and trust. Foster the relationship.

When the relationship becomes strong, they become a subscriber, customer or client.

This is the customer journey, more often called the funnel these days.

So, if you want more listeners, you need to get more leads. Don’t let the term lead only represent clients. Leads could also become subscribers and grow your audience. You still need to find people who share your interest.

LEAD GENERATION

Joe Sayles Jr. is a Lead Generation Funnel Efficiency Coach, Strategist, and Speaker who has served in various digital marketing channel positions.

Joe has an amazing background. He has owned a martial arts studio, a company that created blogs and websites, and a digital marketing company.

Today, using Joe’s proprietary Lead Generation Domination System™ that was developed over the past decade, he has helped generate more than $15 million in online revenue. Joe combines his knowledge and experiences to help solopreneur businesses learn to increase their leads, decrease their costs, and grow their profits by a minimum of 30% in 90 days (or less), by creating efficient lead generation funnels.

I am excited to have him on the show today to help us develop our lead generation.

In this conversation, you will learn …

– how your podcast fits into your funnel

– how to overcome the biggest struggles with lead generation

– the biggest mistakes most online experts make with lead generation

– and much more

I love the nuggets Joe gives us to grow our show. The lady that is 70-something getting more work than she can handle was amazing. Your podcast is part of your system to build your business. Make sure you lay it out and plan.

Get connected to his mini-summit the 3rd Thursday of each month. It is coming up this week. Find the link at www.FlipYourMarketingFlops.com.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Grow Your Audience With Networking – PTC318

Leave a comment
Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

In this interview on networking, we discuss:

  • The biggest benefit of networking
  • How podcasters can use networking to grow their show
  • The biggest challenges of networking
  • How to network without the awkwardness
  • Much more

Connect with Basile Lemba here:

HOW WE THINK OF NETWORKING

When you think of networking, you probably imagine walking into a room filled with salespeople all trying to jam their business card into your hand and sell you something. Why else would you network?

The purpose of networking is to grow your network. It is not to make a sale to one person.

One year at New Media Expo, I bought a ticket to Cliff Ravenscraft’s networking event. I thought it would be a great way to introduce my show to a ton of other podcasters who could benefit from my information.

Unfortunately, I didn’t know how to network properly.

When I walked into the room of about 100 people, nobody noticed. I got a drink and few snacks from the table. Still, nobody cared.

I finally made my way over to one of those stand-up cocktail tables and joined a couple other podcasters. They were talking about their shows.

I introduced myself and they asked about my show. After I told them a bit about this show, we talked about their shows.

The conversation came to that awkward end where we have nothing left to say. One of made an excuse to go get another drink or something.

It continued like that for the next 30 minutes. I finally faded out of the room unnoticed just like I arrived.

Looking back on that day, I realized I was doing it all wrong. People don’t want to know about me and my show. They want to talk about themselves. If you want to be interesting, be interested.

NETWORKING TO GROW

As you connect with others, find out as much as you can about that person. If it would make sense to partner and help each other grow, get their contact info. Agree to follow up to see how you might help each other reach your goals.

Networking is intended to find partners, not push your stuff on people.

If you create a partnership with a person who can introduce you or your stuff to 100 other people, you’ve leveraged the opportunity to make as many as 100 new listeners or better yet … clients. If you sell only to the person you’ve met at the event, you’ve only created one new client.

To grow your podcast, we need to find people who can introduce your show to groups of people. If you tell one person about your show, you get one new listener. If that person can put you in front of a new group of people, or simply tell their audience about you, your show can find hundreds or thousands of listeners.

A PODCAST EXAMPLE

I was on a coaching strategy call the other night with a producer of a real estate podcast. Just like most of my clients, he is trying to grow the audience.

The podcast helps people buy and sell their home. They give tips to sell the house quickly, get the best deal and mistakes to avoid.

He told me they promote the show on Facebook and through e-mail when new episodes are released. Unfortunately, those people already know about the show. Those activities are doing nothing to gain new listeners.

We brainstormed ideas to get in front of new listeners. I suggested they partner with complimentary services in the real estate industry to market the show. They could get mortgage lenders, closing agents and staging consultants to tell their clients about the show.

If these agents could promote the podcast to their audiences, the podcast could make mention of the services. Everybody wins.

The key to growing your audience is finding new potential listeners in big groups. Find partners who are already talking to your target listener.

This is why developing your ideal target listener is so important. When you know what your listener is all about, you can determine who is already speaking into their lives. Partner and grow.

You can use networking to grow your show if you use it in the right way.

BASILE LEMBA

Today, we talk to Basile Lemba. He teaches people how to network properly.

Basile was born in Cameroon in West Africa. He moved to France, then Florida. He now lives in Virginia. Each time he moved, Basile was forced to rebuild his connections and network.

As he attended various events, he realized most people lacked the specific know-how to properly connect with each other. That is how he founded BL Networking. Over the past 14 years, Basile has been teaching people how to properly network with each other to get results and grow their business.

We are lucky to have Basile here today to share some tips that will help us grow our podcast audience and connect with powerful partners.

Basile Lemba has over 30 years of experience in Networking.

He is the creator of “PROFITABLE NETWORKING BLUEPRINT” and the Founder of the NETWORKING INSTITUTE.

He has helped over 30,000 businesses acquire the right clients and dramatically increase their revenues. These companies range from “Mom and Pop” to MICROSOFT.

He has an upcoming book on Networking titled: “Everything you think you know about Networking is Wrong!”

Find Basile’s program at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/network.

Do you need help with your podcast? Check out www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

7 Places To Find Your Clients – PTC 314

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

If you are trying to make money with your podcast, this series of episodes will help you create your plan. Last week, we discussed defining your ideal target listener. Today, I want to help you find those listeners and potential clients.

This started in episode 312 where we discussed your 2021 podcast roadmap. That is the foundation for these next few episodes. If you haven’t listened to that show, I would suggest you start there.

This series of episodes will help you create big things in the coming year if you take action and do the things I’m putting in front of you.

I have created a workshop to find your money making idea. It is “6 ways to attract your ideal clients with a podcast”. This free training will happen on December 30th. Register for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

Let’s talk about 7 places to find your ideal clients.

GROUPS

Social media groups can be a great way to get in front of your ideal clients. However, you need to obey the rules.

You cannot get into a group and become an instant salesperson. You need to provide value.

If members of the group get tremendous value from your posts, they will seek you out for more. One way to offer value is to reply to many of the posts. Even replies of encouragement help.

Every time you post in the group, you create an opportunity to be seen. You are creating top-of-mind awareness for your potential clients.

Studies show that a person needs to be exposed to a marketing message three times before it registers in the mind. Create frequency to the target by being seen often. Engage and interact.

Join 3 groups in your niche and offer value.

PODCASTS

Landing interviews on podcasts isn’t as difficult as it seems if you do it the correct way.

How many times have you been approached by a potential guest or representative of a potential guest asking to be interviewed on your show? I’m sure there have been times when you read the summary of the guest and realize it isn’t anywhere close to being a fit for your show.

I get these all of the time. It was especially true when I didn’t do interviews on my podcast. They would e-mail me about their latest book and say, “I think it would be a perfect fit for your show.”

Really? I don’t usually interview people. I especially don’t interview people about that topic.

That is the wrong way to land interviews.

First provide some value. Pursue fewer shows that are right in your roundhouse.

Last week we talked about your ideal target listener. One of the reasons we define our listener is so we can find them. Here is where that comes into play.

Find 5 to 10 podcasts that also speak to your ideal client. Actually listen to a few episodes of each.

Reach out to those hosts and tell them what you love about their show. Ask if there is any way you can support what they are doing. You might even provide a resource you love or a blog post from another creator that talks about a similar topic.

Start the relationship and conversation. When you have developed some rapport, mention that you speak to a very similar audience. Ask if you might get on a call to discuss how you might help each other.

Do this on a call and not over e-mail. If you are willing to commit the time to a discussion, you appear much more willing to help and partner.

On the call, find ways to support each other. This might be interview opportunities. It might be other ways. Get creative.

Work to land interviews on 3 complimentary podcasts.

GIVE

Creating content is hard work. Offer to help a content creator do just that.

You have great content that can be repurposed across other platforms.

Offer to create guest content or conduct an ask me anything for a complimentary content creator in your niche.

This should not simply be a reposting of something you already used. Either create something new or refine one of your pieces specifically for their audience.

By offering to create content for another creator, you lighten their workload and get in front of their audience. Everybody wins.

I first learned of Erik Fisher on Cliff Ravenscraft’s podcast. Erik would do a weekly segment on Cliff’s show where he would highlight a new tech resource he discovered, such as an app.

This added content to Cliff’s show while getting Erik in front of a new audience.

Find opportunities to provide your content to other content creators.

CROWDS

Empowering your audience to help you is a viral way to find new clients. Let your audience help you create an episode.

Dave Jackson does this on his School of Podcasting show every month. He presents the question of the month at the beginning of the month. Listeners are then invited to submit audio of their answer.

The final episode of the month is a collage of the answers Dave has received. Each submission gets highlighted on the show and is allowed to promote their own podcast.

By creating this episode, Dave helps his listeners. He gets great content for an episode. Dave also creates the opportunity to get his listeners talking about his show. “Hey, Mike! I heard you on Dave’s show last week.”

This creates goodwill between Dave and his listeners. It also gets his listeners in the habit of reaching out to Dave if they need help with something.

Create a crowdsourced episode of your own around your solution to their problem.

VIDEO

Do the work once and use it many times over. You would hard to create your podcast every week. Don’t make it a one-and-done.

Find ways to repurpose your content. If you start with a video of the show, you can then use the audio as the podcast. You can also use the transcript as a blog.

Now, you are doing the work once, you are creating the content once, but using it in three different ways. You can also use pieces of it on social media and in your newsletter.

People like to consume content in different ways. Allow them to consume your content in the way they enjoy most.

To get in front of new clients, repurpose your content on YouTube.

NEWSLETTERS

I hope you have an e-mail list. This is one connection to your audience that you actually own. Facebook can kick you off anytime they would like. You own the list of e-mail addresses of people who signed up with you.

Leverage this list to get in front of new listeners. The people on your list already know you. How can you use it to find new clients?

Partner with other creators in your niche. Just like you would include their segment on your show, include their content in your newsletter. They could do the same for you.

This should be part of your conversation when you reach out to partner. If they have an e-mail list that they send to frequently, swap content.

You can give them great content for their newsletter. They can give you great content for your newsletter. You both win.

Swap newsletter mentions with two complimentary content creators.

STAGES

The final way this week to find your clients is stages. I don’t mean physical stages. We are talking about any opportunity to get in front of an audience.

Summits are a great way to get in front of a new audience and build your e-mail list. A virtual summit involves various experts giving presentations around a specific topic.

People submit their name and e-mail address to get access to the summit. Sometimes you are allowed to offer your lead magnet during the summit to build your list as well.

Find a summit where you can give a presentation.

TWO-WAY STREET

Remember with any of these ideas, you need to give first. Seek ways to help the other person succeed. It will come back around.

If your partner knows you are there to help them, they will be more willing to help you.

It needs to be a win-win-win situation. Your partner needs to win. The audience needs to win. Then, you need to win. Provide great value and everybody wins.

Use a few of these ideas this week to get in front of your ideal clients.

Then, come join me at the workshop I’ve created to find your money making idea. It is “6 ways to attract your ideal clients with a podcast”.

This free training will happen on December 30th. Register for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth. I’ll see you there.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Your 2021 Podcast Roadmap – PTC 312

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

When podcasters come to me for guidance, we start with a free strategy session to see if and how I can be of help. During this session, we develop a roadmap for the next 12 months. If it then makes sense to work together, we discuss what that could look like.

Today, I want to help you create your 2021 roadmap. This roadmap will be a fill-in-the-blank roadmap, because you and I aren’t sitting down to discuss your specific show and goals. You’ll need to do a lot of the work on your own.

YOUR STRATEGY SESSION

If you have created at least 25 episodes and would like to apply for a free strategy session with me, visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching. You can apply right there.

If you are disappointed with all of the work you’ve been putting into your show but seeing very little ROI, and you would like 2021 to be different – the year you begin making money with your podcast – apply for your strategy session. We’ll see what is possible.

This could be your opportunity. I’ll show you how you can get more reach and visibility. Plus, I’ll show you how to leverage the work you’ve already done to grow a business around your show.

www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.

Let’s talk about your roadmap. Get a sheet of paper and a pen.

Yes, go old school. The physical act of writing does something to the brain as you are creating. It activates the brain in a way that typing does not.

FOUR STEPS ROADMAP

There are four steps to create your roadmap. We will go through each.

On your paper, draw a line straight down the middle of the paper from top to bottom. Now, draw a line right across the middle of the paper from side to side.

You should now have four quadrants on the page. We will fill each of the four quadrants with different ideas and evaluations for your roadmap.

TOPIC

In the upper left corner, write topic. This is the first step.

To be a podcast success, you need to create your show around a topic that you love. This needs to be something you can talk about for days and never get tired.

I know. You’re saying, “Erik, of course this is my favorite topic. Why else would I be doing the show?”

Well, maybe. I’m not talking about a topic you think is cool. This needs to be a topic that really gets you excited. People should be saying, “Enough already – can’t you talk about something else?”

You talk about this all the time. You eat, drink and sleep this topic.

Here is how we find out. Set a timer for 10 minutes. In the topic quadrant, write as many show topic ideas as you can. Don’t evaluate the topics. Just write as many ideas as you can in 10 minutes.

Pause the episode, set the timer and write. Then come back and push play.

HOW MANY TOPICS?

Ok, count the number of topic ideas you’ve created. If you wrote down over 50 ideas, you are on the right track. This topic comes easy to you.

If you created between 35 and 50 topics, there is a good chance you have a topic you love. Your creativity or self evaluation might be holding back the ideas. Still, 35 is pretty good.

If you were able to only come up with 20 to 35 topic ideas, you may want to try this exercise again. You are walking on thin ice. Struggling to come up with topic ideas will create what appears to be writer’s block.

Passion kills writer’s block. If you love the topic, you have no issues creating topic ideas.

Think about what new people in this niche need to know. Discuss terms, resources, thought leaders, how to get started, where to find the best tools and other similar topic ideas. Now, try the exercise again and see what happens. If you still struggle, you should consider a different topic.

Now if you came up with fewer than 20 topic ideas, you are in the wrong niche. I don’t want to be the one to call your baby ugly. However, you are going to struggle every week trying to create your show.

If you have trouble deciding were to start, you won’t start. Your podcast will fade away quickly. Then you are going to proclaim podcasting doesn’t work. No, your topic didn’t work for you. Don’t start down a path that you don’t love. It is too much work.

BUILD THE AUDIENCE

In the upper right quadrant, write audience. Once you have a topic, you need to build an audience.

When I have a strategy session with a podcaster, we talk about goals. Most of the time the goals will always include “grow my audience”.

You need to understand that size is relative. It is more important to have a passionate audience who wants what you have to offer rather than a big yet passive audience.

People search out the Apple store. Those fans are passionate. Many more people shop at WalMart. However, very few people have a WalMart sticker on the back window of their car or on their laptop.

You want to create fans who will become clients. Lots of listeners are great. Lots of listeners who will buy your stuff is even better.

According to Canalys Worldwide PC Analysis in October 2019, Apple ranked 4th with 7.8% of the world computer market behind Lenovo, HP and Dell. Apple was almost 10% behind number 3 Dell.

When was the last time you saw anyone lining up outside a store waiting for the new HP to be released?

Dell Technologies has a market cap of $52 billion. Apple’s market cap is almost $2 trillion. Now, Apple phones drive that cap. But it is four times bigger.

FIND YOUR IDEAL CLIENTS

You want to find people who want everything you have. In that upper right quadrant, start listing people who are already talking to your ideal clients. This could be podcasters, bloggers, YouTube creators, event coordinators, associations, manufacturers, magazines, radio shows, people with big e-mail lists and anyone else talking to your potential customers.

Where can you find these people? Where do they hang out online? How can you get in front of your ideal clients?

In order to build your audience, you need to find people who aren’t aware of you and your show. Then, invite them to come listen.

SOLVE A PROBLEM

After you have built the audience, you need to create something of value for them so they can give you money. Both of you need to win here.

The best way to offer value to your audience is to help them solve a problem. What are their struggles? What hurdles are they trying to overcome?

When you have a topic that you love, finding their problems shouldn’t be too difficult. You’ve been there. You have been through the struggles.

Determine how you can help your tribe overcome those struggles. Then, create something to sell around your solution.

Solve one specific problem for your listener.

If you know exactly who you help and what you help them do, your single solution should be clear. You can now find those people and offer to help.

In the lower left quadrant, write problems. Now list all of the problems that exist for your ideal customer. Remember, you only need to solve one. Let’s find the right one. The one most would be willing to pay money to solve.

As you brainstorm problems, think of the things people always ask you about. How do you do this or how do you fix that? Where are they struggling?

What questions do you see most often in Facebook groups or online forums? What problems are people in your niche complaining about most often?

These are all signs of problems that need to be solved, and you’re just the person to do it. Find your solution.

SELL IT

Your final step is to get people to buy your solution. In the lower right quadrant, write system.

There are three parts to your system. How can you promote your solution? Where will you sell it? How will you deliver it?

Those are the three things you need to determine. Create a system to promote, sell and delivering your solution.

If you are selling a physical product, many Amazon is right for you. Maybe you’ve created a course and something like Teachable is your delivery.

In this quadrant, write your solution to these three parts. You need ways to promote your solution. You will definitely mention it on the podcast. Where else can you promote it? What affiliate partners might be able to promote it for you? List all of your ideas.

Write down how you will sell your solution. Is there anything you need to learn to do this? Don’t make it more complicated than it needs to be.

Finally, how will you deliver your solution?

Stay focused on one problem and one solution to that problem. You can’t create multiple streams of income until you have the first one flowing first.

START YOUR ROADMAP

Those are your four steps to your 2021 podcast roadmap. Get started today. If you want different results in the next 12 months, you need to start doing different things. Now is your time.

If you would like some help creating your specific plan, let’s talk.

If you have created at least 25 episodes and would like to apply for a free strategy session with me, visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching. You can apply right there.

This could be your opportunity. I’ll show you how you can get more reach and visibility. Plus, I’ll show you how to leverage the work you’ve already done to grow a business around your show.

www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Don’t Wait For Perfect – PTC311

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Let’s look back over the past 12 months. What are you working on that isn’t quite yet launched? Don’t wait for perfect. Ship it.

Some of my greatest accomplishments happened when I was pushed along before I felt I was 100% ready. I wasn’t perfect, but I started.

TRY IT

It was August 1994. I was working at the big rock radio station in my hometown. The gig was only overnights. But, it was full-time and in the big city.

That night, we were having our annual birthday bash for the station. This was a big concert to celebrate the 16th anniversary of the station.

This particular concert featured REO Speedwagon, Starship and Cheap Trick. Three bands that were a bit past their prime, but still big staples on album rock radio.

At this point, I had been in radio for about 6 years. I have been to plenty of concerts. However, this was our show. And it was at the 8,000-seat arena in town.

Starship had just got off the stage. REO was the only band left to play. That’s when the program director said, “Let’s go. We’re going to welcome the crowd and introduce the band.”

Now, I have never had the desire to be on stage. I’ve never wanted to be a public speaker. In fact, speaking in front of a crowd made me incredibly nervous like it does with most people.

My boss grabs the entire on-air staff, about 12 of us, and we head on stage. The crowd sees us and goes crazy.

The morning show takes the mic and says hi. Another roar from the crowd. They thank the rockers for coming out on that particular night to help us celebrate. Another cheer.

THE BIG CHEER

That’s when it happened.

The morning guys begin to introduce the entire staff. One by one, they go down the line pointing out the DJ and getting a cheer from the crowd.

My show is on the radio right before them. They have kind of taken me under their wing.

As they get to me, they give me a little longer intro with some brotherly kind of love and the crowd gives me a cheer a bigger than I expected.

That felt good. My butterflies went away. My chest puffed up just a bit.

That’s when I realized what I had been missing. There is a point where my anxiousness turned into exhilaration.

Where I had once feared speaking to a crowd, I learned that it might just be something I would come to love.

Sure, the butterflies are still there before I step out. But, it is more like the butterflies you experience right before you get to the top of the rollercoaster hill. You know what is on the other side, but it’s still a little scary.

Suddenly you’re in the middle of it absorbing it all. Taking it all in. You just need to get over the top of the hill.

This year, give something a try that you’ve been avoiding due to fear. You won’t know you love it until you try.

So few people are willing to push past the top of the hill. You can discover a whole new world if you just push yourself to try something new.

JUMP

Next, jump.

It was April 2013. I was just launching Podcast Talent Coach. The show was still a blog and not yet a podcast.

I was writing for New Media Expo. They were using my posts on their website as part of their podcasting section.

The whole business was still coming together. The gurus all made it sound so easy. Create all of these multiple streams of income and you’d be rich before you knew it.

Unfortunately, I didn’t know much about the tech. I was a radio guy. I knew content. Figuring out an RSS feed and a funnel and a shopping cart was all a little beyond my reach.

My blog posts contained my e-mail address and an offer for coaching. I didn’t yet know what that coaching would look like. I just knew I could help people shape their content and create stronger shows.

Then one day I received an e-mail.

Ken reached out and told me his wife found my blog. Ken was on the radio and needed help improving his show.

He and I agreed to jump on a Skype call and devise a plan. We chatted for about 90 minutes. At the end, we had a plan to help him reach his goals.

The next day, I e-mailed Ken an agreement recapping what I would provide and what he would pay. He sent me that first payment as a money order. We started coaching.

Was it perfect? Was the funnel optimized? Heck no. I didn’t even know what a funnel was at this point.

We just made an agreement, he paid me and we got started.

Don’t wait until it’s perfect. Jump. Perfect is a pipe dream.

THE SHARKS

Finally, get started.

Last weekend, I had the pleasure of attending Collaborate. It was an amazing event where I made a ton of great connections.

Two weeks before Collaborate, the organizers were recruiting people to participate in Shark Attack.

During this part of the event, five people will make their pitch to a group of high level, online marketers with the hopes of getting those marketers to promote them to their list.

Shark Attack is an opportunity to really get to the next level and play big time.

Now, I was nowhere ready to apply for Shark Attack. My funnel wasn’t perfect. The Audience Explosion Blueprint didn’t have mounds of data to support the conversion numbers. I hadn’t done really big JV launches in the past.

Why would these big players ever want to promote me?

As I was talking with my coach, we discussed where I was and where I wanted to go. We chatted about the last webinar I did and how it converted.

She finally said, “Erik, you’re ready. Go for it.”

I said, “Are you sure?” Then I brought up all of the excuses. My funnel, my data, my history.

She assured me that all of that would be fine. It would never be perfect. I just needed to start.

At 11pm the night before the deadline, I prepared my pitch and shot the audition video. I hit the submit button and went to bed.

Two days later there was a prep call for the event. On this call, the organizers get everybody ready to network and connect. To get the event to run well, they explain everything you need to know to get the most out of the event.

During this call, the 5 participants for Shark Attack are announced.

THE WINNERS ARE …

When they got to the list of five participants, I heard my name called. I would be pitching to the sharks.

We had no idea who they would be. We only knew we would have two minutes to make our pitch and get the sharks interested in promoting our programs.

There was now less than four days to refine and perfect my pitch and figure out how to get these people to promote me. I would be pitching as hundreds of other online marketers watched. The sharks would then have 15 minutes to ask me questions and pick apart my idea.

When the day came for Shark Attack, the sharks turned out to be Jeanna Gabellini, Rob Goyette, Debbie Allen, Alex Mandossian, Michelle Schubnel, and Alex Moscow. All very big players in online marketing.

Names of the participants were drawn in random order. As the first few went, it was just as you would expect. Questions came quickly. Plans weren’t quite refined. Lots of inquiries about the numbers. It was rough.

MY TURN

Name after name was called. It quickly became obvious that I would be last. After the first four went through the process, it was my turn to make the pitch.

I wasn’t sure if waiting was more difficult or if going last actually benefitted my by seeing the others go first. The feedback they received helped me refine my pitch just a touch.

It was finally time. I made my two minute pitch and asked for the partnership. Immediately, Debbie Allen said, “I’m in.”

We were off to a good start. Then, Alex Mandossian chimed in. He told me he didn’t understand the promise I was making or what my clients would receive.

All of a sudden, the sharks were arguing amongst themselves. Michelle thought it was perfectly clear. Jeanna wasn’t quite convinced. Moscow really liked the idea. Rob doesn’t like podcasting, but thought his audience would be a fit.

It all came in a flurry. I answered questions as fast and as best as I could.

That fifteen minutes passed quickly. It was exhilarating. It was also a lot of pressure.

At the end of it all, four said they were in. The other two said they would be willing to have another conversation.

Wow! I went into this unsure of my ability and feeling unprepared. If it hadn’t been for my coach pushing me to try it anyway, I would have missed out. I wouldn’t have these incredible opportunities sitting in front of me ready to make 2021 an amazing year for me.

Sure, it’s scary. Sure, you don’t feel like you’re ready. It will always be scary. It will always feel like it could be better and more ready.

If you want to make big things happen in the next year, acknowledge the fear. Then, do it anyway. Take the first step.

THE NEXT STEP

Are you ready to make 2021 an incredible year? Now is the time to get started.

You won’t know you love it until you try.

Don’t wait until it’s perfect. Jump.

Acknowledge the fear. Then, do it anyway.

I have told you about my Audience Explosion Blueprint. You can get an incredible deal right now for Black Friday and Cyber Monday.

The two biggest shopping days of the year are coming. If you want to explode your audience over the next year, you can get in now with this deal.

Since it is available for a limited time, and since this podcast will be around for a very long time, I have posted the deal on the website. If the deal is still good, you will find it at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/BlackFriday.

Rocky grew his audience by 100% by going through the program. If you want to play big in 2021, get in on this now. Even if you don’t have a podcast yet, this will make even more sense for you.

Check it out at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/BlackFriday.

 

Whatever you do, make 2021 big. Get started. Use these three tips to reach your goals and live your dreams.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

5 Steps To Podcast Engagement – PTC 309

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

On a coaching call the other day, I was asked about my most effective way to grow my audience. You can get more podcast engagement in 5 easy steps.

DOUBLE DOWNLOADS

Over the last four months, I have been able to use this system to double my downloads and increase my e-mail list by 60%.

When I look back at some of the greatest personal and business successes in my life, I have to admit that I didn’t achieve the majority of them alone. If you look at your own successes, I’m sure you will come to the same conclusion.

My audience doubled and my e-mail grew by doing one thing. I partnered with others. Two minds are better than one.

Over the past four months, I have appeared on summits, on podcasts and in giveaways. I have leveraged the audience of others to grow incredibly fast.

I have always believed that my ability to develop long-lasting relationships and build mutually beneficial partnerships with others is my secret superpower.

Strategic partnerships are the most powerful way to scale any venture.

Find people who can help you double your results. Connect and collaborate.

COLLABORATE

If you want to join an amazing event that will help you follow this path, check out www.podcasttalentcoach.com/Collaborate.

At the upcoming, highly anticipated live virtual event COLLABORATE November 13 – 15, you will have opportunities to build these powerful alliances and find your ideal joint venture partners.

You will be among hundreds of top leaders and experts that have already signed up to attend. Don’t worry … there are plenty of people just getting started as well.

If you have been going it alone, or need to scale your results to an even higher level by bringing in more joint venture partners, this event is a must-attend for you.

See full details and register at www.podcasttalentcoach.com/Collaborate.

This will be my third time attending Collaborate. It happens on Zoom and it is a lot of fun, even if networking makes you uncomfortable.

PARTNERS

At the beginning of event, you will learn how to refine your collaborating pitch. You learn how to tell others what you do and how to explain what makes a great partner for you.

Then over the weekend, you will take part in about 20 small networking circles. These are groups of about 8 people. Everyone gets 2 minutes to explain what they do and how they can partner. If someone sounds like a great partner for you, the two of you agree to exchange info and connect at a later date.

The first time I attended, I met 40 people that made sense as partners for me. This is how I’ve been part of summits, giveaways and podcasts. It was great.

At the next event, I decided to be much more selective on my partner selections. I still found 20 people as potential partners.

What could 20 partners help you accomplish in the next year? If you had 20 people promoting your podcast and programs to their audience, how could your audience and engagement grow?

Here is your chance to make those connections. Visit www.podcasttalentcoach.com/collaborate.

ENGAGEMENT

Let’s talk about the five steps to create engagement with your audience.

These steps are going to sound easy. The concepts are easy to understand. You simply need to be diligent and consistent about implementing each.

ASK

First, ask for engagement. If you want engagement, you must ask.

Your audience won’t engage with your show unless you ask them to do so. If you want them to e-mail you, ask. If you want them to share the show with others, tell them how.

People don’t know what you want unless you tell them. Be specific.

SHOW AND TELL

That bring up the second step. Offer an example. Show them what engagement looks like.

Many podcasters say, “Find the details in the show notes.” I listened to podcasts for about 3 years before I figured out where I could find the show notes.

Don’t assume people know how to subscribe to your show. Your listeners may not know where to find your show notes. If you want them to e-mail their questions, show them an example of a great question.

EASY

The third step is the ease of engagement. Make it easy for your listeners to engage.

Nobody wants to jump through 3 hoops to help you. “Visit the website. Click about. Scroll down a third of the page. Look on the right and find the green button. Click that and visit that webform. Fill out the form and click submit. Check your e-mail for the link you’ll get. Click that link and submit your question.”

You lost me at scroll down. If it isn’t easy, you won’t get action.

Easy also means FEWER options. Many people think more options are better. That is false.

If I suggest you e-mail me, text me or visit the website to submit your question, you now have to decide which is better for you. This is just more work.

More decisions mean your listener needs to evaluate the options, decide which is best for them, and then take action. Too much work.

If you have multiple options, rotate them through different episodes. Offer the e-mail this week and the texting next week.

LOCATION

The fourth step is engagement location. Engage where they are.

If you listeners love chatting on Facebook, don’t try to get them to comment on your YouTube channel. When your listeners are comfortable e-mailing you, stick with it. Don’t waste your time trying to get them to text you if that isn’t their preferred method of communication.

You need to get out of your comfort zone and go play where your listeners play. If they are in Facebook groups, be seen in Facebook groups. If there is another podcast they love, find ways to partner with that podcast. Be where your listeners are.

BENEFIT

Finally, include a benefit to engagement. This is the fifth step.

A benefit could be a lead magnet or other piece of value they receive for engaging. Maybe everyone who e-mails you receives your checklist or cheat sheet.

Benefit could also simply be highlighting them on the show or answering their question. When you answer their question, give them love. Direct people to them.

When engagement benefits the listeners, they are more likely to engage.

8 IDEAS

If you would like a ton of engagement ideas, I have created a resource for you. It is 75 Ways To Drive Engagement With Your Podcast. You can get it at www.podcasttalentcoach.com/engage.

The ideas are separated into half a dozen different categories. Here are 8 of those ideas.

  • Run for office by meeting as many people as possible. People vote for those they have met.
  • Ask great questions.
  • Have listeners submit questions for question of the week. They get attention.
  • Create a crowdsourced episode.
  • Include a link to engage in your e-mail signature.
  • Ask your listeners to share.
  • Create community. Highlight members.
  • Create partnerships to promote each other.

Get more on the idea list at www.podcasttalentcoach.com/engage.

Come join me at Collaborate. It will be the best 3 days you could spend to make the next year larger and more successful that you can imagine. Get all the details at www.podcasttalentcoach.com/collaborate. I can’t wait to see what you accomplish.

 

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Why You Don’t Make Money With Your Podcast – PTC 304

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

You get held back when you don’t know what you don’t know. There are 7 pitfalls that you need to avoid if you hope to make money with your podcast. If you are struggling to figure out how to make money with your podcast, be sure you have solved these issues.

Your podcast allows you a great opportunity to demonstrate your authority while talking about a topic that you love. How great is that?

If you structure the focus of your show properly, your podcast can be an amazing tool to drive your business and generate revenue.

FREE TRAINING TO MAKE MONEY

I want to invite you to a training on Tuesday where I will teach you 7 different ways you can easily attract your ideal clients using a podcast. Register for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

Using what I learned attaining my MBA, I have spent the last 30 years in radio refining how to create effective marketing campaigns to attract listeners and clients alike. I have used those skills to teach podcasters how to do the same since 2013. Those proven ideas have now been distilled into these 7 concepts that I will teach you.

You can learn them all on Tuesday. I will offer a replay as well, but only if you preregister. Get in now at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

Do you want to grow your audience, increase your downloads and add subscribers to your podcast?

Would you like to leverage your audience and authority in your niche to monetize your show?

Do you want to grow your audience in just a few minutes a day using time-saving tips to consistently produce and promote your content?

You can get all of that and more on Tuesday. It is a 60-minute training with a replay available. If it is time to let go of the trial and error, come get the step-by-step formula.

MORE THAN ONE WAY

Many people believe sponsorships and advertising are the only ways to make money with a podcast. Untrue. In fact, you shouldn’t clutter up your show with ads. Instead, use your podcast as a powerful marketing tool for your business. Today, I am going to teach you how to do just that.

Podcasting is huge. You have incredible power in front of you. Let me show you some numbers.

There are nearly 1 million podcasts today. On the other hand, there are 600 Million blogs and 1.3 billion YouTube videos. Where do you want to compete?

Podcast search engine Listen Notes reports there were 246,782 podcast debuts last year alone. Today, more than 90 million people in the U.S.— approximately 32% of the U.S. population over the age of 12 — have listened to a podcast in the past month according to Edison Research.

According to The Nielsen Company, the total podcast audience is growing at a compound average growth rate of 20%. And that could mean the overall audience for the medium could double within the next five years. Now is the time to stake your claim in your niche. Get noticed and build your audience.

Let’s talk about why many podcasts don’t make money. There are a few reasons podcasts don’t make money or attract clients.

WHAT ARE YOU SELLING?

The first issue is you don’t have anything to sell.

When podcasters contact me for coaching, our first step is a podcast strategy session. During that call, we define goals and the strategy to achieve those goals.

Though the questions vary, one seems to consistently come up. “How can I make money with my podcast?” I ask, “What are you selling?”

Can your listeners currently give you money for anything?

As coaches and content creators, you probably have something to sell. You just need more people to buy it.

ARE YOU ASKING?

The second problem is you are not asking for the sale.

Podcasters say, “Yeah, Erik. I have a course for sale. Nobody is buying it.”

Have you told anyone about it?

One of my buddies has a great course available. I had known him for six months before I knew anything about it.

Once you build your rapport through your podcast, the “yes” should become a formality if you actually ask for the sale and help your listener succeed.

THE PAIN

Next, podcasts don’t make money because you haven’t uncovered the true pain

It is much easier to “not sell” when you are solving a pain rather than offering a benefit. There is a saying that “more people buy aspirin than vitamins.” People are more willing to pay to get out of pain than experience a pleasure.

When you are solving that pain, you need to ensure you have uncovered the true pain.

On your podcast, you could be answering questions from you listeners. You will see some commonalities develop that uncover the true pain of your audience. It is like market research right on your show.

MORE REASONS

There are 3 more reasons podcasts don’t make money. I’ll be covering those in the free training on Tuesday. I will also give you 7 ways to make money with your podcast.

Sign up for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

Would you like to have a clear, step-by-step blueprint to grow your audience? You will learn how to get that when you join us on Tuesday. You can build a plan to grow your audience that you can consistently implement in as little as 15 minutes a day.

Podcasting is only getting bigger. Now is the time to lay the foundation to be known as an influencer and respected authority in your niche. When you build you show the right way, you can consistently attract listeners who become raving fans, share your podcast, and purchase your programs.

Learn how on Tuesday. Sign up for free at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth. I can’t wait to see you there.

Do you need help with your podcast? Check out www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How To Keep Listeners Returning – PTC 301

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

How can you keep you listeners returning week after week? We are going to talk about that along with marketing tips and podcast profits this week.

We are answering your questions on this episode of Podcast Talent Coach. If you have a question, e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. I read all of those notes and answer as many as I can here on the show.

MARKETING

I’m looking for marketing tips on how to get the podcast noticed and ranked.

– Dirk

In order to get your podcast noticed, you need to get in front of new listeners.

So many podcasters try to grow their podcast audience by posting on Facebook and sending e-mail to their list. The problem with this tactic is that all of these people already know you. They are already aware of your podcast.

If you are active on Facebook in groups and are allowed to mention your show there, you could get in front of new listeners. Be careful with regard to the rules of the group.

Many group owners don’t want you to promote in their group. You will need to mention your show while you serve.

If someone asks a question in a group regarding podcast growth, I might say, “On my podcast, I often recommend podcasters find ways to get in front of new audiences.” By doing this, I mention my podcast while answering the question and serving.

There are many other ways to get in front of new listeners. This could include summits, podcast interviews, guest blogging, e-mail shares and others.

GROW YOUR AUDIENCE

If you would like to learn how to grow your downloads, join me for a free training. It is called “How To Explode Your Podcast Audience In 6 Weeks Or Less”. It will be a live, hour-long training on Oct. 6, 2020 at 12 Noon CT.

You can register for this free training at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

Do you want to grow your audience, increase your downloads and add subscribers to your podcast?

Would you like to become a respected authority in your niche that will help you monetize your show?

Do you want to learn time-saving tips to consistently produce your podcast, find interesting guests, promote your episodes, record the podcast and edit your content?

In this free training, you will discover how to create a simple plan that you can consistently follow in just a few minutes a day to grow your podcast.

You can register for this free training at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

BORED LISTENERS

I would really like to learn how to create content that will keep listeners returning. I haven’t started yet, but I’m worried of running out of ideas or guests to interview, or that listeners will get bored and not listen anymore.

– Elizabeth

Wow, Elizabeth. What a packed question. Let’s take these in parts.

First, let’s start with the last part. How do you prevent listeners from getting bored and not listening anymore?

Many podcasters make the mistake of trying to create content for others. You need to create content that you find interesting and engaging. The key to being interesting is being interested.

When you try to force content simply because you think your audience wants to hear that information, you will suffer three problems. The content will feel hollow, because you aren’t excited about it. Producing the content will start to feel like work, because it isn’t your passion. Finally, your audience won’t grow, because you will be creating average content.

Instead, create content that stirs your passion. You will have great stories. Your shows will bubble with excitement. Listeners will be attracted to the energy of your show, because it is designed specifically for them. If you love it, they will love it. Be interesting by being interested.

GET THEM TO RETURN

Next, how do you create content that will keep listeners returning? The first thing to understand is the difference between promoting your content and teasing your content.

Promoting your content is just information. In my free training I mentioned, you will learn how to grow your audience. That is only the info. It doesn’t pique your interest or create any excitement.

Teasing my training creates interest, excitement and fear of missing out. When I say, “In this free training, you will discover how to create a simple plan that you can consistently follow in just a few minutes a day to grow your podcast”, that creates some excitement.

A tease is more than the ingredients in the box. A tease is the benefit and transformation the information provides.

TOPIC IDEAS

Let’s talk about your ideas. If you are worried about running out of ideas, you may not be in the right niche. If you are creating a podcast around your passion, the ideas should come easily.

Here is how you can be sure you are in the right niche. Take out a piece of paper and start brainstorming possible podcast topic ideas. You should be able to come up with 40 or 50 ideas in about 10 minutes.

What do beginners need to know? Talk about the biggest mistakes made by people in your niche? What do people need to know about your topic.

Don’t worry about the quality of the topics. Just write. Let topics lead to other topics. If you concern yourself about evaluating the topic, you won’t open your mind to produce 50. Just write.

INTERVIEW GUESTS

Finally, how can you get guests when you have very little to offer?

It is a misconception that people won’t come on your show simply because you are new. You won’t always be new. When you are on episode 50, episode 2 will still be there.

Episode 2 may only have 23 downloads this week. A year from now, episode 2 could have hundreds of downloads.

Your episode can live for years. Smart guests understand that value.

When doing interviews, you won’t start at the top with the biggest guests. Let your guests build on each other. At the end of every interview, ask your guest if they know two or three people who might make great guests for your show and find a benefit by appearing on your show.

If they can provide you a couple names, ask them if they will make an introduction. A warm introduction is much more likely to land you additional interviews. This is especially true if your guest had a great experience.

In each of these points, don’t let that little voice in your head get in your way. Getting your listeners to return, running out of ideas, a lack of interviews and bored listeners are all just symptoms of the Impostor Syndrome. You’ll be great. Just get started.

PODCAST PROFITS

I’m at that critical place of needing to make my podcast significantly profitable in order to continue. As my wife told me, “You are spending an enormous amount of time for a freebie.” I’d like to set up an efficient process to provide paid consulting for listeners. I did a little free consulting to test the waters and it went well, but I let the hurdle of logistics get in the way of moving forward with offering paid consulting.

– Dean

So many people want to make the process much more complicated than it needs to be. Don’t get all hung up in the funnels and back end and all the jargon.

When I started, my first client was from Canada. He reached out to me looking for help to refine his content and make it more engaging.

I quickly created a coaching program. For $500, he would receive 4 coaching calls with me. We discussed his goals and I made him the offer.

When he accepted the deal, I emailed him an overview of the plan and an invoice for our coaching. He mailed me a money order. We started coaching.

He had discovered a blog I was writing. Then he listened to my podcast. In that content, I would mention my coaching. That got things started.

As I picked up more clients, I moved to having clients send me payments through PayPal. My systems grew as my business grew.

It was no more complicated than that.

If you want to scale and begin doing group coaching, webinars and joint ventures, you will need more back end systems. But, you don’t need all of that to begin. Just find someone you can help and give them a way to pay you.

If you have questions, e-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

GROW YOUR AUDIENCE

If you would like to learn how to grow your downloads, join me for a free training. It is called “How To Explode Your Podcast Audience In 6 Weeks Or Less”. It will be a live, hour-long training on Oct. 6, 2020 at 12 Noon CT.

You can register for this free training at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

Do you want to grow your audience, increase your downloads and add subscribers to your podcast?

Would you like to become a respected authority in your niche that will help you monetize your show?

Do you want to learn time-saving tips to consistently produce your podcast, find interesting guests, promote your episodes, record the podcast and edit your content?

In this free training, you will discover how to create a simple plan that you can consistently follow in just a few minutes a day to grow your podcast.

You can register for this free training at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/growth.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

From Overlooked to Overbooked with Shelley Roxanne – PTC 299

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Word-of-mouth is one of the best ways to get your audience to grow. You can create word-of-mouth in many ways. It isn’t only one friend telling another. Word-of-mouth comes from hearing about something from any trusted source.

WORD-OF-MOUTH

People can hear about your podcast from a friend, a family member or a conversation between two others. They also might hear your show mentioned on another podcast, see it mentioned on social media or see it mentioned in a blog post.

You can also get in front of new listeners by appearing on television, on stage or on summits created for your target audience.

To grow your show, you need to get in front of people who are not already aware of you and your show. When people talk about your show in a good way, it is very similar to an endorsement. You win by association.

You never know if you can land an interview on another platform unless you ask. However, don’t ask in a pick-up line sort of way. You need to create a bit of a relationship before you can invite yourself on the show.

FOCUSED APPROACH

So many podcasters and agents of podcasters reach out to shows in a shotgun style. They randomly fire and hope they hit someone.

I know this, because I often receive interview requests from people who make no sense for my show or my audience. Do you homework and build the relationship before you ask for the interview.

Last week, I interviewed Dan Miller. He and I had been forming that relationship for years. I was really on his radar in the past 6 months. We knew each other before we even began discussing an interview.

When you try to land interviews, target fewer with deeper relationships. Find a dozen people who could become valuable connections. These should also be people you can help as well.

Begin these relationships about 6 months before you are ready to launch your course, interview tour or event. Give the relationship time to grow.

It is much easier to find those people when you have a warm introduction. If somebody who I know introduces you to me, it is much more likely that you and I will foster a relationship. If I get a random e-mail from a person I don’t know, there is very little chance that will go anywhere.

Work daily to help people and grow your network. Be a connector for others and your network will become amazingly big. Just do the work.

SHELLEY ROXANNE

I had the pleasure of meeting Shelley Roxanne through Joint Venture Insiders Circle. You can find a link to that amazing connection group at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/jv. This is a group designed to connect people who are working in similar spaces. We help each other grow.

Shelley Roxanne is a media expert and coach. Just like me, she has spent years in radio and is a #1 best-selling author.

Today, we get Shelley-fied. She is here to share her secrets to help you get on other shows. You will see why I love her so much.

You will learn how to go from overlooked to overbooked. Shelley helps you discover how to skyrocket your confidence, your income and your impact. You will learn how to get known as an expert in your field.

We talk a lot about letting people get to know you by telling your story. Grab a pen and paper. Shelley is going to tell you the what, when, why and how to tell your story when you are being interviewed.

Our conversation is packed with so many nuggets, you’ll probably need to listen to it twice. Shelley is also going to talk about working directly with her in her Overlooked to Overbooked Masterclass.

You can save $500 off of the tuition by using the coupon code EKJ20 at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/overbooked. The next class begins September 1. Head over to see the details.

GET BOOKED FOR WORD-OF-MOUTH

Are you ready to get booked on other podcasts? You see how interviews can supercharge your word-of-mouth. You just need to get started.

Find 6 podcasters you know, or friends who know those podcasters. Start creating the relationships and grow your word-of-mouth.

This isn’t going to happen unless you take some action. Start promoting your brand, message and podcast by getting seen on other platforms.

Expand your thinking beyond podcasts. Find tv, radio, blogs, summits and stages. Find every opportunity you can to help those content creators make their platforms and content even better.

If you would like Shelley’s help, head to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/overbooked. Get Shelley-fied today and go from overlooked to overbooked. You need to hurry. The next class begins September 1. See if there are seats still available.

 

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Increase Podcast Downloads With One Strategy Change – PTC 296

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

How do you increase your podcast downloads? That is the magic question. It seems everyone is asking. It also seems everyone has the magic answer. Unfortunately, many podcasts are trying to increase downloads with a flawed plan.

Today, I want to help you adjust your strategy in a way that will help you amplify your download growth in a big way.

LET ME INTERVIEW YOU

First, I’d like to interview you. Would you be interested in having me introduce you to the audience of this show?

I’m looking to interview you if you have used your podcast to attract your ideal clients and grow your business. I want to help you learn by bringing you real life examples of using your podcast as part of your business plan.

If you are interested, send me an e-mail at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. I cannot interview everyone. So, tell me what would make you a great interview and we can talk about it to see if it makes sense.

Let’s talk about the growth of your podcast downloads.

BE REALISTIC

First, be realistic. The number of podcast downloads isn’t huge for many podcasts.

Let’s go back to math class. Do you remember the difference between median and mean?

Mean is the average. Add up all points and divide the total number of points.

Median is the middle. Stack them up smallest to largest. The median is the one right in the middle. There are 50% higher than the median and 50% lower.

I like median much better. The number isn’t as easily skewed by outliers. If you have 5 shows that have downloads of 50, 100, 250, 400 and 2,000, your mean or average would be 560. Add them up and get 2,800. Divide by 5 and get 560.

Now, 560 isn’t quite representative of those podcast downloads of 50, 100, 250, 400 and 2,000. 4 of those 5 podcasters would feel like they aren’t as good as everyone else.

The median is the middle number. When you put them in order of 50, 100, 250, 400 and 2,000, your median or middle number is 250. That is a more realistic representation of those downloads. 4 of those podcasts are much closer to 250 than 560.

Bunch of numbers, but let’s compare apples to apples. Don’t let a few big podcasts make you feel inferior.

THE REAL DATA

Rob Walch at Libsyn releases real download data from all podcasts hosted by Libsyn. This data will give you a realistic view of how your podcast compares to all other podcasts on Libsyn.

On Episode 172 of Libsyn’s The Feed podcast, Rob presented his monthly report for May 2020.

This data is based on episodes on Libsyn released in the month of May 2020. Podcast downloads are measured from the time of release in May to the end of June 2020. The average time each episode had been available was 45 days.

The median podcast downloads for each episode in this sample is 120. That was down from April 2020 mark of 123 downloads per episode.

This means if at the end of June your May episode had 120 downloads, you were better than half of the pool. Half of the podcasts also had more downloads than your show.

120 is the number. Not 7,000. Not 4,500. In fact, if you had 1,000 downloads per episode, you were better than 80% of the podcasts available on Libsyn.

This number has been declining over the years. There are a lot of new podcasts. Therefore, the median continues to decline as the new shows try to find an audience.

PATIENCE

The second thing I want you to do is be patient. Your downloads will not grow overnight. This takes time.

I know we live in an instant gratification society. We want to microwave everything and have it now.

Weight loss doesn’t work this way. Podcast download growth doesn’t work this way either. It takes time.

You should keep your head down and work for about a year on growing your podcast downloads before you start checking the stats.

I was talking with a client this week and he was getting frustrated with his slow growth. His numbers weren’t growing.

He has been doing the show less than 6 months. He has just over 20 episodes. And, he checks his download every day or two.

This is like stepping on the scale to check your weight everyday. The scale isn’t moving. You won’t see big jumps.

This is like watching your tomato plants grow. If you check on them every hour, nothing happens. If you check on them once a week, you see some change.

Give you podcast downloads time to grow before you start checking the stats. Just keep your head down and do the work. Trust that it is working.

If you can’t wait a year, make it 6 months. Just don’t check it all the time expecting the needle to show big growth. Grow slowly and be comfortable with that.

FIND YOUR PODCAST DOWNLOADS

So, how do you find those downloads?

I was on a podcast strategy call with a podcaster the other day. These strategy calls are free for you. I help you design a podcast strategy for the next year. If you would like to sign up, go to PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.

So, I was on a call with this guy and we were talking about his goals. My first questions is always, “Where do you want to be a year from now?”

His goal was to grow his downloads. We determined where he is now and where he wants to be in 12 months.

Then, we talked about the activities he is trying right now. He told me he was posting it on his social media and sending out an e-mail to his list every time he published an episode.

And there lies the problem. Those people already know about him and his podcast. He is preaching to the choir. Those 2 activities are not going to attract new listeners to his show.

Here is the strategy for you. If you want to grow your downloads, get in front of people who are not aware of you or your show, yet want what you have to offer.

THE FORMULA

The Podcast Talent Coach Formula for building a successful podcast consists of 3 stages: Promotion, Programming and Personality.

There are three legs to the stool for your audience growth plan. Those three legs are personality, programming and promotion. Without one of the legs, your stool won’t stand up.

The promotion of your show creates the awareness.

Your programming creates great content that attracts people to the show.

When you add your personality to the information, the content becomes unique and keeps people coming back. It is not enough to simply bring people to the show. You need to keep them listening. In Episode 286, we discussed Personality.

Let’s talk about promotion. How can you get in front of people who love what you love, but are not aware of you or your show?

Get on “stages” to get in front of new audiences. This is how you get exposure.

Don’t get scared of “stages”. I don’t mean only actual live stages giving speeches in front of a live audience. That is only one piece of it.

By “stages”, I mean any time you can speak to an audience.

STAGES

Here are five different types of stages that can help you get in front of a new crowd and increase your downloads.

The first makes most sense for you. That is podcasts. Find ways you can get on other podcasts in your niche.

Look for podcasts in the niche that do something complimentary to you. If you have a weight loss podcast and focus on healthy eating, find a podcast on exercises. If you have a business podcast that focuses on courses, find a podcast that is centered around product launches.

The next is newsletters. If you are sending out a newsletter, highlight someone in your niche in exchange for them highlighting you in their newsletter. Help each other grow.

EVENTS

Summits are a great way to demonstrate your authority in front of a new audience. Summits are like online conferences. There are usually a group of speakers that present over a number of days.

When you present on a summit, you can teach and help people grow. You can often tell them how to find you and your show. Replays are also often available for those who sign up for the summit.

The fourth ways is a to crowdsource an episode. Get a few experts to share ideas on your episode. Then, get those experts to share the episode. Rather than an interview, all experts answer the same questions or teach a solution to the same problem.

The final way to get in front of new listeners is virtual events. These could be networking events, conferences, presentations and other events like these.

Look for many of these online. Just do a search with your niche. For example, I would search for podcast summit, coaching conference and online business networking. There are many ways to find these.

For the podcasts, newsletters and crowdsourcing, you simply need to connect with podcasters in your niche. Reach out and ask, “Can we have a chat to see how we might help each other?”

CONNECT FOR PODCAST DOWNLOADS

Remember to connect when you get in front of this new audience. You want them to come back to your material.

If your goal is to grow your downloads, get them to listen to your show. Ideally, you would capture their e-mail address. Then ask them to listen with a nurture sequence where they get to know you.

Offer something for free with an opt-in. Use that opportunity to grow the relationship.

Remember to also show them your personality. This is what makes you unique.

This promotion will make them aware of you. Your programming makes them say, “That sounds like something that would benefit me – I’ll check it out.”

Your personality grows your relationship and keeps them coming back.

Let’s get on a call and work out your strategy to grow your downloads. Apply at PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching. No charge. We’ll just see what we can develop for you and your show.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

What Must Be In Your Podcast Show Notes – PTC 290

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Today we will cover handling stagnant audience growth, eliminating the dreaded “uh” and “um”, and the “must haves” of your show notes.

We are answering your questions on the show this week. If you have a question, e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. I read all of those notes and answer as many as I can here on the show.

FIX AUDIENCE GROWTH PLATEAU

How have you handled a prolonged stall/plateau of your podcast? Whether your regular audience is dozens, hundreds, thousands or even tens of thousands per episode, at some point for almost everyone your podcast hits a lull—where when you look at your episode numbers it either stalls/stops growing or even consistent drops in downloads.

In many cases it’s not that you’re not working as hard as you did before, promoting on social media before, having the same quality guests as you did before—but the plateau or download decline happens anyway.

-Patrick

It is all about getting in front of new audiences. If you have tapped the current pool, find another pool.

Remember when you were going to the bars with your friends all of the time?

My buddies and I always went to the same few bars to see the same few bands. We would always go to Arthur’s to see Hat Trick. They were the house band each weekend.

The bar was full of pretty much the same people every weekend. Hat Trick would play the same songs. We’d have the same drinks.

After a bit of time, we weren’t meeting anyone new.

One weekend, our friends invited us to just bar hop to a bunch of bars we’ve never visited. All of a sudden, we were meeting new people and running into people we haven’t seen in years.

You can do this same thing by connecting with new people who are talking to your ideal listener.

Get on other podcasts for an interview. Do a joint project with a peer and share it with your respective e-mail lists. Attend some virtual events in your space. Speak on some virtual stages. Be part of a giveaway or summit.

Simply find ways to meet new people. Your audience won’t grow if you don’t get in front of people who don’t already know you.

If you would like a great way to supercharge this, check out JV Insiders Circle. Find my affiliate link at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/jv.

This organization is designed specifically to help online people find joint venture partners and get in front of new audiences. It is a very powerful network of people with large followings.

REMOVE THE UH AND UM

I could use some help. I am really good at speaking in person, but my podcasts … I’m not incredibly proud of the end results. I know I have to cut the uhhhs and umms and possibly too much repeating. How do I get better?

-Travis

The good news is you will get better. The bad news is it will take time.

Don’t spend a lot of time editing all of those little pieces out. Most won’t notice.

There are two easy things to get you on the path to improvement.

First, plan the show. Know where you want to go.

You say “um” and “uh” because you are looking for the right words. When you outline the show before you start, your brain knows where it is going. You spend less time trying to read the map and more time enjoying the scenery.

When I first started on radio, I would fly by the seat of my pants. I would think, “I’ll talk about seeing this band last month at the arena.”

When the song ended, I would jump on and talk about the band coming to town. However, I didn’t know where I was going. I hadn’t planned how to end it and get out of the bit.

It would end up being like that Chris Farley bit on SNL when he interviewed Paul McCartney. “Remember that time you said the love you get is the love you give? That was cool.” It was clunky and uncomfortable with no real end.

Start with the end in mind. Know where you want to go. Then, it will be much easier to follow the path to get there. The “uh” will diminish over time.

The next way to improve is to listen back to your show. Take notes. Find things you do really well and the things you would like to remove.

You can’t simply remove the stuff you don’t like. You need to replace it with something good. If you just take stuff out, you are eventually left with nothing.

As you learn to discover the good and bad parts before they happen, you train your brain to do more good and less bad.

If you find yourself always stuck on a word or using a crutch over and over, write down 15 different ways to say the same thing. Keep it by your monitor as you record.

When it comes time to say “You know what I mean”, you can replace it with one of the phrases on your list. Train the brain.

If you want help reviewing your show, visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.

SHOW NOTES

I’ve realized that I’ve put a significant amount of work into show notes along the way, but I’ve also realized I rarely read the show notes of the podcasts I listen to. How much time and effort is reasonable to put into show notes, and what are some “must haves” in show notes.

-Dean

Start with the end in mind. What do you want your show notes to accomplish.

Search engine optimization is a benefit of show notes. When you create a blog post over 300 words, you can get some good search juice.

If people are coming to your show notes, they are probably looking for something specific that you mentioned during the episode. Place those resources at the top of the notes. Make it easy to find.

People may also come to the notes if you have content that is technical or step-by-step. They want the easy download they can reference.

I often listen to podcasts about business. Many times the guest will give 5 ways to boost your traffic or 7 steps to audit your website or how to link your shopping cart to your membership site. Rather than writing all of that down, I prefer to go to the show notes to get the steps.

If the show is more about soft skills or entertainment, I don’t visit the show notes. There is nothing there I need.

What does your audience want from your show notes? Ask them. Send out a survey. This could be as easy as sending an e-mail to your subscribers or setting up a Survey Monkey survey.

Then, determine what you want your notes to accomplish. If you need SEO, make it rich with search terms. If you don’t even post it on your website, you may simply need an outline of the show.

Finally, decide how much time you want to spend on your notes. You may get more traction spending the hour you spend on show note in another area.

If you used that same 60 minutes by spending 45 minutes marketing your show and 15 minutes creating a simple outline as the notes, your show may grow much faster.

I would say the “must haves” in your show notes would be the things your audience expects. That would be links to things you mentioned, an easy way to play the show and an overview of the episode. After that, it becomes diminishing returns. You need to weigh the benefits against the time spent.

 

ASK YOUR QUESTION

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

The Power of Podcast Partnerships – PTC287

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

There are few things that will move any project forward faster than partnerships. When you connect and collaborate with people in your niche, you can help each other learn new things, find new audiences, and attract new clients.

When I first launched Podcast Talent Coach, I connected with Dave Jackson at School of Podcasting. In fact, Dave reached out to me. I wasn’t aware of the power of podcast partnerships yet.

Dave helped me get things moving in the right direction. We worked together to help each other grow. That was 8 years ago and the partnership continues today.

One of the best events I ever attended helped me connect with an amazing number of partners.

OPPORTUNITY

I have a great opportunity for you to connect with a ton of potential partnerships. Check it out at PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

It is a great collaboration event that will supercharge your growth. I’ll tell you more about it in a minute.

Let me tell you about this event I was part of about 6 weeks ago. It was called the JV Experience. Almost 400 experts came together to connect and help each other grow through partnerships.

Due to COVID-19, the whole event was virtual and online. It was a 3-day weekend. Instead of spending a weekend at a conference hotel somewhere, we spent the weekend on Zoom.

During the event, we learned a ton. If we were in the hotel conference room, we would spend the breaks out in the hallway connecting with potential partners. The problem with the hotel scenario happens when you’re an introvert. It is easy to use the restroom, check your e-mail and be invisible.

Online, the situation was much different. During the breaks, we were placed into breakout sessions with about half a dozen other experts. We each took 2 minutes to introduce ourselves and what partnerships we were seeking.

During the weekend, I met about 80 of the 400 experts in the breakout rooms. Of those 80, half made sense for a further discussion and possible partnership. I spent the next two weeks reaching out and having conversations.

Those conversations led to some great partnerships that turned into joint ventures, podcast guests and business opportunities.

It all stemmed from one amazing event. It is crazy how a few of the right partners can explode your projects.

5 WAYS TO PARTNERSHIPS

If you really want to grow your show and your mailing list, even build that business around your podcast, find 5 podcasters in you niche that could make great partners.

Here are five ways to help each other.

CROWDSOURCE

Create a crowdsource episode with experts. Find a question that will help your listeners.

Ask each of the five podcasters to answer the question. Combine them into an episode. Then, ask each of the experts to share the show.

COMMENT

All podcasts like comments and reviews. Leave a comment on or review for 5 shows in your niche that compliment your show. If you teach courses, find someone that teaches memberships. If you teach healthy eating, find someone who teaches healthy gardening.

Begin to create the relationship with the hosts. Get on their radar. Once you begin the conversation, take the next step.

HELP

Reach out to those five people and ask, “How might we help each other.” You are not looking to simply have them promote you. Find ways you can help each other. Create a true partnership.

You can create great synergy when you ask, “What are you working on and how might I support you?” Help them connect with experts you know. Turn them onto resources you use. Spread the word about their latest product.

Give and give again. The support will eventually come back to you. Just start making the connections.

SWAP

When you have a relationship built, offer to swap newsletter mentions. You could send the link to their lead magnet to your e-mail list. They could do the same for you.

You also might consider swapping interviews. Have a discussion around a topic and both of you use the same conversation for your episodes to promote the other. Find ways to help each other grow.

FUN CHALLENGE

The last idea is a bit crazy and fun. Challenge a peer in your niche to something fun. This could be a challenge to see who can get the most Facebook friends in a month. Or, who can get the most comments on an episode in four weeks.

There are a few things the challenge should include.

Make the challenge fun. If it is serious, it won’t attract as much attention.

It should incorporate the listeners. You want your audience to have a vested interest in the challenge. Get them to follow along.

Make it last around four weeks. You want to give it time to gain some attention and word-of-mouth. Create a storyline around it that lasts 3 or 4 episodes. Make sure it is public, so your listeners can follow the progress on each show.

Finally, there should be something at stake. Maybe the loser has to e-mail their list promoting the winner. Or the loser has to do a Facebook live video wearing a t-shirt promoting the winner. Something that gets noticed.

MORE NOTICE

There are many other ways to partner. You could participate in summits, giveaways, live events, podcasts, YouTube interviews, Facebook lives and many other things.

Now, you could spend time searching for other experts that can help you grow, finding them one by one. You’re not sure if they are looking for partners. It is unclear what they have to offer. Will they actually do the work to promote you?

Rather than spending all of that time and energy, you could participate in an event just like I did. And you can get into this one for a crazy deal.

COLLABORATE

I would like to introduce you to a new, live, virtual event called COLLABORATE. I’m so excited about it because it’s a cutting-edge, results-oriented event created by the amazing event team at JV Insider Circle (JVIC). This is the same team who also created the annual JV Experience (JVX) Summit that I attended and made such great connections. JVX is the world’s #1 joint venture summit.

In order to design the ultimate event, the JVIC team analyzed mountains of feedback and gigabytes of successful collaborative partnerships that was generated amongst attendees from their many past events, both live and virtual. The result is COLLABORATE, an event with everything the revered JVX Summit has to offer, but supercharged on a whole new level! This is gonna be great.

COLLABORATE is a live virtual event where you get to connect with hundreds of top entrepreneurs, coaches, authors, speakers, program leaders along with producers of podcasts, radio shows and live & virtual events from around the world.

These people are all interested in creating alliances with you and promoting your products & programs. On top of that, you’ll learn valuable, actionable knowledge. You will get tools and the support you need to catapult your business into the next stratosphere.

GET REGISTERED

Get the details at PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

The inaugural COLLABORATE event is designed by the innovative events team who also created the world’s #1 joint venture event, JVX SUMMIT.

The connections I made at the JVX were priceless. I connected with 40 potential partners in my niche alone. It was an amazing and very productive weekend.

389 people from around the world attended their last virtual event. If you would like to create amazing partnerships, don’t miss this event. Get your ticket now!

WHAT YOU GET

Here is what you can expect:

Networking Circles. This is where you can connect with industry leaders, experts & influencers from around the world to create your partnerships.

Hot Or Not. This is an opportunity to test your products or programs by getting IMMEDIATE feedback from 100’s of coaches & experts! It is like a focus group on steroids.

Niche Circles. In these small groups, you can get feedback to hone your pitches & messages in front of live coaches.

Knowledge Sessions. You will learn valuable knowledge and gain actionable tools from guest speakers during the event.

JV Shark Attack. This is just a lot of fun and a great way to learn. You have a chance to have your products & programs promoted by key industry leaders if you’re selected. If you are not JV ready yet, this is a great way to learn by watching other people pitch their joint venture opportunities.

Special Exercises. There will be uniquely designed exercises to help you connect with partners and build your business.

Special Activities. You will participate in one-of-a-kind activities created to give your business a mega boost.

There is also much more. There are more sessions & activities being developed between now and the event.

MAKE CONNECTIONS

COLLABORATE is more than just another live online networking event. It is a connecting event.

Not only will you have plenty of connecting time, you will be guided through fun exercises and activities to make sure your products or programs are sizzling hot with clearly communicated benefits and all the factors to make them winners.

Nothing is being left to chance when it comes to helping you walk away with the best joint venture partners. You’ll come away with a full list of powerful alliances and industry influencers ready to promote your products or programs just like I did, even if you’ve struggled with this in the past.

Here is the best part … you can get the whole weekend for just $47. How crazy is that?

Imagine what one partner could do for your podcast. Would that be worth $47? And I connected with 40 at the last one without even knowing what I was doing.

I CAN’T WAIT

I was bummed that I would need to wait an entire year before I could do it again. They got so much great feedback on the connection circles from that event that they are creating Collaborate as a way to help people connect even further. It is going to be amazing.

If you want to connect with hundreds of top entrepreneurs, coaches, authors, speakers, and program leaders along with producers of podcasts, radio shows and live & virtual events from around the world, don’t miss Collaborate.

I can’t wait to see you there. Get registered at PodcastTalentCoach.com/collaborate.

Please be aware that links in this post and on this site may be affiliate links. I could earn a commission should you choose to make a purchase. However, I only recommend things I trust and that I believe are valuable.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

The 3 Secrets to Grow Your Podcast Audience – PTC 286

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Almost every podcaster who comes to me for coaching has the same struggle. They want to know how to grow your podcast audience. There are 3 keys to grow your audience.

There are many gurus and YouTube videos that will tell you have to drive more traffic and get more listeners. What they don’t tell you is how to keep those listeners.

If you have listeners coming in the front door, but you are doing nothing to keep them, your audience won’t grow. It is like bringing people into your party, but not having any food or entertainment to keep them. Why would somebody stay at your lame party? It is the same with your podcast.

AUDIENCE EXPLOSION BLUEPRINT

I am launching a new coaching program to help you grow your audience. This will teach you what all the other gurus miss. And since it is new, you can get in at a great deal.

The program is called Audience Explosion Blueprint. It is a step-by-step live coaching program to explode your podcast audience in 6 weeks or less.

You can get the full details and enroll at PodcastTalentCoach.com/audience.

Do you want to build a podcast audience that you can monetize?

Would you like to build the right audience in a way that doesn’t take hours of your time every day?

Do you want to design a marketing plan around your strengths that fits your personalityand defeats the Impostor Syndrome?

Audience Explosion Blueprint is a program designed around my 30 years of experience building successful radio stations, coaching talent, developing marketing campaigns and growing audiences. Unlike all the gurus on the internet only teaching you how to get new listeners, this program will help you attract the right audience and keep them listening by developing your show and personality like a radio star.

THE PROGRAM

In this program you will get access to:

  • 6 Live group coaching/training calls including Q&A sessions to plan, create and launch your audience growth blueprint for your podcast, including access to the recordings of the presentations in case you missed any live sessions.
  • Lifetime access to a full, online training portal containing worksheets and other tools to show you how to organize your blueprint, execute your plan in just a few minutes a day, and methodically grow your downloads (including all updates).
  • Transcription and audio recordings of the modules.
  • Life time access to Audience Explosion Blueprint Facebook group to help you continue to develop new audience attraction ideas.
  • Daily e-mail reminders during the 6 weeks of coaching to help you consistently take action and execute your plan.
  • 1 one-on-one call with me to ensure your plan is clearly defined and efficient.

By the end of this program you will:

  • Have a clear, step-by-step plan to grow your audience of ideal listeners
  • Consistently attract the right listeners to your podcast every week
  • Execute your plan in minutes a day
  • Have more time to spend creating great content and monetizing your show
  • Have more time to spend with your clients, building your business, and enjoying life

WHO IS IT FOR?

This program is for a podcaster who is willing to consistently take action a few minutes each day to work to grow your audience by following a plan. This program is not for those who expect to build their audience to thousands of listeners in just a few days, like a “get rich quick” scheme.

Because this is the first time I am launching this, you get in for half price. It is a steal for six weeks of training. Registration closes on June 22nd, because we need to start the coaching. Sign up today before it is too late.

Get enrolled at PodcastTalentCoach.com/audience.

THRE THREE LEGS OF THE STOOL

You see, building your audience requires you to attract new listeners who are not already familiar with you. Then, it also requires you to keep those listeners coming back for more to grow your audience.

You need to build awareness, get them to come listen to your show, and keep them coming back episode after episode while you go find even more listeners. If you miss one piece, your growth plan falls apart.

There are three legs to the stool for your audience growth plan. Those three legs are personality, programming and promotion. Without one of the legs, your stool won’t stand up.

It is not enough to simply bring people to the show. You need to keep them listening.

The promotion creates the awareness. Your programming creates great content that attracts them to the show. When you add your personality to the information, the content becomes unique and keeps people coming back.

YOUR NICHE

How many people have a podcast in your niche? Let’s say you create a podcast around making money online. How many podcasts talk about creating an online course? Probably thousands.

There are three steps to making money with an online course. Determine your expertise, create your course, and get people to buy it.

All of the experts have a little difference in their program. Russell Brunson is all about funnels and the marketing. David Siteman Garland talks about accelerating your creation process. Jeff Walkertalks about launching the course and the promotion piece.

Each of those experts talk about a piece of the process. But, it is all about making money online.

What makes each of them different? It is their personality.

Russell and his wresting background and hyperactivity is much different than Jeff Walker and his down-to-Earth Rocky Mountain laid back approach. They are both different than DSG’s quirky approach.

To be unique, add your personality to your content. It is your secret ingredient.

DEFINING YOUR PERSONALITY

The first step to define your personality is to describe the persona you want to project on your show. How do you want to be perceived by your audience?

You might want your persona to be quirky, or fun, or inspirational, or in-your-face, or supportive and loving.

Don’t pick a persona that isn’t you. Be yourself. If you are naturally supportive and loving, you cannot be the in-your-face host. That isn’t you.

It might be possible to adjust from in-your-face drill sergeant to tell-it-like-it-is inspirational host. You could move from the knowledgable nerd to be the quirky expert. Those moves aren’t a big swing.

Next, list twenty adjectives that describe that persona. If you want to be the quirky expert, what words describe that person? It could be odd, off-the-wall, unexpected, unconventional, wacky, unorthodox, experienced, skilled, well-read, and clever. List 20 that describe your persona.

Finally, select five words from that list that you would like to highlight and bring to life on your show. One or two of these words might need to be developed a bit. At least 3 and probably 4 should already exist in your personality.

You might be a little off-the-wall, wacky, experienced and clever. On the other hand, you might need to develop unexpected.

SHOW PREP

In your show prep, you then build a few opportunities to create something unexpected. You might take a story in an unexpected direction. Some sound effects might be added in a unique way. There might be an unexpected question you ask during an interview.

A little unexpected will go a long way. Be sure it isn’t forced. Add it where it naturally fits and the reputation will grow.

We are already a personality. Each of us has a unique personality. You just need to define it.

This is something you have probably never done. If you need to find someone who knows you really well to help you, ask them.

The key to defining your personality is to decide which aspects of that personality you will choose to highlight, stress and grow on your show. You don’t need twenty. You only need the right five.

CO-HOSTS

Defining personalities and roles is especially important when a show has multiple hosts. If two hosts have the same personality, opinion and perspective, one of you isn’t necessary. If all you say is, “Yeah, what he said,” you’re not needed on the show. You are wasting time.

Think of any show that has multiple characters. They are all different.

Consider the show Friends with Monica, Phoebe, Rachel, Chandler, Joey and Ross. Each are different characters. The three ladies are the smart one, the superficial one and the dingy one. The guys are funny one, the ladies man and the nerd.

You say, “Yeah, but that is a tv show, not real life.”

Let’s consider other shows. On the Tonight Show with Johnny Carson, Johnny was different than Ed McMahon. On the Elvis Duran Morning Show, he has 10 people and they are all different. Elvis, Danielle, Froggy, Skeery, Ghandi and Dave Brody all have different personalities. Howard Stern is complimented by Robin Quivers. Even on a sports show like Mike & Mike, one was a player and one was a scholar.

Think about the original cast of American Idol. If you had to describe each judge with one or two words, what would you choose? Simon was the rude one, Paula was the dingy one and Randy wanted to be everybody’s friend.

Do you think those three faked their way through the show or is Simon really a blunt, sometimes offensive, tell-it-like-it-is individual? Those are their true personalities. The producers cast the show in that way.

THE 3-PERSON SHOW

Many 3-person shows have that set up. One is nice, one is the nerd and one is naughty. Or one is the dork, one is the doll and one is the disruptive. Everyone has their role true to their personality.

Work this week to define your personality. If you would like help growing your audience and developing your show to keep your listeners, check out the Audience Explosion Blueprint.

It is a step-by-step live coaching program to explode your podcast audience in 6 weeks or less. Since this is the first time I am launching it, you get in for half price. Enroll today to grow your audience before we close it down on June 22nd, because we need to start the teaching.

You can get the full details and enroll at PodcastTalentCoach.com/audience.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Keys To Podcast Client Attraction With Ed Erickson – PTC285

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

When it comes to using your podcast client attraction, you must make time during your episode to demonstrate your authority and invite your clients to work with you.

RESOURCE FOR CLIENT ATTRACTION

I have a great resource for you this week to help you with your client attraction.

When trying to get someone to work with you, have you every heard, “Ohhh, that’s a bit expensive for me. Anything you can do on price?”

How many times have you heard some version of that from prospects? Prospects whom you know desperately need your solution.

Here’s the thing. Your solution isn’t too expensive. They aren’t understanding the value they will get – and that it far exceeds the cost.

And that’s on you. But there’s some good news…

There’s a much better way that will get your prospects to see the value – and it doesn’t involve cutting the price.

My friend, Ed Erickson, is hosting a free online training session, where he’s going to show you the three key things you can change that will not only obliterate price objections, but will lead to your prospects clamoring to pay premium fees for the privilege of working with you.

There are 3 session times available – so pick the one that’s best for you. You can register at PodcastTalentCoach.com/essential.

NO LEADS

I was on a coaching call the other day when the podcaster asked why his podcast wasn’t attracting any leads for his consulting business.

When I listened to the episode, he did a great job interviewing his guest. However, he didn’t mention his website or consulting one time during the entire episode. He wasn’t doing anything to create client attraction.

You need to make sure there is time for you. Just because your episode is an interview episode, that doesn’t mean the entire episode needs to be the interview. You can use part of the show to teach a little bit and demonstrate your expertise.

This question has come up two other times over the past week. How do we let people see our expertise when we are interviewing somebody else?

FIND THE ROOM FOR CLIENT ATTRACTION

This past week, I have been part of two different groups of podcasters in a bit of mastermind setting. In both groups, somebody asked how they could better use their interviews to attract clients.

As I mentioned earlier, when it comes to the price of your product or service, your solution isn’t too expensive. They simply aren’t understanding the value they will get from your stuff.

You need to demonstrate your expertise. That is how you get your listener and potential client to see that your product or service far exceeds the cost.

So, when you have an interview on your show, take some time to discuss the topic.

Before the interview happens, you could show your listeners what you know by teaching a little bit around the topic. You could answer a few questions from listeners about the subject. A case study is a great way to demonstrate your knowledge.

After the interview, you could take time to include your big takeaway from the discussion. Present a quick recap of the discussion. Link the conversation to a case study or real world example from your product or service. This is another great place to demonstrate your expertise.

SOLO SHOW

If you do a solo show with no interview, it is much easier to show your stuff. You could answer questions from the audience. Telling your stories is a very powerful way to demonstrate your authority.

When you are doing a show by yourself, ensure you that you continue to offer your message on a consistent basis. Just remember to mix it up in the way your present it every week.

Think of the Dave Ramsey Show. Dave talks about his baby steps on every show. Every call he takes relates to the baby steps in some way. Over and over again, it is the same thing.

However, the context around the baby steps changes. Those unique stories keeps the content fresh. Be consistent with your message while varying the context.

ACTION

Finally, include your powerful call-to-action in order to get your clients to come work with you. Just telling them you are a coach or have a book isn’t enough. You need to ask them to buy it to create client attraction.

Include the call-to-action at the front of the show and again at the end. Many of your listeners will never make it all the way to the end of the show. They stop listening when they finish doing whatever they are doing. That could be driving, exercising, mowing or something else.

If you wait until the end of the show before you offer a call-to-action, you will miss a big opportunity to help your listeners.

TEACH THEN INTERVIEW

This episode is a great example of teaching around an interview. Today, we talk with Ed Erickson, head of Erickson Business Coaching, about client attraction.

As an EMyth Certified Business Coach, Ed helps owners get control over their business. He helps develop the skills, mindset, and leadership traits to transform businesses. The result is a business that achieves the owner’s goals and creates the life they want to live.

Ed Erickson has worked in and owned small businesses for over 20 years. He has seen first hand many of the challenges owners face. And has spent a lot of time trying to figure out how to fix them.

Today, he helps us learn how to take our podcast audience and build a business around that audience. We learn the biggest mistakes to avoid and where to find our ideal clients.

TRAINING

It is such a great conversation with Ed. If you are trying to build a business around your podcast, client attraction is a critical piece to your plan.

Find the true problem your audience faces. Determine what they want and need to solve that problem. Offer them the solution, not the tool. Define your ideal clients. Finally, determine your solution and message that will help them achieve their goals.

If you want to learn more about client attraction, get signed up for the free training. Ed is hosting that free online session, where he’s going to show you the three key things you can change that will not only obliterate price objections, but will lead to your prospects clamoring to pay premium fees for the privilege of working with you.

There are 3 session times available – so pick the one that’s best for you. You can register at PodcastTalentCoach.com/essential.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

What You’re Missing For Audience Growth – PTC284

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Most podcasters think the key to audience growth is attracting more listeners. However, that is only half of the equation. You have to work to keep the listeners you already have.

FIX THE LEAKS

If you are trying to fill a bucket with water, it becomes very difficult when your bucket has big holes in the bottom.

There are 3 keys to keeping your listeners and achieving audience growth.

  1. Be unique and make them remember you.
  2. Give them a reason to come back.
  3. Get them to actually listen.

Today, let’s talk about being unique. Your listeners will remember you by the stories you tell. That is how they get to know, like and trust you.

You can get my Podcast Talent Coach Story Development Worksheet at PodcastTalentCoach.com/story.

IRELAND BOYS’ AUDIENCE GROWTH

My son watches a show on YouTube created by Ireland Boys Productions. These are videos created by a two brothers and their friends. They do crazy stuff like spending 72 hours in a WalMart, sneaking pumpkins into shopping carts of other people and ordering the entire Popeyes Chicken menu.

IBP has posted 201 videos and has 3.78 million subscribers. There have been 6.1 million views on the WalMart video.

These videos aren’t short, either. They are 20-30 minute videos.

These kids even go on tour, because they have created a tremendous following.

The brothers make their fans part of the show. Their viewers get to suggest crazy stuff to do on the show. You can even buy their merch on their website.

Most importantly, their fans know their story. Watching their show, you meet their parents. You see where they live. You see the awards YouTube has given them for their online success.

It is all about their story and the plot of the episode. Each time, you wonder if they will succeed or get busted by store security.

WHO AM I?

When I started in radio, I just copied the other big personalities on the radio. I was using their phrases and mannerisms. I wanted to be them.

One day, I was reviewing my show with my program director. She was helping me find ways to improve my show.

As we were listening to the show, she stopped the audio. She asked why I was using a particular phrase. It was a phrase that was used by the morning guy on our sister station. It was the rock station I was on before I got the gig here.

When she asked, I had no answer.

She said, “Why don’t we leave that to the other guys. You be you.”

That was the day I started being true to myself and defining my own story and personality. I started sharing who I am with my audience. That began my climb to the top.

YOU’RE NOT GARY

Many podcasters hear Gary Vaynerchuk and try to be Gary Vee on their podcast. So, they start dropping F-bombs and living the hustle.

The problem is … they aren’t Gary Vaynerchuk. They weren’t born in Belarus. These people didn’t immigrate to the United States unable to speak English.

Podcasters who want to be Gary Vee didn’t spend their youth working in their fathers’s liquor store. They didn’t grow up learning how to sell by hustling baseball cards. You can’t be Gary Vaynerchuk unless you’re Gary Vaynerchuk.

Stop trying to be Gary Vaynerchuk and start being yourself.

WHO ARE YOU?

What is your story? Where did you come from? What makes you unique?

Let your personality come out on your show. Make a list of your unique characteristics that make you different from everyone else.

Maybe you’re brash, or caring, or cold, or inspiring. People might find you matter-of-fact, or welcoming, or take-no-prisoners, or comforting.

Define your personality. Then, put all of your content through that filter.

Be true to yourself and your listeners will remember you.

With your content, tell your stories. Use your personality to make your listener feel something. People remember emotions. Get them invested emotionally. This is critical to your audience growth.

When you tell stories on your show, define what do you hope to make the listener feel with your story. Always start with the emotion.

FIND THE EMOTION

Once you know have defined the emotion, you will know how to tell the story.

The more stories you tell, the more your listeners will get to know you. They will get emotionally invested with your show. Your listeners will remember you and come back time and again.

As you are working for audience growth, be sure you are working to hold onto the listeners you have.

You can get my Podcast Talent Coach Story Development Worksheet at PodcastTalentCoach.com/story.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Better Audience Engagement – PTC 271

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Would you like to create a deeper connection and relationship with your listener?

There is one adjustment you can make to your podcast to help you achieve your podcasting goals. Whether you’re hope to motivate your audience to action, entertain them with a story or simply get them to listen again, one change to your approach can help you succeed.

This small modification to your approach will have a big impact on creating a trusting relationship with your audience.

It is this. Treat your listener as an audience of one.

FREE WORKSHEET

I have a powerful free resource that will help you define your ideal target listener. This will help you frame you content, words and communication style.

You need to communicate differently with a 25-year-old single guy who is willing to spend money on a BMW than you would with a 51-year-old married female who has grown children and is saving heavily for retirement.

You can get the free download at PodcastTalentCoach.com/listener.

NO GROUPSPEAK

When creating a podcast, it is critical to your success to address each member of your audience as an individual rather than a group, regardless of the size of your audience.

Many podcasters and broadcasters address their audience as a group. “Hello, everyone.” “Good evening, Ladies and Gentlemen.” “You guys are the best.”

Your listeners are not engaged with your show as a group. They are each listening as individuals with unique imaginations. You need to treat them that way.

Addressing your audience as a group is impersonal. Your listener doesn’t feel special. Speaking to a group allows each listener to feel like you are speaking to someone else. It is typical for your listener to feel like it’s alright to not take action, because another member of the group will handle it.

RADIO BEGINNINGS

This style began back when radio began. When radio broadcasting started, station owners needed something to broadcast. The content was typically stage performances broadcast over the airwaves.

The “Ladies and Gentlemen” salutation was meant for the live audience in the theater. It was not intended for the listening audience at home.

At the time, radio was the primary source of entertainment at the family home. Prior to the introduction of television, families gathered around the radio in the family room each evening for their entertainment. Addressing the audience as a group made sense. Listening was taking place as a group.

As radio broadcasts moved from stage performances on the radio to “made-for-radio” dramas that were produced in a studio rather than on the stage, the salutations didn’t change. The live audience was no longer present.

The audience however was still gathered together in the family room. The announcer continued to address the listening audience as a group, simply because it had always been done that way.

THEN TELEVISION

When television was introduced to the family room, long-form radio programming moved to television. Great radio stories like The Lone Ranger, Abbott & Costello and The Green Hornet left the radio for the promised land of television. Radio was quickly being replaced as the nightly family activity in the home.

Eventually, the radio performance was replaced with a disc jockey playing recorded music for the listening audience. Radios also progressed with the introduction of the transistor. Small, portable transistor radios took the place of the large console radios that once occupied the family room.

Listening moved from being a group activity in the family room to being a personal experience with these portable radios. Even as listening changed, most on-air personalities continued to address their audience as a group. It had always been done that way.

NOW PODCASTING

Today, podcast listening has become even more personal. Podcast listening typically takes place alone in a car or with headphones. People are no longer listening as a group. They are alone with your voice.

Even if your listeners are with others while they are listening, each individual is creating unique images in their head. Those images are different from the images created in the imagination of any other person in the audience. Audio is a very personal medium.

Since they are listening as individuals, you should address them as such. Your show should be a one-on-one conversation with your listener.

If most of your listeners are listening alone, it sounds out of place when you say, “Hello, everyone.” Your listener is then saying in their head, “Everyone? It’s just me. Who are you talking to?” “Everyone” is directed at no one. Adjust your language to fit your audience.

If I describe a car making a left turn at a busy intersection, you will envision it much differently than any other person listening to the same story. Television leaves very little to the imagination.

Audio helps create wonderful stories and stirs the imagination. The more personal and individual you can be with your stories, the stronger your connection and relationship will become.

TAKE ACTION

Finally, when you address a group, it is easy for your listener to shirk their responsibilities while expecting somebody else to take care of the tasks.

Let’s say you want your audience to visit your website. You say, “I would really appreciate it if you guys would log onto my website this week and let me know what you think.” Who exactly do you want to take action? You’re addressing the entire group. I don’t need to do it. There will be plenty of others that take action. It won’t make much difference if I don’t do it.

Unfortunately, most listeners are thinking the same thing. When you check your web stats, they’ve barely moved. Very few have taken action. Why? Because you didn’t address them individually. It was easy to assume somebody else would handle it.

THREE STEPS

There are three steps to treat your listeners as an audience of one.

First, get rid of the groupspeak. Change your nouns and pronouns from plural to singuar. Instead of using “ladies and gentlemen” or “you guys”, use “you”, “me” and “I”. Talk to one person. Most everything you say will apply to one person just like it will apply to a group of people.

Second, be personable. Reveal things to your audience that you would reveal to your friends. When you have trust in your listener, she will begin to feel appreciated. Your relationships will become stronger and more meaningful.

Finally, be real. Speak like a real person and not an announcer. Replace announcer words with words real people use. Instead of using “good evening” like a network news anchor from 1975, use “hi” like you would use when you call a friend.

If you hope to make your call-to-action effective, you need to create strong relationships with your listeners. If you want to create strong, meaningful relationships with your audience, you must treat each person in your audience as an individual.

Make each listener feel special. Talk directly to them one-on-one. Use words that sound like you are speaking to one person. Be personable. Be real. Create wonderful relationships as you create multiple audiences of one.

Get the free resource that will help you define your ideal target listener. You can get the free download at PodcastTalentCoach.com/listener.

 

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

More Podcast Audience Growth – PTC270

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

We are all looking to grow our audience. Who doesn’t want more podcast audience growth? You need a strategy and multiple ideas.

MULTIPLE STREAMS

Multiple streams of income help grow your revenue. Those streams also protect you from any one source going away. If all of your revenue comes from one source, you are at risk of losing most of your revenue if that source disappears.

The same is true with your audience growth. If all of your new listeners are coming from the same source, your growth dries up if that source goes away.

I have a free resource for you. If you would like 75 ways to drive engagement with your podcast, visit PodcastTalentCoach.com/increasedownloads.

Finding ways to get in front of new audiences is a great way to grow your show. A podcast with a similar audience is ripe for collaboration.

LARRY THE CABLE GUY

I was on a free strategy call the other night with a podcaster. We were discussing how she could use a podcast to promote her books and speaking opportunities.

A podcast is a great way to promote your services and demonstrate your authority.

We talked about her concept, and we realized she didn’t really want to do all of the work to create a podcast from scratch. She really wanted to get a jump start by partnering with an established brand.

That brought to mind Larry the Cable Guy. Back in the early 90s, Dan Whitney was getting his start in stand up before he became better known as Larry the Cable Guy.

If you check out YouTube, you can find stand up routines by Dan. His career was just like every struggling comedian until he found his unique bit and partners to help him grow it.

One of my radio buddies was friends with Dan. Chris and Dan were both coming up through the comedy circuit as Chris was getting into radio.

Dan would call into Chris’ radio show and do his “Larry the Cable Guy” bit. It was commentary on society and hilarious.

This turned into Larry doing the same bit on stations across the country. By being featured on many radio shows, Larry’s comedy career took off.

Larry didn’t need to create his own radio show. He just found established partners who could help him jump start his career.

FIND A PARTNER

As I was talking to this podcaster, and we realized she didn’t want to start from scratch, I told her the story of Larry the Cable Guy. She has a friend who would let her do a feature on his show each week. This is a perfect way to get started.

When Cliff Ravenscraft was doing the Podcast Answerman Podcast, Erik Fisher would do a technology segment on the show each week. Erik now has BeyondTheToDoList.com. Finding a podcast partner is a great way to create audience growth.

BENEFITS

There are a few benefits of using a partner for audience growth.

  • Somebody else creates the bulk of the content
  • No need to edit. You can just show up, record and be done
  • It is a jumpstart. You start a few rungs up the ladder
  • You get in front of a whole new audience

DRAWBACKS

There are also a few drawbacks of this strategy

  • You don’t control the entire content of the show
  • Somebody else’s platform gets the benefit from promotion
  • You don’t control the promotion of the show
  • You don’t control the brand and image of the show

AUDIENCE GROWTH STEPS

If you want to try this approach, three steps.

  • Find someone with an audience you’d like to attract
  • Determine how the main host will benefit from your feature
  • Create a simple agreement in writing, including how often, how long, when you record, compensation (plug your site, etc), how the agreement ends, what happens if one party doesn’t live up to the agreement.

 

FREE RESOURCE

If you would like 75 ways to drive engagement with your podcast, visit PodcastTalentCoach.com/increasedownloads. These ideas will help you create audience growth for your podcast.

 

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Podcast Interviewer or Interviewee? – Episode 267

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

A podcast interview is powerful for the growth of your podcast. This is true when you are the interviewer on your own podcast. It is also true when you are the interviewee being interviewed on another podcast. There are benefits to both of the interview.

Before we get into the episode this week, I want to talk about you. I want to interview you on the Podcast Talent Coach podcast. If you use your podcast to drive your business, let’s talk. Visit PodcastTalentCoach.com/guest.

Interviewer

Benefits

  • Adds content to your show.
  • Your guests are content experts beyond your level of knowledge.
  • Lessens the amount of show prep you need to complete.
  • Adds authority by association.
  • Adds another level of depth to your content.

Negatives

  • Need to schedule time.
  • Not as much control over the content.
  • Requires work to find great guests.
  • A little extra technology required.
  • Some guests like to control the conversation.

Interviewee

Benefits

  • You get in front of a different audience.
  • Adds authority by association.
  • Conduct the interview and you’re done – no editing.

Negatives

  • Tough to get on the good shows.
  • You do not control the final output.

Tips

Create a speaker sheet. Find someone to help on Fiverr or a similar service. See my sheet at PodcastTalentCoach.com/guest.

Find complimentary podcasts and do interview swaps. You each interview the other on your show.

I am looking to interview podcasters who use their podcast to grow their business.

As a guest, I can talk about the power of podcasting, how a podcast can demonstrate your authority in your space and how to make money with a podcast. Those topics are on my speaker sheet.

If you are interested, visit PodcastTalentCoach.com/guest. Let’s see if it makes sense to swap interviews.

 

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

7 Ways To Grow Your Audience This Weekend – PTC263

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

There are things you can do this weekend that can grow your audience. Some tactics will have immediate effect. Others will grow your audience over time. Each tactic incorporates one powerful ingredient.

Word-of-mouth.

Word-of-mouth has worked for me time and again. You can start using it this weekend.

RADIO AUDIENCE

It was the spring of 1999. The company I worked for had just purchased a few more radio stations in town. Our general manager was going to let me program one of those stations as a Top 40.

Now, the biggest station in town was a Top 40 that had been around for about 20 years. They were the big dog. Everyone listened to that station. Getting people to change would not be easy. In fact, it had been my favorite station as I was growing up.

The station couldn’t just be better. We had to do something different.

We signed on the station playing Top 40 music that leaned a little rhythmic. Along with the biggest hits on the chart, we were playing the rap and hip hop that wasn’t being played anywhere on the radio in town. It got high school and college kids talking.

Our on-air team consisted of me in the afternoon and a 20-something kid at night. The rest of the day was nothing but music. We had a promotions director who helped a ton, but wasn’t on air. The 3 of us had to take down Goliath.

Since there was only 2 of us on the air, we started using our listeners as the voice of the station. Our listeners introduced new music. High school kids hosted our Top 9 at 9 countdown. Listeners were on the air all the time requesting songs and giving a shout out to their friends.

The week after we signed on our station, they big heritage station was having their annual outdoor concert. We set up shop along the only road in and out of the amphitheater. We were shaking hands and thanking people for listening all day long.

By campaigning along that road, we upset the big station. So much so that they came down to run us out. That was no problem. We had hired an airplane to pull a banner and fly over the event. The banner said, “Channel 977 – Move To It”. More importantly, the other station stood on stage and told the crowd to NOT look at the plane. More word-of-mouth.

Whenever we were on the streets for events that summer, we were recording more listeners to put on the air. Our entire goal was to make listeners feel like they controlled the station and really had input in what we were doing. They talked about it all the time.

One year later, we were the number one radio station in town. A few years later, that heritage station changed their name and their musical focus. Our listeners did it all.

PODCAST AUDIENCE

I took that experience and used it when I was launching my podcast.

As the podcast was taking off, I was networking with other great podcasters in the industry. Not only was I getting my listeners to talk about my show, other podcasters who came before me were helping.

That’s the difference between radio and podcasting. You have to choose between two stations. Radio is 24-hours a day. If you are listening to one, you are not listening to the other.

With podcasting, you can always listen to two podcasts … or three or four. Podcasts are only a few hours a week at most. There is still plenty of time to consume others. Podcasters are always much more willing to help each other.

When I ask people how they discovered me and my show, many tell me they heard someone else mention it. It may have been on a podcast, on social media or during a conversation.

Word-of-mouth is powerful. Use it to your advantage.

GROW YOUR AUDIENCE THIS WEEKEND

Here are seven things you can do this weekend to start growing your audience.

1. Deliver quality content in your newsletter that could be used and shared.

Ask listeners to bring along a friend & spread the word.

Deputize your audience.

2. Network with as many influential people in your niche as possible.

When others in your niche talk about you, it can give you instant credibility. This doesn’t necessarily need to be a podcast. This can be a website, publication, or any other well-known individual in your niche.

3. Create a flashback segment from an old episode on your current episode.

There are two ways to increase downloads. One is getting more listeners. The other is to get currently listeners to listen more. By getting current listeners to check out past episodes, this is a great way to increase overall downloads.

4. Do Facebook Live “ask me anything” sessions.

Demonstrate your expertise.

5. Get media to talk about you.

Become an available expert in your field. Send them a note about something newsworthy in your industry. Then, tell them you are available if they need an expert to expound on the details in the news story. Make it easy for them.

6. Create a survey for your super-fans to determine what they desire

7. Partner with another podcast.

Just like I did when I launched my show, reach out to other shows in your niche. Especially those that compliment your show. Trade resources with another podcast. Guest host for another show.

GET STARTED

Some of these can have an immediate effect on your downloads. If another podcaster or a news outlet mentions your show, your downloads can jump quickly. Creating content that can be shared and doing Facebook live sessions will take a little longer, but will create a solid brand for your show.

If you want to create revenue with your podcast, you need to first build an audience. This is where you start. Take action this weekend on two or three of these. See what is possible.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Creating Anticipation – Episode 254

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

ANTICIPATION

When you want your listeners to stick around and listen to what you have to say, you need to give them a compelling reason. Your listener needs to anticipate what is to come later in the show. You need to excite them. You need to tease them. Create anticipation.

Dave Jackson of School of Podcasting and I were coaching a podcaster on an episode of the Podcast Review Show the other night. At the end of the episode we were reviewing, the host said, “In the next few weeks, we will be interviewing great guests like A, B and C.”

I told him it was great that he was enticing people to come back to future episodes. However, he wasn’t really creating any excitement about those shows. Do any of those guests give a piece of content you cannot get anywhere else? Let’s tease that.

MORE THAN PROMOTING

If I say, “Next week, we will be interviewing Dave Jackson”, I do very little to create any anticipation for you. It is just another interview.

If I say, “Next week when we talk to Dave Jackson of School of Podcasting, he is going to give you the one trick he uses to land the really big interviews for his show and it works 92% of the time”, that creates some anticipation for the episode. A true tease creates intrigue and a little excitement. It makes your listener ask, “I wonder what it is.”

Anticipation is a key feature to storytelling. Your story should build just like a good plot builds in a movie. You need to make your audience anticipate the content that is on the way.

Your story is similar to a vacation you are planning to take. The fantastic anticipation for the trip is almost as pleasurable as the trip itself. You can’t wait for the trip to arrive. You want your listener to feel the same way about your story.

When your listener can’t wait for the story to arrive, you have created some great content with an powerful tease. Your listeners will get more enjoyment from your show when they get the tease payoff more often. The pleasure of the “oh wow” factor will be increased. The joy of anticipation will keep your audience coming back for more.

EFFECTIVE TEASE

There are three steps to creating an effective tease.

#1 – Intrigue me.

When you promote content that is coming up later in the show, you must give your audience an intriguing reason to stick around. It isn’t enough to simply say, “A great story about this weekend is coming up.” Few will stick around for the payoff. The tease lacks stickiness. It doesn’t hook the listener.

A creative tease produces anticipation. Instead, use something like, “You’re never gonna believe what I found in the attic this past weekend. My world is about to take a wild turn.” With that statement, your imagination begins to work.

What could it be? A wasp nest? An antique? A structural problem with the house? Imagination is the magic of a creative tease. Stir the imagination of your audience to truly engage them with your content.

When possible, intrigue by incorporating the listeners world. “This weekend, I discovered a way to save $100 a month on my grocery bill by changing one thing in the way we shop. I’ll tell you how you can do it too.” It answers “what’s in it for me” for your listener.

#2 – Give them 80%.

To create an effective tease, give your listener 80% of the story while leaving out the most important 20%. It is similar to giving the setup for a joke without providing the punch line. Lead your listener right up to the line, but make them wait to step over.

The key to an effective tease is to withhold the most important 20%. Let’s use our previous example of the attic weekend. I could say, “You’re not gonna believe it, but I found a $25,000 antique painting in the attic this weekend. I’ll tell you what’s on it coming up.”

This is a perfect example of withholding the wrong 20%. Who cares who is on it. If it’s worth $25,000, it could be a painting of the sky. It wouldn’t matter to me. I’d only be asking where I could sell it.

$25,000 is the most exciting piece of information in the entire story. That is the piece that I need to withhold to create some excitement. To properly tease, I need to say, “In the attic this weekend, I found an antique painting of Napoleon. You’re never gonna believe how much it is worth.” You are more likely to stick around to see if I can retire on my winnings when I set it up in this fashion.

Make it impossible to search online.

You want your listener to keep listening for the payoff to your set up. If I can simply search on Google for the answer to your tease, there is no reason to keep listening. I can just look it up and be done with it.

#3 – You need to get creative to make your tease unsearchable.

Let’s say I have a story about Joe Celebrity getting drunk at High Profile Bar in Las Vegas over the weekend where he got arrested for assault. I could say, “Another movie star got arrested this weekend after he got in a fight with a customer at High Profile Bar in Las Vegas. I’ll tell you who it is coming up.”

Celebrity name is part of the correct 20% I’m withholding. However, I can look this story up on Google in a heartbeat. If I search “Arrest High Profile Bar Las Vegas”, the chances are good that I will find the story in the first few search results. The tease isn’t effective. It is too easy to search.

To make the tease more powerful, make it impossible to search. “Another bar fight over the weekend landed another celebrity in jail. The story is coming up.” This tease makes it much more difficult to search. If you entered “celebrity bar fight weekend” in Google, 70 million results show up. It will be much easier to wait for my payoff than to begin searching 70 million Google entries.

RELATIONSHIPS

The three steps to powerful teases will help you begin to engage your audience on the way to building powerful relationships. Use the three steps in your show recap to entice people to listen to the episode. Then, use them again during the introduction of the show to get listeners to enjoy the entire recording.

You’ve worked hard to create your content. A lot of effort has been exerted on your part while writing and recording your show. Make your content intriguing by using these three steps in the art of the tease.

When you use the art of the tease, your listeners will spend more time with your show. The increased frequency of the tease payoffs will help your audience enjoy your content more. When your show is more entertaining, it becomes more engaging. When you truly engage your audience with your content, you can begin building powerful relationships. That’s where trust and influence with your listener begins.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Engagement Tips – Increase Downloads – Episode 251

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Are you like most podcasters? Are you trying to find ways to increase downloads of your show?

I am building something that will help you increase your downloads, build your engagement and create some revenue with your podcast. I’m putting the finishing touches on it. It should be ready for you soon.

Part of this project will help you develop ideas. You can use these ideas every day to increase your downloads.

In the meantime, get my full list of 75 Ways To Drive Engagement With Your Podcast.

www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/increasedownloads

INCREASE DOWNLOADS

  1. Tease upcoming topics on future episodes. This will help listeners find other episodes that might be of interest.
  2. Ask for reviews and make it benefit your listener. Listeners don’t do much for you. However, reviews teach your audience to respond and engage. Recognize them on the show.
  3. Everything interesting is about people. Find the angle for your content. Tell stories about others that relate to the content.
  4. Ask listeners what you should ask your next interview guest. This will get your audience invested in the show. Acknowledge who submitted the questions.
  5. Highlight a new resource each week. Then tell the resource creator about it. This helps listeners. You also may get some free publicity if the creator acknowledges your mention to her audience.
  6. Promote your website with a benefit. Create instant gratification. “Sign up for my newsletter” is no real benefit. “Get a tip each week” is a benefit. If you are promoting your website, make sure you promote the benefit as well.
  7. Have listeners submit a tip of the week. This gets listeners invested in the show. When you acknowledge their idea, tip or submission, they feel rewarded. They may also tell others.

Get the full list of 75 Ways To Drive Engagement With Your Podcast.

www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/increasedownloads

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

IS PODCAST CHIT CHAT EFFECTIVE? – EPISODE 250

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

CHIT CHAT

Some podcasts start the episode with some chit chat. This is the small talk at the beginning of the show that really has very little to do with the show topic.

“Hey, how are you?” “What have you been up to lately?”

The small talk at the beginning of the show is sometimes between co-hosts and sometimes between host and guest. But, should it be there? Should chit chat be part of your episode?

               Mentioned in this episode:

               Podcast Review Show: http://podcastreviewshow.com

               Podcaster’s Kit: http://podcasttalentcoach.com/kit

If you believe the Facebook discussions and episode comments, you would think chit chat is causing all of your listeners to leave your show in a stampede.

Some small talk could actually help you if you package it correctly.

First, let’s agree. Chit chat for the sake of hearing yourself talk does no one any good. That is definitely not the small talk I am recommending.

Your chit chat at the beginning of the show must support the content of the episode. It should add context to the discussion.

WHAT IS YOUR TURNOFF

There was a post in a podcasting Facebook group the other day. The question was, “What makes you turn off a podcast or click unsubscribe?”

As soon as someone said “Too much rambling before the subject i’m actually listening for gets going”, everyone jumped on the bandwagon.

Other comments include …

“I don’t like super long intros, bad sound quality and when hosts get too ‘in jokey’.”

“I hate when there is too much faffing about getting to the point of the episode. All that ‘so how was your week?’ stuff going on 12 different tangents for 15mins before we get to the meat.”

“BORING PREEEE AMBLE! – I don’t mind if your opening chit chat is fun or relevant or interesting, but if it’s you just you and your guest warming up – commmmmme onnnn! EDIT!”

“Boring interview babble at the beginning.”

“Episodes that don’t get quickly to a takeaway. I find many podcasts that meander around too much, especially co-host and Interview formats.

YOU CAN’T CATCH UP

The thing to remember is that you cannot catch up to a slow start. You need to give value right from the start.

When your show opens, tell listeners exactly what they will get from this episode. If they stay to the end, how will they benefit? Tease it by creating some anticipation for your listener.

Now, if you want to include some chit chat here, it should add some context to the content. This could be a story about something that happened to you this week and how it relates to the topic of the show.

Let’s say you are doing an episode about shaping your effective chit chat. You could start with a story about being on Facebook and the way everyone jumped on the bandwagon. If you had a co-host, you could talk about your feelings and opinions of small talk.

This story adds context to the show. This is the reason we have decided to discuss this topic on this episode.

There is one important thing the story does. Your chit chat allows your audience to get to know you.

People do business with those they know, like and trust. This part of your show allows your audience to get to know you and what you believe and value. You simply need to frame it correctly.

FOUR STEPS

Here are the four steps to add valuable chit chat to the beginning of your show.

First, open the show with “what’s in it for me”. Tell your listeners exactly why this episode is valuable and how they will be better when it is over. Make them want to listen to the entire episode. Create some anticipation.

Next, add a story and some chit chat that relates to the content on this episode.

Then, start the story and chit chat by making the connection between the story and the episode subject.

If your episode is about chit chat, start the story with something like, “Some small talk could actually help you if you package it correctly.” Make it a powerful headline.

Finally, don’t overstay your welcome. Once you make your point with the story, get into the meat of the content.

You can’t catch up to a slow start. If you are going to include some chit chat and small talk, make it valuable so it supports the content of the show.

 

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

60% of Your Listeners Are Here – Episode 244

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Podcast Movement 2019 is in the books. Thousands of podcasters hit Orlando, Florida for another great year of learning, connecting and sharing. The sessions were full of podcast stats.

One of my favorite sessions each year at PM is the State of Podcasting presented by Rob Walch, VP of Podcaster Relations at Libsyn. “Yes, that marketing advice for your podcast is BS – 2019.”

Rob always offers great podcasting statistics. This year, many other sessions provided podcast stats of their own.

SHOW LENGTH

A few podcast stats provided by Rob:

84% of shows with over 100,000 downloads are over 51 minutes long.

Of the top 100 podcasts, the average length is 67 minutes and the median is 55.

People love to dive deep with your content. Just make sure you stay engaging. Don’t make your show long just for the sake of being long.

APPLE PODCASTS

Rob said 59% of podcasts are downloaded via Apple Podcasts.

Tim Street “Growing Your Audience”. VP of Influence and Production for Authentic. Tim said Apple dominates the podcast market. Apple Podcasts account for 62% of podcast listening.

Let’s say roughly 60% of all podcasts are downloaded via Apple Podcasts. 3 out of every 5 podcasts are downloaded here. If you are not on Apple Podcasts, you are missing half of your potential audience.

On the other hand, Apple Podcasts cannot be your only home. Be sure you are available to android users.

Ensure you are not only on Apple Podcasts, but people can find you.

STAND OUT

There are over 700,000 podcasts. Make your brand stand out in every way possible.

Create great cover art. Make sure the show description is engaging and communicates a clear benefit. Most of all, write your headlines to attract new listeners.

Gregg Clunis “How to double your downloads using behavioral psychology”. He is a writer, entrepreneur, and content creator. He is the host and author of “Tiny Leaps, Big Changes”, a podcast, book and community dedicated towards bridging the gap between the knowledge of what to do, and the act of doing it.

DOWNLOADS

Of the podcast stats that Gregg provided, one stood out. He said the median number of downloads for a podcast is 129 per episode. Only 20% have more than 1,000 downloads per episode.

Realize there are many things that factor into your download numbers and podcast stats. Podcasts in the big 3 topics will get more downloads than shows in the small niches. Money, relationships and weight loss typically have larger audiences than small niches like gun collecting, gardening and chemistry. The larger topics are just more mass appeal.

 

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How To Use Your Podcast Avatar – Episode 238

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

So many gurus tell you to create your podcast avatar. They might even tell you how to define your target listener. However, very few teach you how to use that podcast avatar once you have it created.

THE IDEAL LISTENER

Why do we create an avatar or ideal listener?

Dave Jackson and I do a podcast together called “The Podcast Review Show“. Podcasters join us on the show to have their podcast reviewed. It is basically a coaching session with the two of us for 60 to 90 minutes. If you would like to be on the show with us, visit PodcastReviewShow.com.

We were talking to two engineers the other day reviewing their show. We asked them about their target listener. They are like most podcasters. They said, “Our show is really for everyone.”

I realize you want a large audience. I know you want to get as many listeners you want without alienating anyone. However, your show cannot be for everyone.

These two create a show that highlights engineers, mostly civil, and the great work they do. The content and discussion is great.

Is their engineering show for 12-year-old girls who love ballet? Is it right for 60-year-old guy who sells newspaper advertising? Would 33-year-old professional athletes be interested in it? Maybe, but probably not.

As we talked, we determined the show is probably for a 20-year-old university student who is trying to define her path through the industry. This doesn’t mean 45-year-old executives wouldn’t be interested in the fascinating conversation. This simply means we are creating content custom designed for the college student.

When we focus the content, the guy that is 45 still enjoys the conversation. However, the college student gets so much more out of it, because we are answering the questions he is asking. We are giving him exactly what he needs. The show means something to him.

DEVELOP YOUR TARGET LISTENER

One of the Podcast Talent Coach worksheets available to your for free is the Listener Development Worksheet. This tool will help you develop your avatar to make your show more powerful and create more engagement.

With a podcast avatar that is clearly defined, we are discussing his wants & needs. The stories we tell and details we share are relevant to him. The desires of your podcast avatar create a filter that will help you decide what examples to include.

To help you define your podcast avatar, get my free Listener Development Worksheet. By completing it, you will have a clear picture of your ideal listener. Download it for free online at PodcastTalentCoach.com/listener.

THE STUDY

I really started understanding target listener when I read a study by Arbitron (the radio ratings service) and Joint Communications (a radio consulting firm). The study was called “What Women Want: Five Secrets To Better Ratings”.

This study really got into the differences between men and women. The interviews revealed the reasons women spend time with radio. The reasons were very radio-centric and don’t really apply to you.

What is relevant is the differences between the genders. When I realized there were variances between listeners, I understood the importance of really defining the ideal listener. Who is that one, ideal person we hope to attract to our content?

When we began developing the ideal listener, when then learned the more we focused on the ideal listener, the more our overall audience grew. This even included the listeners that didn’t necessarily fit the ideal mold.

Our content became better focused and relevant. It was a turning point for me.

The target listener of our radio station helped us decide what music to play. It shaped the contests we did. Our ideal listener helped determine who to hire to be on the air and what content should be included. It was a filter for everything we did on the radio.

INCLUSION

People want to feel part of the discussion and not like they are sitting in a lecture.

How do you create that atmosphere on your podcast?

First, download the Listener Development Worksheet at PodcastTalentCoach.com/listener. Then, let’s have a discussion about your show.

Take advantage of my free podcast strategy call. I can help you define your podcast avatar, your target listener. We can then develop a strategy to reach your goals.

Your strategy call is free. No strings attached. Visit PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

What Is The Purpose Of Your Lead Magnet

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

What is the purpose of your lead magnet? Did you create your lead magnet just to get an e-mail or launch your funnel?

The real purpose of your lead magnet is to create a relationship.

A lead magnet is something of value you give to a person in exchange for the contact information. This allows you to begin fostering a relationship with that individual.

I have created a new resource for you. It is my list of 21 Lead Magnet Ideas. You can get it here: https://www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/magnet

When you download this worksheet, you will notice that it fits the 7 primary characteristics of a solid lead magnet.

The worksheet also contains a few examples of what a lead magnet should NOT be, such as a long e-book. Extensive material like an e-book or long video course takes too long to consume. Your audience is looking for quick results.

Be generous and give to your audience. Help them succeed. Lead magnets help you do just that. You are giving your resources and knowledge. This will help you begin to build a strong relationship with your listeners.

If with every action you expect something in return, your audience will sense it.

Let the law of reciprocity happen naturally. Some will take action. Others will not. Appreciate what you have. Help as many as you can.

PURPOSE

Your lead magnet should do five things.

1. Help your listener solve a known problem.

2. Be consumable in five minutes or less.

3. Begin creating your relationship.

4. Gain their e-mail address – sometimes.

5. Demonstrate your expertise.

Create a few lead magnets for your audience. Some will work. Others will not. Keep trying until you find one that clicks with your listeners.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Are You Really Doing The Work To Be Successful?

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

I saw a post on Facebook the other day. “Everybody *wishes* they were successful – who wouldn’t want that? But how many are really doing everything they can to achieve it?”

Former Indiana basketball coach Bobby Knight said it a little differently. He said, “Most have the will to win, few have the will to prepare to win.”

Preparation is key. Have the will to put in the work.

Doing what others are unwilling to do is what will separate you from the crowd. Take consistent action and you will be much closer to your goals than others.

SIX STEPS

There are six steps to reach your goals.

1. Determine your goal.

2. Find someone who has been there and done that.

3. Define the steps to get there.

4. Break the steps into bite-sized chunks.

5. Take consistent action.

6. If you need help, find an accountability partner.

 

CHALLENGE

To help you take consistent action, I have created a Podcast Download Challenge. In the group, we help each other take consistent action in order to grow downloads for our podcasts.

Are you interested in growing your downloads? Join the challenge and reach your goals. Join here: https://www.podcasttalentcoach.com/challenge.

 

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Podcast

Why Are You Creating Your Podcast

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Why are you creating your podcast – because you love it or to gain a ton of listeners?

Both. But, it has to be about your passion first.

Be passionate. Love what you do.

You don’t want to be forced to entertain a large audience with a topic that feels like work. You want a topic that you love and you can talk about for days regardless of who is listening.

Audience size is relative. A weight loss audience is going to be much larger than an audience for a podcast about magic. The topic is more universal.

An engaged audience is the right size. A golf coach who handles a few pros is probably making a lot more money than a golf coach who has a podcast and course. The podcast golfer has a large audience that is engaged on a superficial level. The pro golf coach has an audience of a few who are incredibly engaged on a daily basis.

Your podcast is the same. You need to find the audience that will help you reach your goals. Create your content for the people who love what you do.

When you compare your audience size to the big gurus or those in a different niche, you will only be disappointed. Comparing yourself to others is a recipe for let down.

Be selective about who is in your audience. Find the right people. You are creating your podcast for those people.

Talk about a topic you love. Give it to an audience who is just as passionate as you are. That is the recipe for success.

When you create a podcast around a topic that you love, you are creating your podcast for the right reasons.

 

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How To Develop Your Ideal Target Podcast Listener

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

As we develop our business around our podcast, we strive to build trust. In order to build trust, we must develop relationships with our listeners. Friendships are created when you truly know everything about a person. This is the reason it is crucial that you define your single target listener.

Many podcasters refer to their target listener as their avatar. This person is the single individual around which you create all of your content.

To develop your business, you need to define your niche. Your focus on your niche helps grow your community. The ideal customers within that niche gives the focus the power.

Download my free Ideal Target Listener Worksheet at PodcastTalentCoach.com/listener.

TRUST

We have heard it said many times before. People do business with those they know, like and trust. This trust is what our friendship with our ideal listener is developing.

To build trust with our podcast, we need to have a conversation with one person. In order to do that, we need to define that ideal listener. Our target listener.

I have created a Listener Development Worksheet. This template will walk you through the development of your target listener step-by-step.

Use this worksheet to create your ideal listener. The more you know about your listener, the better you will be able to communicate. Keep this person in mind while recording each show.

YOUR AVATAR

In this episode, we walk through the worksheet. By the end of the show, you should have your ideal listener well defined along with a visual image in your mind.

A few characteristics of your ideal listener we will define today include age, gender, income, interests and fears. These are only a few of the 17 characteristics we will examine.

Be sure you have downloaded the worksheet. It will be a tremendous help with this episode.

Your ideal listener will evolve over time. The more you learn about your target listener, the more you will fine tune your definition.

RESEARCH

You can learn more about your audience by using a survey like Survey Monkey. Be careful that you ask questions that your audience will be comfortable answering. Specific income might be too personal. A range might be better.

Let me know how it turns out. I would love to help you any way I can.

Let’s have a conversation. People want to feel part of the discussion and not like they are sitting in a lecture. How do you create that atmosphere on your podcast?

  1. Talk to me, not at me
  2. Treat your audience as an audience of one
  3. Let your listener live vicariously through you
  4. Use your regular voice
  5. Do everything in your own style

 

TALK TO ME, NOT AT ME

When you are podcasting, talk “to” your listener. Don’t talk “at” her. You are not announcing. You are having a personal conversation and building a relationship.

Podcasting is an intimate conversation with one person. The conversation is typically one person speaking into a microphone addressing another single individual.

There may sometimes be hundreds of thousands of people listening. However, they are all listening by themselves. Even in an automobile with others listening via communal speakers, the members of the audience are listening by themselves in their own head. Each listener is developing their own unique, mental images.

Have a conversation directly with that individual. Put your listener in the moment. Avoid addressing the group. Instead of using “hello everyone”, use “hi, how are you?” Make her feel like you are talking directly to her. It will make your podcast relationship much stronger.

AUDIENCE OF ONE

As you are creating your podcast, treat your audience like you are talking to each person individually. This is critical when creating a trusting relationship with your audience.

I hear many shows address their audience as a group with comments like “hello everyone” or “hey guys”. Each person in your audience is listening to you as an individual. Audio is a very personal medium. Many times, they are listening with headphones. It is just you and her. Talk to her just like that.

Addressing a crowd on the radio began when radio began. As radio was just being created, station owners needed content to broadcast. Radio programming began with rebroadcasting live, theater events. The person on the stage would address the crowd as “ladies and gentleman”.

As radio progressed, live audiences were eliminated. However, people on the radio continued to address the audience as a group. It was fitting. The family still gathered around the radio before television was introduced to the family room. An on-air personality could address the audience as a group and be justified in doing so.

Radio then became a personal medium. The television replaced the radio as family entertainment. In-car and headphones became the preferred method of radio listening. Each listener was now creating images and visions in his or her own head that were unique to their imagination. Their thoughts were different from those of any other listener. The conversation was now between the person on the air and the individual listening.

Unfortunately, radio personalities continued to address the listener as a group. “It has always been done this way.” The disconnect began.

Podcasts are even more individualistic than radio. Most people select a podcast because of their own tastes. Groupthink does not play a factor as it would to select a movie or television show for the family. It is one person listening on their own to a show that interests them.

If you are talking to your listener as if they are in a group, using plural terms like everyone and you guys and you all, your listener will wonder who you are addressing. They will think, “You guys? I’m listening by myself. Who are you talking to?” In the end, they will not follow your call-to-action, because they will think someone else in your “group” will handle it. Talk to an audience of one and build that relationship with each listener individually.

Nobody like to be lectured to. Data and facts get dull & boring. Engage by being conversational. Tell stories. This is a conversation, not a lecture.

CAN I BE YOU?

Vicarious. Voyeurism. Eavesdropping.

Those are three main reasons people listen to your podcast. Tell stories to help fulfill those desires.

People dream about having a different (and usually better) life. They want to experience those things others are experiencing. The grass always seems greener on the other side of the fence. People crave living the lives of others.

Your listeners want to live vicariously through you. They want to experience your success. They wish they had the courage to do the things you have done. Your fans want to be you in some way or another.

Voyeurism is a reason many people watch the shows they watch, listen to the stories they hear, or read the books they read. They want to experience the lives of others.

People eavesdrop on the conversations of others for the very same reasons. They can experience the life of others without the risk of failure. Eavesdropping doesn’t take the courage that it takes to actually live the life.

By telling great stories about your experiences, you help your audience fulfill the desire to live vicariously through you. If your show contains audio of your feats and experiences, you allow your audience to become the voyeurs they desire. When you interview people on your show, you allow your listener to eavesdrop on your conversation.

When you simply lecture as the content of your show, you fail to help your listener experience any of those three desires. Find new ways to deliver your material to your audience. You will make those important connections that turn into friendships. Those relationships will foster loyalty to your show. Your tribe will follow you wherever you go. That’s a powerful thing.

Tell stories of self-revelation. See where it takes you. You’ll be surprised how many people wish they could be you.

USE YOUR REGULAR VOICE

The scoop is that fake announcer voice that you hear quite often. It’s like a slow start with a gradual build.

“Wwwwweeeelllllcom to the big show.”

It sounds like your voice is going up and down as if it is on a yo-yo.

Real people don’t talk like that. You are trying to build trusting relationships with your audience. You want to sound real and authentic.

When you sound like a supermarket announcer, you sound fake. Your listeners will find it hard to trust you, because they know that isn’t really you. The audio they are hearing sounds like a character you are portraying.

Don’t let your voice bounce like a ball. You can be excited and enthusiastic. You can also be real and natural at the same time. Just be yourself.

When the inflection of your voice bounces up and down, you will find it difficult to truly engage your listener. Be real. Avoid the scoop.

YOUR STYLE

Create everything you do in your own style. You can only stand out among all other shows when you create your own unique style. You must then make sure everything you do is consistent with that style.

Many new broadcasters try to emulate the style of their hero or mentor. They attempt to imitate the styles they hear from other broadcasters. Unfortunately, copying doesn’t create a unique style. Copying typically creates a watered-down version of some other style. When creating your content, be yourself and find your own style.

Some of the greatest broadcasters didn’t start the ascension to the top until they abandoned the attempts to broadcast in the style they thought others desired and began being true to themselves.

Oprah Winfrey quit trying to be a traditional news anchor. She also quit doing the typical tabloid, daytime talk show. When she began to create the show she always desired, she went to the top of the game.

Howard Stern began as a radio DJ sounding like every other radio DJ. He was playing the records and spouting the lines written by management while going nowhere. When Stern decided he was going to do radio his way, he began to make a name for himself. He also went to the top.

Rush Limbaugh followed a very similar path. He had a cheesy radio name. He followed the format designed by somebody else. Limbaugh made every attempt to fulfill the typical radio DJ stereotype. He also got fired again and again. When he decided to broadcast in his style and true to his beliefs, he began his rise to the top.

Adam Corolla made his climb when he took full control over his style and show. He was climbing the DJ ladder in Los Angeles. Corolla had some decent television work. He then decided to create his own show in his own style via podcast. That began his rise as one of the biggest podcasters in the world.

All of these broadcasters made the decision to stop copying others. They all created shows that were true to their style.

They each also stay true to their style in everything they do. You will never hear Rush sound like Howard. You’ll never mistake something Oprah says as something Adam might say. Being true to their style isn’t something that takes conscious effort. It comes easy to each of them, because it is true to who they are as people.

Be true to yourself. It will make it easy to create everything you do in your style.

 

Download my free Ideal Target Listener Worksheet at PodcastTalentCoach.com/listener.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Where More Engagement Begins – Episode 211

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Where More Engagement Begins – Episode 211

Engagement
Engagement begins with your preparation

We all want more downloads and more engagement for our podcast. If you’re not growing, you are shrinking. But where does that engagement begin?

There are many theories on engagement. Many work. It is usually about style. However, one principle holds true. If you want more engagement, you need to ask for more engagement.

In sales, if you want your customer to buy, you need to ask for the sale. In podcasting, if you want your listener to do something, you need to ask them to engage.

Before you can ask for engagement, you need to define what you want your listener to do after the episode is over.

We talked last week about defining your target listener. Use that target listener definition as a filter for your content. Then, decide what you want your listeners to do with your content.

Just the other day, I heard a podcast host answering a listener question about a website. The host said, “Click on the ‘FAQ’ tab. I’m not sure if it is above or below the video.” Now, let’s think about this answer. Before the show began, the host knew he was going to answer this specific question. He knew the steps to take in order to solve the listener’s problem. In preparing, he apparently stopped there.

Instead of taking notes and knowing the exact details regarding the answer, he just freestyled and sounded uninformed. In doing so, he sounded like he wasn’t quite sure of the answer. It would have taken him 2 minutes to pull up the website before he began to record and jot down a few notes regarding the answer.

Listen to a podcast like “48 Days To The Work You Love” by Dan Miller. In the show open, Dan lays out the exact e-mail questions he will answer. He has all of the information at his fingertips for each detail he intends to give. He doesn’t stumble. He doesn’t guess. Dan knows exactly what he is going to deliver. He is prepared and sticks to his plan.

That is what I mean when I say “be prepared”. Get the details down. Stumbling makes you sound unsure of your answer. Nailing the details will give you credibility and make you sound like the expert you are.

 

SHOW PLANNING

Before you are able to create unique content, you need to properly prepare for the show.

You must know where you’re going before you can actually get there. That statement is true with a road trip and it is also true with your podcast. When you set out to record a show, you must have goals in mind. Once you’ve determined what you hope to accomplish, you can then decide how you will make it happen.

So many podcasters seem to record their show less than fully prepared. I hear hosts often search for details that should be right at their fingertips. There is no reason to lack the proper information while you are doing your show. If you’ve fully prepared for your podcast, the information should be right in front of you.

There are five key steps to properly preparing for your show. Taking these five steps each time you record will give your show focus, make your show more entertaining, and create stronger relationships with your listeners. These steps will also make you sound more professional.

If you have ever fought the impostor syndrome, being more prepared will help you win that battle.

The impostor syndrome, or impostor phenomenon, is the psychological phenomemon in which people are unable to internalize their accomplishments. Despite external evidence that proves they are deserving and successful, those that suffer from impostor syndrome do not feel they deserve the success. These people believe their success came about not because of skill or expertise, but more because of luck or manipulation.

Students sometimes face this phenomenon in college when they tell themselves they really don’t belong in such an esteemed university and others may soon discover the fraud.

It is common for us all to experience the impostor syndrome to some extent. The phenomenom is roughly the opposite of your ego. Your ego is telling you that you are the best around and people should admire everything you’ve done. Your internal impostor is then telling you that you have no authority to be doing this. You are a fake and a fraud with no credibility. The only reason you are in this position according to your internal impostor is because nobody has yet discovered the truth.

Both your ego and impostor exist within you. Learning how to manage both is a challenge. Being well prepared for your show and having the confidence to stick to the plan will help you win that battle.

Here are the five steps to adequately prepare for your podcast.

 

YOUR GOAL

Overall, what do you hope to accomplish with this particular show? Define the call to action you hope to make your listeners take. Here, you are defining the ultimate purpose of this specific show.

The purpose of this particular episode may be more focused than the overall goal for the podcast as a whole. If the general goal for your podcast is to teach people to coach lacrosse, the goal of the show today might be to discuss the power of Double-Goal Coaching. The goal today is a subset of the goal for the podcast overall.

Your call-to-action of your show could be many things. It could be teaching your audience in order to build relationships, sales of your product, visiting your website, supporting your cause, joining your club or simply listening again. Know what you hope to accomplish before you begin the journey.

Knowing the goal for your show will help you develop a filter for your subject matter and topics. When each topic passes through this goal filter, you will be able to determine if the topic should be part of the show and how to best handle the content. Your show filter helps keep the show focused. You cannot build your filter until you first know the goal of your show.

Let’s take the “School of Podcasting” podcast with Dave Jackson for example. Dave is focused on helping people launch podcasts. He wants to help as many people as possible get up and running with their own show. Therefore, everything Dave does on his show is centered around that goal. His content goes through that show filter.

Dave also reviews podcasts. Reviewing shows isn’t part of launching shows. Dave has a completely separate podcast called the “Podcast Review Show” that I co-host with him. Where “School of Podcasting” is focused on launching, “Podcast Review Show” is focused on improving. Both shows have their own unique filter for the content.

The goal you develop for your show will build a focus for your podcast. When your show has focus, people know what to expect. Consistency is developed with your content. You also build confidence to fight your inner impostor when you consistently reach that goal each and every show.

 

STRUCTURE DEFINES TOPICS

Once you have developed the goal for your podcast and a goal for this particular episode, you need to determine which topics you hope to discuss today.

Topics come in many different forms. A podcast will sometimes focus on one topic for the entire show. Sometimes a podcast will have an overall theme while handling a few different topics under the umbrella of that theme. There are podcasts that answer various listener questions during the show. Others interview guests. And yet, some podcasts combine many styles into one show. How you approach your show is completely up to you. That is one thing that makes podcasting so great. You are in control.

Your show should have a structure that you follow for each episode. Your structure is a rough guideline that can easily be followed by your listeners. You might start the show with your show open and a quick overview of the episode. You could then include some news about your business and the industry in general. A short guest interview could be next followed by listener e-mail questions. Finally, you could end with a recap and contact information. Each week, you simply plug in new content to each segment.

On the other hand, your show may only be an interview each week. It could be very focused and streamlined. You get to decide.

Once you have built the structure for your show, you can easily determine which topics will fill each particular episode. You can look at the structure in the example above and know exactly what you need. To record today’s show, I would need my show open, my outline, a list of news headlines, my recorded interview, and a list of e-mail questions and supporting answers.

Many people forget to bring the answers to the questions. Have your answers outlined to ensure you have any supporting material you need to appropriately answer the questions. When you try to answer the questions off the cuff, you will inevitably forget some important facts. It is best to make some notes before you begin recording. That takes us to the next step.

 

STRATEGY FOR EACH TOPIC

When developing your strategy, you need to determine how you will address each topic. Whether you are presenting information, answering questions or interviewing guests, there are many ways to address each topic. You do not need to do it the same way every other podcast does it. Be unique. Find the way that will stand out.

If you are interviewing, do you need to ask the same questions that every other podcast asks? What if you play a game with each guest called “The Hat of Forbidden Questions”. It’s a hat filled with crazy questions. You simply reach in the hat, pull out a question and ask whatever is on the card. It is completely different than every other podcast. It will also get unique answers while engaging your guest in a unique manner.

Here is a tip many people forget. This is show business. You could play “The Hat of Forbidden Questions” and never even have a hat. You could have a list of crazy questions for your guest written out and simply pretend to reach into a hat. This is show business. You are here to entertain.

Do you think the actors in “Seinfeld” or “The Sopranos” ad lib their lines? Of course not. Do you find it less entertaining when they follow the script? Of course not. There is no reason you cannot add a little show biz to your show.

Just be sure to always be true to the show. If you are going to pretend there is a hat, you MUST ALWAYS pretend there is a hat. Giving up the showbiz secret will ruin everything. On the other hand, you could really have a hat and have a ton of fun with it.

Determine how you will approach each topic. Will you play audio examples? Will you play voice messages from your listeners? Are you going to read e-mail? Maybe there is a guest contributor. Determine each approach before the show begins.

 

OUTLINE

Once you’ve created the show topics and the strategy for each topic, you need to create an outline for the show that includes each topic.

An outlines serves two primary purposes. First, you can use this outline in your show open. It will give the audience an idea of the content in the show today. Second, the outline will keep you focused during your show. The outline will help you determine where you are going and serve as a reminder of how you plan to approach each topic.

Your outline should be detailed, but not scripted. Include the important facts and notes on your outline. You will want this information at your fingertips during your show. When you begin telling a story and you don’t have the specifics right in front of you, the story gets off course and you lose momentum.

Build the outline with enough content to help you get through the information, but not so much that your show becomes scripted. You simply need to write down enough information to remind you where you are going. It is the map you are following. Road maps don’t show every detail of every building along the route. They simply draw a line to represent a road. You get the idea and end up at your destination. The same is true with your outline.

Do not write a script. Tell stories instead of reading them. If you sound like you are reading your information, you will sound stale and boring. Engage with your audience by telling stories. Make the stories come to life by using great words and inflection in your voice. You won’t get that energy, excitement and engagement when you read a script.

 

THE DETAILS

The final step before recording your show is gathering your details and supporting information. This includes the facts, figures, details and other elements will you need for each topic. Gather all of the information you need before the show begins.

Look over your outline to ensure you have each piece of supporting content. Make sure you have the facts to your stories. Gather the audio elements you plan to include. Round up any e-mails you plan to address. You do not want to waste the time of your audience while you search through your inbox trying to find that one great question you hoped to include during the show today. Be prepared.

If names are important to the story, jot them down. If dates or a timeline is a critical part of the tale, make note of it. I hear shows go astray quite often when the host cannot remember the web address for their story. The often say something like, “Hold on, I’ll find it here.” You then hear them tapping on their computer while searching Google to get the address. If they knew they were going to approach this topic with this particular story, the web address should have been part of the outline. Be prepared.

I recently heard a podcast trying to remember the web address for one of their topics. The host couldn’t come up with it. He paused recording the show, found the address and then started recording again. This is perfectly acceptable. Sometimes you don’t realize you need a piece of information until you are well into the story.

The issue I have with the way he handled the situation is how he addressed it during the show.

He said something like, “There is a website that will help you with this. It is … uh. Oh, what it is. It is something like WebAddress.com or something. Oh, I can’t remember right now. It’s a great web site. Ok, I just paused the recording and found it. It is GoodWebAddress and it gives you everything you need.” The “Ok, I just paused the recording and found it” line came out of nowhere. Listening to the show, I couldn’t tell he stopped recording and started again. The context was completely out of whack. The listener heard no pause. The subject matter simply started again in another place.

Now, he didn’t say those words exactly. I am paraphrasing. I am also keeping his name and podcast out of it, because I don’t want to embarrass him or disparage his show. This is simply to make a point. His show is great. More importantly, I don’t have his permission to name him or his show.

With a few creative edits in post production, you would never have known he didn’t have the information in front of him. It is show business. This is about your credibility. You are trying to build trust with your audience. If you look unprepared, you look amateur. Sure, reveal your flaws during your show. But, don’t look like you are unsure of your content.

In post production, he could have edited the content to say, “There is a website that will help you with all of this. (edit) The website is GoodWebAddress. It gives you everything you need.” No need to look unprepared. Take two minutes to make it sound professional.

Get all information in front of you that you will need to record your show. Force yourself to stick to your outline of your content. When you start following tangents that are not on the outline, you get into territory for which you haven’t prepared and have no supporting information. You then fight to get back on track.

Build your reputation, trust and credibility by being a prepared, professional podcaster every time. Even if you are only doing it as a hobby, you need people to trust you in order to bring them back episode after episode. Your supporting information right in front of you before the show begins will help you sound knowledgeable and prepared.

 

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How To Increase Your Podcast Downloads – Episode 209

4 Comments

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

How To Increase Your Podcast Downloads – Episode 209

Get more podcast downloads
Increase Your Podcast Downloads

Most of us want to grow our audience, increase podcast downloads and become more influential in our niche. I recently conducted a survey asking about your biggest challenges with regard to your podcast. The most frequent response revolved around ways to increase podcast downloads.

If you were to list your top three struggles with your show, would one hurdle you list be getting more listeners and engagement?

A few weeks ago, I created a download challenge for a small group of people. For the few that took action, the results were impressive.

When podcasters reach out to me for their free strategy session, I ask them how I might help with their podcast. Promoting the show, gaining listeners and increasing podcast downloads is most always part of the answer.

You are not alone. We all want a bigger audience. Whether you have 100 listeners or 10,000 listeners, I’m sure you would like a few more.

Before we jump into the ideas and a couple case studies, I’d like to invite you to take me up on my offer to you of a free podcast strategy session. It is my goal to directly help 1,000 podcasters reach their goals in 2019.

You and I will get on the phone and discuss your podcast, your challenges and your goals. Let’s create a clear plan of action to help you get where you want to go in 2019 with your podcast and business. It’s free. What do you have to lose?

Find the details at PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.

This isn’t a big sales pitch in disguise. I’ll help you create a plan. At the end of the call, if you want information on how I might help you with that plan, we can discuss it then. If not, no problem.

Will you be one of my 1,000 over the next year? Go watch the video at PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching. I’d love to talk with you.

 

THE TRUTH

Let’s start with a few truths.

First, you are not alone. Growing your audience to increase podcast downloads is usually somewhere in our goals regardless of the length of time we have been podcasting. We are all in this together.

Next, it will not happen overnight. Your podcast growth will take time. If you take consistent action over time, the number grows. Keep your head down and do the work required.

You also need to realize that the average podcast episode gets about 214 downloads per episode. That is the median number according to Rob Walch over at Libsyn. Only 20% of all podcast get over 2,000 downloads after they have been out for a month. Therefore, don’t sweat your numbers. Most people are lying to you.

Finally, it is simple, but not easy. As you will see, the concepts are simple to understand. Being disciplined enough to do the work is not as easy as it sounds. We’ll help.

 

CONSISTENCY

In the episode where I introduced the download challenge, we talked about creating habits. It takes consistent action to build an audience.

In 1960, Dr. Maxwell Maltz said it takes patients “a minimum of about 21 days for an old image to dissolve and a new one to jell.” Dr. Maltz published that theory and his thoughts on behavior change in a book called Psycho-Cybernetics.

As with many quotes, over the years it was taken out of context. The stat was eventually quoted as, “It takes 21 days to form a new habit,” leaving out the important “minimum”.

A new studyby colleagues at University College London and published in the European Journal of Social Psychology says it takes an average of 66 days to form a new habit.

That is why consistency and accountability are important. If you want people to remember your brand, it takes frequency to the target.

 

6 STEPS

In our download challenge, our goal was to hold each other accountable and take daily action. Let’s run down the six steps we used to increase podcast downloads.

 

1. ENGAGE

As we went through the month, we wanted to reach out and engage in our niche on a daily basis. We saw results. Spend 15 minutes a day being active and present online. Leave feedback for other shows. Everybody loves attention.

The best way to grow your network is by making contact with others. Start by commenting on podcasts, blogs and discussions of influencers.

Don’t simply be a lurker, reading all the other posts. Get involved. Take action. A small “congratulations” or other acknowledgement is just fine.

You want to be seen as someone who gets things done. By taking action and engaging with others, you send the message that you are active.

 

2. NETWORK

Next, network with other shows in the same genre. Help each other. Other influencers in your niche probably have similar goals.

Find people in your niche who compliment what you do. Team up to help each other grow. Look for ways to share each other’s content.

 

3. HELP OTHERS

Help other people. This help is intended for your listeners. Be seen as someone with the answers, or at least someone who knows where to get the answers.

Do Facebook Live “ask me anything” sessions. Prove that you are willing to help them achieve their goals. Give them direction.

If you become the go-to resource who knows where to find the answers, you become the authority in your space.

 

4. BE SOCIAL

Use social media to spread your message. Be active on Facebook & Twitter. Don’t simply lurk around. Post positive comments and be helpful.

Consistently interact with others on social media. Avoid always asking and taking. Offer to help. Don’t simply look around. Get involved. Be active.

 

5. FIND GROUPS

Get involved in online groups. Find people who are interested in your niche and start getting involved.

Groups are a great place to find like-minded people. If you want to create brand awareness, these groups are a great place to start.

Again, be active. It does you very little good to be a member of a group if you are not going to actually participate. Members won’t know you are there unless you speak up.

 

6. BE CONSISTENT

You need to be consistent if you want to build brand awareness. This involves interacting online on a daily basis.

 

CASE STUDIES

So, how did it all work? I would like to highlight three members of the download challenge. These will help you see the power of consistent engagement.

Andy was part of our group. He is host of the Veteran Gamer Reenlisted podcast.

This podcast isn’t for the meek. I’ll tell you that right now. That’s what I love about it. Andy and Ray are two military veterans who talk about Warhammer 40K and other table top games. They talk a lot of trash and have a lot of fun.

Andy and Ray are about 64 episodes in. They know exactly who listens to their show. Looking at their website, you will know as well.

When Andy started in the group, he was hoping to grow his audience by 10%.

At the end of the month, Andy was up 46% by taking consistent action.

Andy says, “It works if you work it.” He told me, “Between myself and my co-host, we engage with our community everyday. We like to invite our listeners to feel like they are part of the group and we encourage engagement and they respond. We reward the engagement by sharing much of it on the show. We also belong to many other groups in the related community and are seen as influencers in some of those groups. Its just a part of our everyday business.”

His growth was four times what he had hoped. It all came down to being present and active every day.

Tim does a show with his wife called “The He Said, She Said Movie Reviews Podcast“. As you can tell from the title, they review movies.

April and Tim have only been doing the show for a few months. They have just over 30 episodes published. They have seen over 3,500 movies together and love talking about films.

Since the podcast is new, Tim wanted to see a big increase with the download challenge. He wanted to see his podcast downloads grow by 30%, which equated to about 125 downloads for the month.

The pair took daily action. They got involved and saw their downloads increase by not 30% but 61%. Their podcast received an increase of 226 downloads. Nearly twice the 125 goal.

Tim says, “We had great results. It really works.”

When I asked him about taking action, Tim said, “I’ve taken action every day. I joined two Movie groups on Facebook and have been commenting on them both. Also, in Instagram someone created a Group Message of about 40 movie people and we have been talking movies daily. Still have not hooked up with other movie podcast yet. Just have not had the time (bad excuse) but it’s on the list to do.”

The key is daily action. Tim only did half of what he had planned and nearly doubled his downloads. Be present and active.

One of our other members reported that his podcast downloads actually decreased over the course of the month. He said the results were not as good as he had hoped.

We dug in a little bit. I asked him if he was active daily. He said, “Not often enough. I haven’t built that habit muscle very well yet. And I’ve been pretty scattered.”

That is the tough part. Easy to understand. Difficult to execute. Consistent action is tough when you are doing it alone.

Consistent action is like going to the gym. You go for a few days and stop. You start again for a little longer and stop again. Eventually, as long as you keep going back, it becomes a habit. You have to keep at it.

When you are going to the gym, it is easier to do it on a regular basis if you are going with an accountability partner. You make sure each other is going regularly. You can’t let your partner down.

It is the same with your consistent action with your podcast. If you have someone there holding you accountable, it makes it much easier.

That is part of Podcast Talent Coach coaching. We talk every week. I hold you accountable to the plan. We make sure you are consistent with your actions.

It is tough to do it alone. I get that. You are not alone. You have many other things going on in life and business. Take focused action on a regular basis to reach your goals.

Check out the video at podcasttalentcoach.com/coachingand see what it can do for you. The strategy session is absolutely free. Be one of the 1,000 podcasters I help over the next year. Let’s lay out your plan.

The video is at podcasttalentcoach.com/coaching. It explains the whole process to you.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Your Podcast Just Destroyed Your Credibility – Episode 208

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Your Podcast Just Destroyed Your Credibility – Episode 208

Credibility
Use your podcast to build credibility, authority & trust

Your podcast is an amazing tool to build your authority in your space. The content and teaching your provide on your show lets your listener get to know, like and trust you. Be careful. Don’t let your podcast destroy your credibility. Use it to build authority with careful selection of content and editing.

It happened in all of about thirty seconds. The reading of one e-mail and her credibility was shot.

I was listening to one of my favorite podcasts. The host will occasionally answer e-mail questions from listeners. This particular show was no different.

Until this fateful e-mail came along.

I’m changing the names here to protect all involved.

She says, “This next e-mail is from Ivan in Waterloo, Iowa”. It wasn’t really Waterloo, but some similar small town. The e-mail author also had a unique name.

She continued on with the e-mail. It appeared Ivan works in his family business. His parents expect him to eventually take over the shop. However, Ivan has no interest in continuing on with this line of work. He as other aspirations. He was asking for advice with regard to telling his parents.

At the end of the e-mail, he says, “Please keep this anonymous.”

Ivan is obviously concerned that his parents would find out before he had the chance to discuss it with them.

The host says, “Well, I didn’t do a very good job of that, did I?”

WHAT?!?!?!

The host said something to the effect of, “Let’s just hope mom and dad won’t hear this podcast.”

How could any host just let that slide?

On the surface, she just let Ivan down. But it goes so much deeper than that. The comment completely destroyed her credibility. There are six major issues with letting that disclosure remain part of the show.

 

6 BIG PROBLEMS

 

1. Ivan No Longer Trusts The Host

Ivan just revealed a deep, personal issue to the host. It is a conflict he has between his loyalty to his parents and his own dreams. The problem has obviously created some turmoil in Ivan’s life. Why else would he be e-mailing for help?

The seriousness of the situation is obvious when he asks for anonymity. He surely doesn’t want his parents to be aware of his dilemma until he can explain it on his own terms. If he didn’t have that concern, he wouldn’t have asked to keep his name secret.

By revealing Ivan’s name, the host just shattered any trust she had built with him. Her credibility is shot. Ivan feels betrayed. He can no longer trust that the host will have his best interest at heart. Everything the host has worked to build was just shattered with Ivan.

 

2. How Many Customers Will The Host Actually Lose?

It is difficult to determine how far-reaching the host’s act will be. When it comes to word-of-mouth, there are as many theories as there are marketers. All agree that an upset customer will tell far more about their experience than a pleased fan.

Pete Blackshaw’s book “Satisfied Customers Tell Three Friends, Angry Customers Tell 3,000: Running a Business In Today’s Consumer-Driven World” describes the danger of upsetting clients. The power of social media has allowed upset people to spread the word much, much faster. In today’s connected world, word spreads faster than ever.

It is obvious to see how the host may lose Ivan as a client. Under the surface, the damage to her credibility could be much worse. By the time the damage to the overall business is known, it will be far too late.

 

3. Ivan’s Parents Are Not The Host’s Only Concern

There is probably a slim chance that Ivan’s parents will hear the podcast. Podcasts are still a niche medium. Unless Ivan turned his parents onto the podcast, mom and dad probably did not stumble across this one particular episode among the hundreds of thousands of podcasts available.

This show doesn’t need to be heard first person by Ivan’s parents to be damaging.

Maybe somebody else in Waterloo, who knows Ivan’s parents, heard the podcast. It is possible somebody in the same industry familiar with mom and dad heard the show. Word can travel to the business owners in many ways.

The show lives forever on the internet. It isn’t hard to imagine the show eventually finding its way into the hands of Ivan’s parents. Simply assuming they won’t hear the show is ignoring reality.

 

4. Others Will Have Second Thoughts

Those who heard the show will think twice before they e-mail the host regarding a sensitive subject. If the host was flippant with respect to Ivan’s identity, why would any listener think he or she would be treated differently? Most listeners of the show will find it hard to trust the host with their information.

 

5. Where Can I Trust You

If I can’t trust you with an e-mail, how can I trust you with my business? On the surface, the anonymity of the e-mail seemed inconsequential. Considering how the action affects the other areas of the business, it is easy to see how this becomes a much bigger issue.

People do business with people they can trust. If it appears you do not have your client’s best interest at heart, it is quite likely they will be looking for a new supplier. Trust is everything.

As is often said, it takes a lifetime to build a reputation and minutes to ruin it. An action like this offers quite a blow to the host’s reputation. Rebuilding it will take a long time. The damage to the business could be serious.

 

6. Edit

This entire issue could have been avoided if the host had simply edited the audio. That is the saddest part of this entire mess. Had she taken the time to edit the intro of the e-mail, the trust would have never been tarnished.

The show wasn’t live. There was no live studio audience. There was no reason the audio couldn’t be changed after the fact.

I realize the podcast is not the primary function of the host’s business. The show is just a part of the overall marketing plan. The host does the podcast once a week as a way to continue to spread the message. That does not excuse the issue.

If the host cannot be trusted with a minor issue like podcast content, she cannot expected to be trusted with larger pieces of business.

As you move forward with your podcast, remember that your show will exist for quite some time. Be careful with the content you choose to include. In most every case, you do not get hurt by what you leave out. Be completely confident with your content before you post your show.

Be sure you do not damage your reputation by one lapse in judgement. Your entire show and corresponding business is built on that trust. Protect your trust with everything you have.

 

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

 

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How To Define Your Ideal Target Listener For Your Podcast – Episode 207

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

How To Define Your Ideal Target Listener For Your Podcast – Episode 207

Creating an avatar
How To Create Your Ideal Target Listener

So many people talk about creating your avatar or ideal target listener. They talk about why to do it. Rarely do they explain how to do it. That is what I want to talk about today.

When I ask people to tell me about their target listener, they usually tell me they are targeting business owners, salespeople, dog lovers or some other generic group. They say things like, “My show is for everyone who likes hockey.”

ONE PERSON

Your podcast is for people, not groups. You are talking to a single person, not an industry. If you want to make your show exciting, relevant and meaningful for your audience, talk to one individual. You will be surprised how your connection with your audience improves.

I have a tool that will walk you through the process of defining your avatar. Download the Podcast Talent Coach Listener Development Worksheet.

There is a reason we create one, well-defined, target individual. We want to be specific in your stories. Specifics are more believable than generalities. Stories make connections. Connections make relationships.

STORIES

All the great philosophers teach through stories. They have for generations.

Zig Ziglar was a master at using specifics. When he would bring a red pump out on stage and talk about not giving up too early, you would just anticipate water streaming from the pump. You knew the pump wasn’t connected to anything. It was a prop. Yet, you were fixated on that pump waiting for the water.

After you define your ideal client, you will be able to shape and mold your content to be specific for that listener.

When I coach clients, we typically start with the Listener Development Worksheet. We can then use that ideal listener as a filter for our content.

As you create your content each week for your show, you can ask, “What would this one listener like to know about this particular subject?”

Think of the person who is most likely to buy from you. Think of the one person who exemplifies your best customer who buys everything you sell. We want to create our content specifically for that person. When your listener feels like you are speaking directly to them, the listener is more likely to act upon on your call-to-action.

Many times people complete the Listener Development Worksheet only to find their avatar looks exactly like a current client. When that happens for you, get a photo of that person. Hang it where you record your podcast. Then, talk to her every time your record. What does she need to know to take the next logical step in her process? How can you help her?

GET SPECIFIC

Dig deep into the profile of your ideal listener. Age, gender, income, profession and location are only the surface. Dig deeper.

Determine what content your ideal listener already consumes. This will help you understand his interests. Figure out what websites she visits, where he spends his free time, with whom she associates and how she spends her discretionary income.

Many people fear they will leave people out if they are not broad in the scope of their content. When you define these things and shape your content through this filter, you make a much deeper connection with your ideal listener.

THE BIG FOUR

If you want more confidence in your content, the final four questions on the worksheet are the most important. These questions help you get into the head of your ideal target listener to determine what they really, really desire.

What is his greatest want? What does he want more than anything?

Making more money is NOT his want. What the money allows him to do is the want. Maybe it is spending more time with his kids. Maybe is it more time to knit. Maybe it is the resources to travel.

What is her greatest need? Need is much different than want. She may want to be admired by her children. She needs the tools to help her do that.

What is your ideal target listener’s greatest fear? People want help to overcome their fears.

What problem does he need solved? People buy aspirin more than vitamins. People will pay money to have their problems solved. Some studies show that people will pay up to six times more to have their problem solved than they would to gain a benefit. This is where your business can thrive.

The only way to determine this is to talk to your audience. Ask them.

WANT HELP?

Download the worksheet. If you would like help, check out my FREE podcast strategy session. Watch the video. It explains everything for you.

The FREE podcast strategy sessionis no sales pitch in disguise. We just talk about your show, create a strategy and see how we work together. I will give you info about my coaching only if you really want it.

Either way, the FREE podcast strategy sessionis designed to help you create a strategy for your podcast and get you headed in the right direction.

 

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Podcast

Grow Your Podcast Audience Challenge – Episode 203

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Grow Your Podcast Audience Challenge – Episode 203

increase downloads
Join the Download Challenge

Most of us want to grow our audience, increase downloads and become more influential in our niche. It is usually one of the goals I hear from podcasters. If you were to list your top three struggles with your show, would one hurdle you list be increase downloads?

YOUR HURDLES

When podcasters reach out to me for their free strategy session, they answer a few questions before we get on the call. One of those questions is, “In what ways do you need help with your podcast.”

I reviewed the last five requests I received. Four listed some form of “increase downloads” as a struggle. “Marketing and promoting the show” was on one form. One said, “Increase our audience – not sure what’s holding us back”. I heard, “Getting more listeners and paid supporters”. The fourth listed “gaining subscribers”.

Growing your audience to increase downloads is usually somewhere in our goals regardless of the length of time we have been podcasting. You’re not alone.

THE CHALLENGE

I want to help you grow your audience, but only if you are serious and ready to take action. I am launching a 30-day challenge which might turn into 60 days. As the studies show, it takes a minimum of 21 days and average of 66 days to form a new habit. We’ll see how it plays out. Get details at http://www.podcasttalentcoach.com/downloadchallenge.

It takes consistent action to build an audience. This challenge will help you take consistent action by holding you accountable in a group with the same goals.

NEW HABITS

In 1960, Dr. Maxwell Maltz said it takes patients “a minimum of about 21 days for an old image to dissolve and a new one to jell.” Dr. Maltz published that theory and his thoughts on behavior change in a book called Psycho-Cybernetics.

As with many quotes, over the years it was taken out of context. The stat was eventually quoted as, “It takes 21 days to form a new habit,” leaving out the important “minimum”.

A new study by colleagues at University College London and published in the European Journal of Social Psychologysays it takes an average of 66 days to form a new habit.

That is why consistency and accountability are important. If you want people to remember your brand, it takes frequency to the target.

BRANDING

In radio, we talk about top-of-mind awareness. Brand advertising is designed to help make brands memorable.

When Coca-Cola runs their brand advertising campaigns, they don’t expect you to drop everything you are doing and run to the store to buy Coke. When McDonald’s creates their branding commercials, they don’t think you will suddenly turn around and pull into a drive-thru. These brands are creating top-of-mind awareness.

These companies want to be the first brand you think of when you are hungry or thirsty. When you pull into a quickie mart for a drink, they want you to think Coke. When you ask your kids where they want to grab a bit to eat, they say McNuggets from McDonald’s. It is all about top-of-mind awareness.

How many brands of toothpaste can you name? Quick, off the top of your head. How many come to mind?

You can probably name the toothpaste brand you use and the one you use when your favorite isn’t available. Maybe one more. Unless you work in a grocery store, you can probably list 2 or 3.

A quick search of the internet shows there are actually 35 brands of toothpaste.

That list simply includes brands. There are multiple varieties within each brand. When I checked the Crest toothpaste website, I saw 60 different varieties available.

The only way for a brand to win is to create top-of-mind awareness. When people think of your niche, do they think of you? Are you in the top two?

YOUR BRAND

Your top-of-mind awareness doesn’t happen overnight. It takes consistent work. The same work it takes to increase downloads and grow your audience.

There are many ways to drive engagement. We have discussed many ways here on the podcast.

In our Download Challenge, we will use many of these to grow your audience. Today on the show, I want to review a few of my favorites.

 

ENGAGE

Leave feedback for other shows. Everybody loves attention.

The best way to grow your network is by making contact with others. Start by commenting on podcasts, blogs and discussions of influencers.

Don’t simply be a lurker, reading all the other posts. Get involved. Take action.

You want to be seen as someone who gets things done. By taking action and engaging with others, you send the message that you are active.

 

NETWORK

Network with other shows in the same genre. Help each other.

Find people in your niche who compliment what you do. Team up to help each other grow. Look for ways to share each other’s content.

If you know where your audience congregates, that would be a good place to look for them. There is a good chance others in your niche are talking to the people you would like to reach. Start making friends.

Start by commenting on their podcast. Send the host questions for their show. Become a familiar name.

Depending on the level of engagement the host receives from her audience, you will become a familiar name after some regular engagement.

Once you are on the radar, reach out with an introduction e-mail or message. Ask how you might help. Give first. See where it goes from there.

 

HELP OTHERS

Help other people. This help is intended for your listeners.

Do Facebook Live “ask me anything” sessions. Prove that you are willing to help them achieve their goals. Give them direction.

If you become the go-to resource who knows where to find the answers, you become the de facto guru in your space.

 

BE SOCIAL

Use social media to spread your message. Be active on Facebook & Twitter.

Consistently interact with others on social media. Avoid always asking. Offer to help. Don’t simply look around. Get involved. Be active.

Have you ever had that person in your life who would only call when they needed something? You know who I mean. They need money or they want an introduction or they need a ride. You don’t want to be that person online.

Social media is a great place to create relationships. If your activity is all one-sided, it will be very difficult to build friendships.

 

FIND GROUPS

Get involved in online groups. Find people who are interested in your niche and start getting involved.

Groups are a great place to find like-minded people. If you want to create brand awareness, these groups are a great place to start.

It does you very little good to be a member of a group if you are not going to actually participate. Members won’t know you are there unless you speak up.

 

BE CONSISTENT

You need to be consistent if you want to build brand awareness. This involves interacting online on a daily basis.

The Download Challengeis designed to get us together to share ideas and help each other. We will share our download numbers. We will share our goals. We will hold each other accountable.

Every day we will post our progress and our activity. After 30 days, we will see what has worked. We will know where to continue our efforts.

 

Get involved at PodcastTalentCoach.com/DownloadChallenge.

 

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

The Most Important Step To Building Your Audience – Episode 201

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

The Most Important Step To Building Your Audience – Episode 201

Do The Work To Grow Your Audience
Copyright: photopiano / 123RF Stock Photo

 

In working with a new client the other day, he wanted to build his audience. He had a few dozen listeners and wanted to know how to build it to a few thousand. I explained the best way to grow was to put in the work.

There are three activities you can do regularly that will get you in front of potential listeners and grow your audience. You can build your e-mail list, participate in Facebook groups and appear as a guest on other podcasts. Whichever you choose, you need to put in the work.

[GET REVIEWED ON THE PODCAST REVIEW SHOW]

[GET REVIEWED BY ERIK K. JOHNSON]

OVERNIGHT SUCCESS

I know many podcasters don’t want to hear it. Why can’t I be huge today with a big audience? Look at all these other kids who launched and became the overnight success.

Overnight success is usually a farce. Most overnight successes put in years of work before they became the overnight success.

Pat Flynnlaunched Smart Passive Income in 2010.

Gary Vaynerchukstarted Wine Library TV on YouTube in 2006.

Chris Guillebeaustarted the Art of Non-Conformity in the early 2000s and published his first book in 2010.

Shane & Jocelyn Samsare just hitting their stride. Their Flipped Lifestyle podcast began in 2014.

Dave Ramseyhas been doing his show for 25 years.

Dave Jacksonhas been podcasting since 2005.

DO THE WORK

If a podcast has 100 episodes, they have been doing it for about 2 years if they are producing the show once a week.

To reach your goals and grow your audience, put your head down and do the work. If you work to get better every episode, and you are active in the communities within your niche, you will grow. It just takes time.

My son is an ice hockey goalie. He started playing hockey when he was 6. He began playing goalie when he was 8.

Because he started a year later than the other kids, he was always the odd man out. His small size has also been a hurdle to overcome. Through the years, he never got a shot at the top travel team. He just wasn’t part of that tight knit group that typically forms in youth sports.

Year after year, he attended goalie camps and clinics working with various goalie coaches. He put in the work and kept learning and continued doing. I told him he just needed to continue to work toward his goals.

He is now 14. It has been 6 years of hard work.

This is the first year he really broke through. This year, he will be the goalie for the JV team as a freshman.

If you want it and work for it, success will come. Put in the work.

SCHEDULE IT

To build your audience, create a schedule for yourself and your activity. Set aside time each day to participate in online groups. Set a goal and work toward it consistently.

Work to build your e-mail list, so you can communicate with your tribe often.

Finally, find ways to appear on other shows. Work to get your name out there.

If you work consistently, your audience will grow over time.

Would you like my help with it? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How Much Prep Is Too Much? Podcast Struggles – Episode 196

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

How Much Prep Is Too Much? Podcast Struggles – Episode 196

Podcast Struggles with Prep
Copyright: ximagination / 123RF Stock Photo

I recently asked my tribe about the one thing they are struggling with most. This week, we are going to answer the questions and help you get over a few hurdles, including tips to deal with show prep, relaunching your podcast, growing your audience and more.

RELAUNCH

What giving me the most headache is relaunching my podcast after a long time not producing because life took a turn. My gear has been in storage after some life changing events and I’m starting from scratch.

Have a great day!

– Dan

The Coffee Couch

 

EKJ:

What part of starting is giving you a headache, Dan? If we got together in a coaching session, this is where we would start. If we can determine where the aggravation lies, we could work our way around that piece.

Podcasting is a lot of work. You need to create your subject and notes. You need to record the show. Edit the show and create the show notes. Post the episode to your media host. Create the post on your website. Then, you need to attract the audience.

Each step comes with its own unique headaches. You are also starting at ground zero, which looks like a true uphill battle.

Let’s assume you enjoy the process of creating a podcast, but dread the fact that you have no audience. Starting from scratch and building it up again feels like a lot of work.

The first thing we need to do is accept the fact that it doesn’t just seem like it is a lot of work. It is a lot of work.

It isn’t the destination, it is the journey. You don’t want to be the dog that catches the car. Enjoy the run.

Remember when you launched the first time around? Remember the excitement when you got your first few downloads? Do you remember how it felt with you hit the 100 download mark? How about when you received your first e-mail from a listener or comment on an episode?

Here is your chance to experience that excitement all over again. But this time, you have experience from the first time around. You won’t experience the frustration trying to figure things out for the first time.

More joy. Less frustration. Get started and enjoy the journey.

 

IMPOSTER SYNDROME

I think my biggest concern is Imposter Syndrome and then closing the deal on scheduling an interview. I took so much time in planning and pod-crastination that potential guests (50) may have forgotten that they agreed to a chat. I took too much time to learn the technology. You and I chatted on your show about my beginning process MORE THAN A YEAR AGO!

MY QUESTION: How much Show Prep is TOO MUCH PREP?

Being totally nervous about asking for interviews, I wanted to answer EVERY POSSIBLE question and objection, upfront. I prepared a SUPER-detailed show prep sheet to send to potential guests.

– David Freeman

 

EKJ:

50 guests!?! David, let’s get rolling. Start recording.

I completely understand the Impostor Syndrome. The unknown of getting started is the scariest part.

“What if I mess up the interview?” “What if I come off as an amateur?” “What if people find out I don’t know what I’m doing?”

You know more than you realize.

Your interview is simply going to be a conversation. Walk into the interview being curious and you’ll be just fine.

When he interviewed authors, Larry King said that he would not read their book in advance, so that he would not know more about the book than his audience. He was simply curious and asked great questions.

It is just like a cocktail party. Know enough about the person to start a conversation and go from there.

What is the goal of the interview? You want the person on your show for some reason. How will your audience benefit from this conversation?

Once you know that, you will understand which questions are important. You will use your target listener as a filter for your questions and let it roll.

Get over your fear of starting by taking the first step. Make it a small, easy step. Get a mic and a computer. Install Skype.

Once you have that done, schedule and record an interview. Make this someone lower on the list. This will be a test run to make sure all goes well. Knowing this will take the pressure off of you to make it a home run. We are just looking for a little success.

When show prep is becoming an excuse for not launching, it is too much prep.

When you are asking for an interview, what is the worst that could happen. They might say, “Sorry, David. I don’t have time right now.” If that happens, move on to the next.

A decline is never a judgement on you or your character. The interview just doesn’t make sense for them right now.

If you position your request from your guest’s point of view and explain how it benefits them, that is about all you can do. They either say yes or no. Don’t be embarrassed about asking.

Some will be flattered that you asked. If you have done your homework and know what is important to your potential guest, very few will be offended if you ask. If they are offended, that individual is probably not somebody you want on your show anyway. Move on.

With regard to the show prep sheet you send your guest, make it easy. Nobody wants to volunteer to be on your show and then spend 2 hours filling out forms and doing homework before the interview begins. Cover the important subjects, like time, room noise, profanity and expectations. Then, get rolling.

You cannot possibly predict every scenario that might happen during the interview. So, stop trying. You won’t know how warm the water is until you jump in. Give it a try.

 

RELATIONSHIP SUCCESS

You had a longer segment on sharing content or teaming up with other podcasts on a previous episode. I focused a lot of effort on that, and like you advised, I didn’t fear losing my listeners to these other friendly shows.

The plan didn’t work at first, but then we found the right partner. They engage on our Facebook and share our content and we do the same for them. Not only did our average downloads jump 25% overnight, but we made some great friends at the same time.

We are currently planning a joint episode and we are both hoping it will be a success. This is a great strategy to gather new listeners. And if you are fun, engaging and creative, these new listeners will stick around.

– Andy Gonzales

 

EKJ:

I love when a plan comes together.

In Episode 176, we talked about various ways to grow your audience by 10x. One of the suggestions is connection.

You need to reach out to others in your space. You need to increase your circle of influence. You need to take some chances and make some noise.

So many podcasters see the pie as limited. If you get more pie, I must get less. They act like there is only so much pie to go around.

Podcasting is more like fire or ideas. If I have fire and I give you some of that fire, you gain and I lose nothing. If I have knowledge and I share that with you, it is the same situation. You gain and I lose nothing.

Just because someone listens to your podcast, that doesn’t mean they cannot enjoy another. There are 168 hours in the week. You are probably awake for 112 of those hours. If you release on 60-minute podcast a week, there are 111 more hours to enjoy other shows.

Find great partners and help each other. As Andy says, you need to find the right partner.

If partnering with someone in your direct niche still makes you a bit uncomfortable, find someone who might make a great compliment to your content. Look for a podcaster who offers something that goes hand-in-hand with your stuff.

Dave Jackson and I are a good example. We are both podcast coaches and consultants. However, Dave’s expertise is teaching the technical side of podcasting. My expertise is content and personality. We overlap here and there. But, we also compliment the strengths of each other as well.

If you do a podcast on coaching baseball, find a podcaster who has a show on playing baseball. If you do a business-to-business podcast, find someone who is business-to-consumer. If you are small business marketing, find someone who is small business accounting. There are a million possibilities. Help each other.

Here are some tips to grow your audience.

 

TEN TIPS TO GROW

  1. Reach out to super-fans and begin the interaction.
  2. Help people meet and create community.
  3. Host events to create community.
  4. Get interviewed on other shows. Make it easy for hosts to find you.
  5. Give. Leave feedback for other shows. Ask great questions on other shows.
  6. Promotion is the exploitation of great opportunities. Find great opportunities.
  7. Buy a contest insurance policy.
  8. Collect birthdates in your database and call listeners on their birthday.
  9. Create a lead magnet for every episode.
  10. Find people who can help you and invest in yourself. Mastermind, coach, peers.

 

You can get my entire list of 52 ways to create engagement with your show here:

 

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Leverage Your Audience To Grow Your Podcast Downloads – Episode 188

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Leverage Your Audience To Grow Your Podcast Downloads – Episode 188

Copyright: jirsak / 123RF Stock Photo

The most common challenge I hear podcasters facing is growing their audience. We all want to drive our podcast downloads and grow our audience. This week, I have 9 things you can do this week to steadily gain more podcast downloads.

There was a presentation at Podcast Movement 2017 called “How People Really Listen To Podcasts”. This study showed two primary ways people find new podcasts. Most respondents in the study (60%) said they find new podcasts from social media. Friends was the next biggest way (57%) people discover new shows to try. Both of these traffic sources come from word-of-mouth.

What are you doing to get others to talk about your podcast?

If you want to grow your podcast downloads, you need to get in front of other people and then get those people to talk about your show.

 

1. Grow your Facebook following.

As of the fourth quarter of 2017, Facebook had 2.2 billion monthly active users. As of September 2017, Instagram had reached 800 million monthly active users. As of the fourth quarter of 2017, the Twitter averaged at 330 million monthly active users.

Facebook is currently by far the largest social media platform. Find ways to be present on Facebook and grow your following.

 

2. Comment on other social posts to be seen.

This is the Law of Reciprocity. Give to others and they will feel compelled to give in return.

I am in 19 Facebook groups for podcasting and business. I am frequently in those groups looking for ways to help other people.

Find groups you can join where you can offer help and answer questions.

 

3. Ask your friends to share.

You never know who might know somebody.

Dave Jackson and I do the Podcast Review Show. We are joined on the show by a podcaster who receives joint coaching from us.

On the episode we recorded the other night, Lionel from A Modelers Life podcast. It is a show for and about model railroaders.

Dave wondered how big the niche could be. Lionel told him that you would be surprised who could be model railroaders. That’s when I told Dave that I was into model railroading back in the day. My dad got me into it when I was a kid.

You never know who might be interested in your niche.

 

4. Ask your guests to share.

Guests are your most powerful resource. Using the circle of influence of your guest has the potential to grow your audience exponentially.

Make it easy for your guest to share your podcast. Write the Facebook post for the episode on which they appear. Do most of the work for them and allow them to make edits if they wish.

 

5. Be a guest on other shows. Make an invitation easy.

Are you willing to be on other podcasts? Have you told anyone?

Make it easy to find you and invite you to appear. Put a link on your site. This could be on the contact page or a stand-alone invite page.

See my contact page at PodcastTalentCoach.com for an example.

 

6. Write guest columns in publications or on websites.

My relationship with Dave Jackson at School of Podcasting began after he discovered a few articles I wrote for the New Media Expo site back when that event was still happening.

 

7. Ask your audience.

Your audience loves you. Let them help you.

You never know who is listening to your show. A small ask could gain huge growth in your podcast downloads.

One of my favorite shows we would do each year on the radio was during Christmas. We would ask listeners to call in with gifts they were having difficulty finding. Then, we would ask other listeners to call in if they could help.

We just served as the liaison between those that needed and those that had the knowledge. Everybody felt good after that show. Most people want to help.

 

8. Ask others in your niche to recommend your show.

Make it worth their while.

Help each other. Again, this is the law of reciprocity.

What do your counterparts need? How can you help them?

If you are helping others, karma will bring it around to you eventually.

 

9. Host meet-ups and have your listeners bring friends.

If ten people attend the first one, and you have each of them bring a friend next time, you double your group.

Texas country artist Aaron Watson came to town to perform. He is an artist that can attract large crowds in Texas. However, he was quite unknown in our city.

When he was on stage, Aaron said he completely understood that the audience wouldn’t be nearly the size here as it was in Texas. But, he would continue to come as long as the audience continued to bring their friends.

Aaron told the audience if there were 100 people in the crowd that night, and he gave a great show so each person would bring a friend next time, he would eventually have large crowds here as well. He understood the power of leveraging his audience.

 

BASICS

Use these 9 ways to grow your podcast downloads this week. When you distill it down, it is basically three basic concepts.

1. Help people.

2. Make it easy to share your stuff.

3. Make it worth their while – what is in it for them?

 

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How To Draw Your Listeners Past The First 60 Seconds Of Engagement – Episode 185

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

How To Draw Your Listeners Past The First 60 Seconds Of Engagement – Episode 185

Listener Engagement
Copyright: alphaspirit / 123RF Stock Photo

When a listener hits play on your podcast, how can you get them to listen to the end? Or, at least past that critical first few minutes of engagement?

HOW LONG DO THEY STAY?

When a listener hits play on your podcast, how long do they stay?

Studies show about 47% of those that consume podcasts listen to the end of the episode.

Roughly 23% of listeners say they listen until they are bored.

Studies also show the biggest drop off of those who do not listen to the end comes in the first five minutes of the show.

This means a quarter of your listeners to any episode get out before you are five minutes into the show.

Think about how you consume podcasts. Where are you and what are you doing when you listen?

Put yourself in the shoes of your listeners. What are they doing? Have you asked them?

When I listen to my favorite podcasts, I am typically driving. During the summer, I listen to a lot of podcasts while I am mowing the lawn. This allows me a lot of time to try new shows.

New podcasts don’t get a lot of my time. I fall into that five-minute group. If the content and host hasn’t really pulled me in, I am off looking for something else.

How can we keep listeners around for the entire episode? How do we create quick engagement?

When I attended Podcast Movement 2017 in Anaheim, there were a few session that discussed this very subject. Podcast Movement is a fantastic opportunity to not only learn more about our podcast industry, but networking and masterminding with so many other podcasters is priceless.

There were many great sessions at PM17. I actually teamed up with two other podcasters in my Mastermind to divide and conquer. We each took notes in separate sessions and then swapped when it was all over.

One of the sessions was “Why Public Radio Excels At Podcasting”. Public radio has created some amazingly successful podcasts such as “Serial“, “How I Built This“, “TED Radio Hour” and more.

How are they so successful?

START STRONG

First, you need to start strong. Create quick engagement.

The biggest drop off your podcast experiences is in the first 5 minutes. You simply cannot catch up to a bad opening.

Create that intriguing introduction like we talk about when storytelling. You learned it in speech class. Find that hook, and lead with the headline.

You cannot spend the first five minutes of your show with mindless chit-chat. The content must be powerful.

Talking about the weather or the thing you have to sell will not deliver content that will create engagement and make your listener want more.

CREATE FOMO

What makes a great introduction? An intriguing introduction creates some anticipation. Tease your audience with what is coming up on the show.

A powerful tease is more than simply promoting the content coming up. “Today, we are going to discuss the pros and cons of e-mail marketing” does nothing to create anticipation.

Sell the sizzle, not simply the ingredients.

“Today, I’m going to give you the five headlines that received by far my best open rates over the past year” creates some intrigue. Listeners begin to experience the fear of missing out if they don’t listen to get all five.

DELIVER GREAT CONTENT

After you start strong, you then need to continue to be great.

Just because a large group drops off in the first five minutes doesn’t mean you will not lose listeners throughout the show. Therefore, you need to re-engage your listeners every two to five minutes to slow the drop off. Find ways to catch their attention again.

During the entire episode, you need to always be great. You cannot fill for time’s sake. The fact that you always do a 30-minute show doesn’t give you permission to tread water and fill with less-than-stellar content. Be great the entire show. It is continuous engagement.

A great aspect of podcasting is the freedom of time. You have no clock determining how long you need to talk or when you need to wrap up. As radio coach Valerie Gellar says, “There is no such thing as too long, only too boring.”

If you want people to listen to the end of your episode, you need to be more entertaining than anything else they could be doing right now. Your competition for their attention isn’t simply other podcasts. Your competition is all other entertainment they could be consuming right now.

Are you more entertaining than the radio, or audiobook or conversation they could be having? It must be if you want them to stay.

Learn how to create an intriguing introduction. A powerful opening is your only hope to get your listeners past that 5-minute drop off.

Create engagement. Start strong. Stay strong.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How To Get More Listeners For Your Podcast – PTC Episode 181

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

How To Get More Listeners For Your Podcast – PTC Episode 181

More Listeners and Engagement
Copyright: iqoncept / 123RF Stock Photo

How do I get more listeners? How do I grow podcast traffic? How do I create more engagement. How do I get more people to my website?

I hear those question quite often. It is a battle every marketer faces. How do I bring more customers in the door?

I knew the subject was a hot topic, because I see discussions everywhere. How many product launches have you seen that promise to teach you how to get more traffic?

HOW TO FAIL

In 1962, Time Magazine called David Ogilvy “the most sought-after wizard in today’s advertising industry.” David Ogilvy is quoted as saying, “Great marketing only makes a bad product fail faster.” Be careful what you wish for.

If we use the premise that great marketing simply makes a bad product fail faster, we first must make your product great. Then we can bring people to the party.

We are going to take a look at both steps to this process.

GREAT CONTENT

Let’s make your content engaging and memorable before we invite your prospects to the show. If you create a unique experience, your engagement will be much more effective when people come to the party.

When I first started programming radio stations, I failed. We didn’t win, because I didn’t create a unique, memorable experience for our listeners.

We were playing the best music at the time. Our on-air talent was solid and experienced. The station was at all of the concerts and bar events. We were checking all of the boxes that made great marketing.

There was only one problem. The content between the songs wasn’t entertaining. It was simply content.

When you listened to that station, there was no fear of missing out. We weren’t doing anything unique that you couldn’t get somewhere else. It was very pedestrian.

Fast forward 4 years when I was creating another brand new station. This time, we were going head-to-head with a radio station that had been in the market for 20 years. We had our work cut out for us. But this time, we would be unique and end up at number one.

The other station had been around forever and was very arrogant. They didn’t respect their listeners. They played average music. They were too lazy to be on the streets at the right events. Listeners couldn’t get on the air. The station also sounded old.

Our strategy with this station was to create a radio experience that made the listener feel like they had ownership in our station.

As we created the experience between the records, listeners would introduce our new music, so it sounded like friends turning other friends on to new music.

Our contests were centered around listener experiences. This allowed listeners to live vicariously through their friends.

Listeners hosted our countdown shows and gave shoutouts to their friends on the air all the time. The station truly felt like the listeners had input and control.

And it worked. After launching the station, we were number one in the market in 12 months. We did it by becoming unique.

Let’s discuss how you can become unique. Then, let’s discuss a few organic ways to get more listeners.

BECOME UNIQUE

Start by creating your own style. Be you.

Don’t try to be somebody else. You are best at being you. Nobody can copy you or do it better than you can.

Create your own show structure. There are enough knockoffs. Just because every other podcast does the “lightning round” doesn’t mean you need to do a round as well.

Highlight your sense of humor. Why do your friends hang out with you? Let those characteristics come out on your show.

Tell stories that define your character. Telling stories will allow your listeners to get to know, like and trust you.

Discuss topics that interest you. You become interesting by being interested.

Remove the clichés from your dialogue. Words become clichés, because they are used too much.

Here is the definition of cliché: a trite, stereotyped expression; a sentence or phrase, usually expressing a popular or common thought or idea, that has lost originality, ingenuity, and impact by long overuse.

Clichés are words that have lost their originality. How can you be unique if you have lost your originality?

If you want to sound unique and original, replace your clichés with something fresh.

Avoid these top business clichés:

  • Thinking outside of the box
  • Win-win situation
  • Giving 110%
  • Best Practices
  • Synergy
  • Paradigm Shift
  • Low-hanging fruit
  • Push the envelope
  • Take it to the next level
  • A leading provider of…

When you use the same phrases used by everyone else, you become vanilla and unoriginal.

If you want to be unique, grab a thesaurus and find some new words.

BE MEMORABLE

What can you do on the show this week that hasn’t been done before?

Listen to Dave Jackson on his 400th episode of “School of Podcasting” where he was hi jacked by the Binky & The Wiz morning show. You won’t hear that on any other show.

Some loved it. Some hated it. Everyone that heard it remembered that episode.

Removing every flaw and sterilizing your show will not make it memorable.

Be audacious. Be adventuresome. Be creative. Be boisterous … sometimes. Be tender other times.

Do everything in a way that only you can do it.

Brainstorm until you have something exciting.

SELL THE SIZZLE

People do not buy products. They buy what the product can do for them.

You don’t go to a restaurant to buy a steak. You go the restaurant, because you’re hungry and want one of your favorite dishes. You want that tender piece of meat that you can cut with a butter knife. The one that will just melt in your mouth, because it is the best steak around. It is cooked perfectly.

You are not rushing into the restaurant because the cow was corn-fed and aged to perfection. Who cares. Those are attributes, not benefits.

Does it taste great? Will it fill me up? Does it remind me of the great family dinners we used to have when I was a kid? I’m in. Those are the benefits.

Sell the sizzle, not the steak.

Apple does this really well. When you hear a commercial for Apple, it is about the experience and why they do what they do.

Other computer companies tell you all about the features. Their dual-core processors and RAM. I don’t even know what that means. I just want to be cool like my friends with the iPhone Ten or X or whatever it is.

MARKETING FOLLOWS PRODUCT

Now that we have a great product, how to we get more listeners?

Sure you could buy all of those expensive products or a bunch of Facebook ads. I’m sure they work.

There is an easier way. And, it is free.

Get more listeners by getting involved.

How many podcasts do you listen to that beg you to get involved with the show? Email us. Leave us a voicemail. Post on our Facebook page. Find us on Twitter. Don’t forget that we have a Speakpipe link on the website. Use a carrier pigeon. There are a million ways. Everyone wants engagement.

When you reach out and engage with others, they include you on the show. This does two things.

First, it puts you in front of the audience of that podcast. That could bring a new audience to your show.

Second, through the Law of Reciprocity, the host of the show may be more inclined to engage with your show. A little thank you gesture. What goes around comes around.

Reciprocity in social psychology refers to responding to a positive action with another positive action, rewarding kind actions. When you do something nice for someone, they feel inclined to do something nice for you in return.

Gary Vaynerchuk spends an great deal of time discussing this in his book “Crush It“. It is a great book that I highly recommend.

Gary basically says, “Put your stuff out there. Then, go engage with everyone else.” Be seen. Meet people where THEY live.

Then, be patient.

You won’t get 100,000 listeners immediately. Grow slowly. Adjust and get it right as you progress. Build the foundation.

As Gary says, “Do it again, and again, and again, and again.” Keep engaging. They will come. It only takes your time.

Schedule 30 minutes a day to interact with your audience where they are. You will eventually build the traffic you desire and get more listeners.

 

I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can also find tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How To Grow Your Audience By 10x – Episode 176

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

How To Grow Your Audience By 10x – Episode 176

Get out of your comfort zone
Copyright: orla / 123RF Stock Photo

If you want to grow and develop, you need to push yourself. Self-development requires you to get uncomfortable. Nobody grows in their comfort zone. This is especially true if you want to grow your audience by 10x.

In the online business space, you hear a lot of people talking about 10x. You hear them encourage you to grow your business by ten times its current size. Grow your audience by ten times. The gurus encourage you to not focus on growth from 200 to 300 downloads and instead focus on growing from 200 to 2,000 downloads.

How do you do that?

Well, you won’t 10x your growth by doing the same thing you’ve been doing. It hasn’t got you there yet.

You need to take bold action. You need to push yourself out of your comfort zone and do something big that will get noticed. Get uncomfortable to grow your audience.

I have been on the radio for 30 years. But, I didn’t start at the top.

PUSH #1

If you look back at my start in radio, it happened by accident. When I was in college getting my degree in architecture, I picked up a part-time job at a roller skating rink. My job was to skate around and make sure kids followed the rules. My younger brother was the DJ.

After moving up the roller rink food chain, I eventually became a DJ at the rink. The job requirement to get the gig was simply to be the guy with most tenure. If you were the one who had been there the longest, you got to play the tunes.

Dan was another guy who worked at the rink. He also happened to run a really small AM radio station. The station played paid, long-form programming. He hired my brother to work part-time at the station.

One day, he called the house to see if my brother could cover a shift he had open. My brother wasn’t home. However, that call turned into a part-time offer for me at the station. That weekend, I was at the radio station running the board for the programs. I still wasn’t on the air, but I was running a radio station. My envelope wasn’t being pushed quite yet.

Over the summer, I began thinking of a career change. The next semester of school, I picked up broadcasting for the non-major as an elective. One night in class, the program director of the campus radio station visited.

The program director is the guy who runs the entire content operations of a radio station. Music, imaging, contests, commercials, and talent. The PD is in charge of anything you hear on the air.

When the program director was wrapping up, he told us he was looking for a music director for the station. The music director works for the program director and handles everything related to the music.

This was the first time I pushed the envelope. After class, I went up to him and explained I wasn’t a broadcasting major but was interested in the position. He explained that I didn’t need to be a broadcasting major. He said I just needed to be interested and willing to do the work.

Here I was … an architecture major with limited radio experience being put in charge of the music on the radio station and responsible for communication with the record labels. I had no idea what I was doing. I simply learned on the fly.

Though those years, I met a ton of great people. I was exposed to a lot of great music I had never hear. Most importantly, my on-air ability grew at least by ten times. In fact, it grew enough to land me a full time gig at a local commercial radio station.

PUSH #2

Jump forward 5 years. I was working as an audio producer for an interactive phone company. Radio had been my career until I joined this company 8 months earlier.

The station I left 2 years earlier called me. The station was for sale and the program director was leaving. They asked me to come back to the station to be the new program director until they could find a suitable buyer.

At this point in time, I had never been a program director. In fact, the college station was the only time I had ever been a music director. There was no experience managing a staff on my resume. I wasn’t even in radio at the time.

Now, I had the opportunity to run a radio station.

I could let the little voice in my head tell me all the reasons why I wasn’t qualified to do it. Or, I could jump at the chance to prove I had what it took.

Time to push the envelope a second time.

I took the chance and leaned all I could. This was the first time I started coaching on-air talent. I was building shows and shaping content. It was a great ride. We never reached the top, but we learned a ton and had a blast.

The station eventually sold and I left the station.

PUSH #3

The third chance to push the envelope came 2-and-a-half years later.

This time, I had a chance to launch a station. I was offered the opportunity to be the program director of a station that was flipping format to Top 40. I was given one on-air talent and one promotions director.

My first guy didn’t last very long. My second guy took the challenge and ran with it. We took that station to number one in 12 months. It was huge.

We were on a small signal with a small staff. We just did what others wouldn’t. The staff grew. I helped my team develop shows that were the buzz of the town. It was an amazing ride. That station was number one for a long time.

DO YOU HAVE THE DESIRE?

Every time I made huge leaps in my career it involved pushing the envelope. My growth came from getting out of my comfort zone and stretching myself.

Do you want to grow your audience by leaps and bounds or do you want to slowly creep toward your goal?

Are you ready to increase your downloads ten times what they are now?

Then you need to do a few things that are going to make you a bit uncomfortable.

You need to reach out to others in your space. You need to increase your circle of influence. You need to take some chances and make some noise.

Here are some tips to grow your audience.

TEN TIPS TO GROW

  1. Reach out to super-fans and begin the interaction.
  2. Help people meet and create community.
  3. Host events to create community.
  4. Get interviewed on other shows. Make it easy for hosts to find you.
  5. Give. Leave feedback for other shows. Ask great questions on other shows.
  6. Promotion is the exploitation of great opportunities. Find great opportunities.
  7. Buy a contest insurance policy.
  8. Collect birthdates in your database and call listeners on their birthday.
  9. Create a lead magnet for every episode.
  10. Find people who can help you and invest in yourself. Mastermind, coach, peers.

 

You can get my entire list of 52 ways to create engagement with your show here:

 

 

Get to work. Move out of your comfort zone. Grow your audience by 10x by pushing yourself.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How To Tell Better Podcast Stories – Episode 169

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

How To Tell Better Podcast Stories – Episode 169

4 Key Elements To Storytelling
Copyright: ivelinradkov / 123RF Stock Photo

Do you want to create better podcast stories? Start with the end in mind. Then, start with the end.

Start with the end? It sounds crazy, I know. Let me explain.

Stories do great things for your podcast and business.

When you tell stories, your audience gets to know details about you and your life. That’s how friendships are born. Your listeners discover you have things in common. They realize you have been through similar struggles. Maybe you’re from the same area or visited a common destination.

After multiple stories, listeners begin to feel like they know you. That is when the magic happens.

Stories help you build trust. And as it is with all business, people do business with those they know, like and trust. People don’t do business with companies. They do business with people. Trust is the essence of relationships and business.

 

CHARACTER

Better podcast stories define your character.

I’m not simply talking about your integrity. By character, I mean all of the attributes that create you, as in character in a play.

The purpose of your show is to attract an audience. Whether you want to monetize that relationship, encourage a call-to-action, or simply create an following for your ideas, creating the audience is where you begin.

The stories you choose to tell reveal how open you are to others. Your openness is a sign of trust. Trust is a big piece of a relationship. Reveal things about yourself through your stories, and you’ll begin to build trust with your listener.

The details you include tell your listener what you value. If the listener feels you value things they too value, you solidify the relationship. People like to hang out with similar people. If your values are opposite of your listener, you may also attract them. It is like a love/hate relationship. They may dislike it, but they continue to listen. This often happens when talking politics.

What you find entertaining will be evident by the stories you tell. Since people like other people who have similar tastes, revealing those things you find entertaining will also build the relationship.

Stories also have the power to demonstrate your vulnerability. Stories can show that you are a real person. Your listener will see you as approachable. They also may begin to see you as a friend. That is when true relationships begin to form.

Next time you watch a late night talk show, notice how the great, memorable interviews contain great stories. Interviews that focus on facts and information rarely cut through. Those guests come off more as a lecturer than as a friend. The guests that tell stories appear more personal, warm and friendly. Their stories reveal things and help you feel like you know them personally. Take note next time you watch.

Foster a relationship with your listener by revealing things about yourself through stories. Stories will define your character.

 

MY STORIES WERE HORRIBLE

In the past, my stories were horrible. I struggled to hold the attention of people while I was telling a story. I couldn’t figure out why they would fade half way through the tale.

One day, in a coaching session with my radio coach, it hit me. The person listening had no idea where I was going.

The stories I was telling sounded like ramblings with no real purpose or destination.

My coach basically told me to open with the punchline. I thought he was crazy. If people knew the punchline, why listen to the story. That made no sense.

He explained that opening with the point of the story was similar to telling your passenger where you are going on your journey. Nobody wants to sit next to you in a car wondering where they are going to end up and when they are going to get there. They want to enjoy the journey.

I began opening my tales with the point of the story. Right up front, I revealed the whole purpose of the story to create better podcast stories. My opening began serving as a bit of a headline.

“I can’t figure out why people can’t signal their turn before they are actually in the turn lane.”

“My dog got sick and had my up 4 times last night.”

“If you want more traffic, you need to be more traffic for others first.”

Opening with an intriguing introduction will also provide a framework for the story. You will know exactly where you are going and what details are necessary to get there. This helps shorten your story while including only the important parts.

In addition to the intriguing introduction, there are three other elements to better podcast stories. After you open with the intriguing introduction, provide wonderful, vivid details while telling the story. Close with a powerful conclusion. Ask yourself, “What’s next?”

 

THEATER OF THE MIND

Create theater of the mind by using vivid details.

The use of active language will stir the imagination of your listener and help you connect to your audience. Put the listener in the moment. Make the listener see the action you are describing.

“I’m walking in the bustling restaurant and shaking off the cold without even watching where I’m walking.” That is active language. In your mind, you can see me walking in.

Sure, your restaurant may be different from my restaurant. That difference is what makes theater of the mind great. You see it the way you think it fits best for you. Your scene doesn’t need to match my scene in order for the story to make sense. It is your theater.

Active language connects each listener to the story in his or her own way. It will create strong audience engagement. Active language during storytelling is a powerful tool you can use while you’re building your podcast.

Create a great podcast brand. To create better podcast stories, create theater of the mind.

 

THE FIRST EXIT

Take the first exit.

When you are discussing a topic, take the first opportunity to get out of the bit or interview question. You will keep your audience engaged. You will maintain the momentum of the show. You will also avoid repeating yourself and becoming boring. Take the first exit.

There are clues in your show that let you know you’ve missed the opportunity to end the bit. When you find yourself saying things like “as I said”, “like I was saying”, or “as we’ve discussed”, you have missed your exit. Those phrases are simply additional ways to say, “let me repeat this again”. Once you have reached that point, you are stating your introduction point again. This should be your conclusion. Move on to the next discussion.

If you miss the exit, you begin retracing your steps. You begin offering information you’ve already provided. You listener then begins thinking of other things, because they have heard this part before. I got it. Let’s move on.

Only you will know when you’ve offered enough information to make your point. Once you hit that point, keep the show moving. Get to the next topic. Keep your audience engaged. Take the first exit.

To create better podcast stories, conclude your story by simply reframing your intriguing introduction.

 

ASK “WHAT’S NEXT?”

Include a call to action.

If you want to make money with your podcast, you must include a call to action. It seems logical. However, many podcasters believe, “If I build it, they will come.” It simply doesn’t happen that way.

Odd as it may sound, your podcast probably isn’t your product. Unless you are charging for your podcast, your show is only the marketing vehicle for some other product. Most podcasts are free. The show itself isn’t generating revenue. You need to create another product you can sell.

In his book “Free: The Future of a Radical Price”, Chris Anderson lists many ways to create revenue using the power of free. Many of these can be used to generate revenue from your podcast.

[EPISODE 167 – HOW TO MAKE MONEY WITH A PODCAST THAT IS FREE]

Some think access to the audience can be sold to advertisers as if it were traditional broadcasting. Unfortunately, audiences are not typically large enough for this model. Listeners also do not expect the traditional twelve minutes of commercials within their favorite podcast hour. Advertising is a very difficult path to revenue.

To generate revenue with your podcast, you need to create something else to sell.

You could make money by making your podcast a small portion of a larger show, which is available to paid members only. The free podcast becomes marketing for the member content.

You could turn your knowledge of some “how to” subject into a book, e-book, study course or other product. Your podcast could be the “why” behind your philosophy. The show would then promote the “how” that your listener will learn when they purchase the product.

There are many other ideas described in Anderson’s book. You could give away the product while charging for the service, such as consulting or coaching. Give away the content while making money referring people to retailers.

Rather than traditional advertising, you could give away the content while charging advertisers to be featured in it, similar to The Home Shopping Network. You could even take a cut of sales. You could podcast generic advice while selling specific, customized advice.

There are fifty ideas in the book. To make money with your podcast, I suggest you give the book (or at least that section) a read.

 

If you build it, they may come. However, that doesn’t necessarily mean you will become instantly wealthy. You need to create something to sell. You need to tell your listener to buy. Then, you need to show them the way. If you desire to make money with your podcast, make sure your podcast includes the call to action.

 

Build trust with your audience by telling better podcast stories. Start at the end. Create great theater of the mind. Use a powerful conclusion. Then, give them something to do when it is over. Implement a strong call-to-action.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

7 Steps To Create More Podcast Listener Engagement – Episode 156

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

7 STEPS TO CREATE MORE LISTENER ENGAGEMENT – EPISODE 156

Copyright: bogdanhoda / 123RF Stock Photo

Are you happy with your level of listener engagement?

When podcasters contact me for coaching, our first call is always a free fact-finding call. We chat about their struggles and how they hope to improve. The whole call is designed to lay out a plan and see if we are a good fit for each other.

I recently wrapped up a series of coaching sessions with two hosts of a podcast. On our last call, they said my greatest strength was understanding their struggle and helping them reach their goal. I really believe that first call to get focused is the key to our coaching success.

The one struggle that I hear most often is the desire to gain more listener engagement. How do we get more listeners? How do I increase my download numbers? How to I create more listener engagement?

The problem may be worded differently, but the struggle is the same.

TOO DIFFICULT?

Are you making the problem more difficult than it needs to be?

I am offering  a few listeners a FREE Engagement Explosion coaching session. It is explained in this episode.

If you have been working got grow your podcast for awhile now, and things are not happening as fast as you would like, then I would like to help you create a MAJOR breakthrough.

For a limited time, I would like to invite you to take advantage of a special “Engagement Explosion” coaching session where we will work together to …

  • Create a crystal clear vision for your “ultimate listener engagement success” and the traffic you’d like to create.
  • Uncover hidden challenges that may be sabotaging the growth of your podcast and keeping you struggling to gain traction.
  • Leave this session renewed, re-energized, and inspired to turn your podcast into an engaging show with increased traffic, a growing community and a healthy e-mail list.

If you would like to take advantage of this very special, very limited, and totally FREE 30-minute “Engagement Explosion” coaching session, click here.

In this episode, we talk about the 7 steps to listener engagement.

The solution is easy to understand, yet difficult to execute properly.

Through all of my research and years of experience in both radio and podcasting, I’ve discovered a few key steps to create interaction. This week, let’s cover 7 steps to create more listener engagement with your podcast.

Some of these steps may sound a little too simplistic. Just remember … don’t make it harder than it needs to be. Step back and ask yourself if you are truly executing on each step to the fullest.

1. Ask Them To Engage

How do you expect your listener to know you want her to be part of your show if you don’t ask?

Be sure to make your request specific. Tell your listener exactly what you want her to do.

Create listener engagement by asking for it.

2. Make It Easy To Engage

You may use social media, your website, an e-mail address, voicemail, or a number of other methods to reach you. Simplify it.

Create one contact page on your website containing the info to avoid the need for a laundry list during your show. Then, always provide that one contact source. By using that one source, you also prevent your listener from getting caught in the decision paradox.

Make the questions specific, so they don’t have to think. Give your listener a question to answer or specific piece of information to provide. If he isn’t forced to be creative and “work” to create content for your show, you will have more success creating listener engagement.

Create listener engagement by making it easy.

3. Be A Storyteller For Success

As you create your podcast, become a great storyteller. Great storytellers create fans. Stories create engagement.

Interest in your story never remains constant. Your information can only become entertainment when interest is rising. If interest is falling, the show is becoming boring and is no longer entertainment. A great story continues to develop the plot and raise the interest.

Have you ever sat through a long, monotonous story that never seems to end? You stare and wonder if the speaker actually has a point to this monologue. You pray for your cell phone to ring and save you. That scenario is exactly what you want to avoid.

Practice becoming a great storyteller.

Stories help define your character and personality. You should always be yourself. It is difficult to play a character consistently and tell great stories. Your true feelings and identity will always be revealed in the stories you tell.

If you are successful hiding your true self, you simply are not telling great stories. Vivid details and interesting points that stir emotions in your listeners can only come from your true feelings. Reveal your true character. Storytellers create raving fans.

Create listener engagement by telling great stories.

4. Focus On Helping Others

Zig Ziglar had many great quotes. One of my favorites is, “You can have anything you want in life just as long as you help enough other people get what they want in life.” How true that is.

As you turn your information into engaging entertainment with your podcast, keep in mind that helping people is part of the foundation of a strong relationship. If you take, take, take, your relationship won’t last long. If you are there to give and help, you will develop friends for life.

Ziglar is a great example of helping people. His speeches always offered great tips to improve your life, sales or attitude. He also had great books, CDs and other products he sold. However, most of his time was spent on helping others. There is a lot of free Ziglar information available. He would always help others and eventually sales would come his way.

Get what you want out of life.

Create listener engagement by being focused on helping others.

5. Make It About Them

If you want people to engage, there has to be something in it for them. Make them care.

Here is a great video about making your message about your audience. This is from BJ Bueno, author of “The Power of Cult Branding”.

Create listener engagement by making it about them.

6. Tease And Set Up The Next Episode

Prepare your audience to participate. Let them know the topic for next week. Then, ask them if they have a question about that particular topic.

If you have a guest, ask if there is a question they would like you to ask. Michael Hyatt does a great job at this on his podcast.

Create listener engagement by properly teasing the next episode.

7. Thank Your Audience

Thanks for listening. I appreciate the help you give me.

It is such an easy way to strengthen your relationship with your audience. Your listeners have given you something they can never get back. That is their time.

Show your appreciation. A simple thank you will go a long way with your listener. If they know you are honestly grateful for their time, the chance they will listen again goes way up.

It must be honest and authentic. You can’t thank them in a gas-station-attendant-I’ll-never-see-you-again kind of way. You must deliver it from the heart. It should be the kind of thank you that you would give a stranger who stopped to help when you ran out of gas.

Your listener is your lifeblood. Without your listener you have no show. She has many, many choices when allocating her time. Let her know you appreciate her for spending her time with you.

… And thank you for stopping by. You have done a ton for me just by being here.

Create listener engagement by thanking your listener.

 

Next week we will discuss how to properly review your own show to see if you are meeting your goals and expectations. We’ll get specific. If you have questions about that topic, head to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com to get your questions answered.

I’d love to help you with your podcast. Please let me know how I might be of assistance. You can also find tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How To Make Best Use Of Your Podcast Co-Host – Episode 136

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

How To Make Best Use Of Your Podcast Co-Host – Episode 136

Copyright: kzenon / 123RF Stock Photo
Copyright: kzenon / 123RF Stock Photo

Today, we will open the Podcast Talent Coach mail bag and answer a few content questions I have received. The first questions is about making effective use of a co-host. The second is about consistently helping your listeners with your content.
I would love to hear an episode on involving a highly effective style with a cohost. – Rick Sizemore – VR Workforce Studio

CO-HOST BASICS

  • Different point of view
  • Distinct styles and perspectives
  • Different voices
  • One needs to be the leader

I was listening to a business podcast the other day. It is a show that is hosted by two marketing gurus. They typically offer business advice to listeners who write or call the show.

The hosts had received a question regarding unique ways to market a product. The listener had included a few methods he had used. Host number one rattled off his critique of the methods used and offered a couple of his own. Host number two basically said, “I agree with your assessment and really have nothing further to add.”

When a second host (or guest for that matter) isn’t offering any new information or differing opinion, the second host is unnecessary.

If your podcast involves more than one person on the show, you need to have a justifiable reason for each of you to exist on the show. When there are multiple voices on a show, each voice needs a role. One of the hosts is unnecessary if two voices are offering the same information, with the same opinion persona.

There are many podcasts hosted by two co-hosts. Many of those are successful, such as “On The Media” with Brooke Gladstone and Bob Garfield, “Manic Mommies” with Erin and Kristin, and “Mike & Mike in the Morning” with Mike Golic and Mike Greenberg.

Not all two-person podcasts are structured quite as well as these. It seems two friends who have similar interests get together and start a podcast without much planning. The similar interests of the hosts seem to spawn similar opinions and positions on topics.

If you and I are hosting a show, and we are both saying roughly the same thing, one of us isn’t necessary.

A great example of two hosts that compliment each other well is “Mike & Mike in the Morning”.

Mike Golic and Mike Greenberg host “Mike & Mike in the Morning”. You can find the show broadcast on ESPN television and radio as well as their “best of” podcast online. The show recently celebrated its 10-year anniversary.

Both Mikes have an interest in sports. That is the commonality that brought them together. A general interest in the topic is necessary for the subject matter and foundation of the show.

The differing opinions create the magic within the show.

Mike and Mike come from very different background. Their different experiences have developed differing opinions, attitudes and approaches to various sports topics. These differences make the show compelling.

Mike Greenberg was born to a Jewish family. He grew up in New York City. Greenberg went on to study journalism. He worked his entire career in broadcasting, beginning in Chicago, the third largest city in the United States.

Mike Golic was born in suburb of Cleveland, Ohio. He played American football in College while studying finance and management at Catholic university Notre Dame in Indiana. Golic played professionally in the NFL. He then began his broadcasting career after his playing career ended.

Where Greenberg approaches topics from the researcher/journalist perspective, Golic tackles those topics from the real life experience angle. Greenberg comes from the big city. Golic comes from the suburbs. Greenberg worked big-time radio in the nation’s largest cities. Golic made big-time hits on one of professional sports’ biggest stages.

There are multiple approaches you can take on a show with multiple hosts.

Good cop/bad cop is a common show structure.

This is approach would position one host as the nice guy. He is there to help. Always encouraging and supporting the listener.

The second host would be a bit of a jerk. He might have a big ego. This host would be in your face and telling you like it is. He wouldn’t necessarily be mean. However, he would be the antagonist in the show.

There is a three-person version of this called “The Dog, The Doll and The Dork”. This show involves the bad guy (the dog), the good guy (the dork) and the sweet girl to round it out (the doll). The female typically plays mediator between the two guys. This show is heard quite often on radio morning shows.

You can also see “The Dog, The Doll and The Dork” in America’s original version of “American Idol”.

Simon Cowell was “The Dog”. He was the bad guy with the big ego. Simon was the guy everyone loves to hate.

Paula Abdul played the role of “The Doll”. She was sweet while often siding with one of the two guys. She was very likeable. Paula was almost the antidote to Simon.

Randy Jackson was “The Dork”. He would often play the nice guy, even while providing tough criticism. You would hear Randy say something like, “You know you’re my dog, but that just wasn’t good.” Randy could be seen considering the feelings of the contestants.

“American Idol” is currently not as strong, because they’ve lost the role identity of each judge. When you watch the show, you really don’t know what to expect from each judge. Is Randy going to be the nice guy or suddenly play the part of “the Dog”? Roles are inconsistent from show to show.

There are many other varieties of show roles. You could use nerd/jock where one host has “studied it” and one host has “done it”. Liberal/conservative is an option if you can find a co-host with the opposing point of view. Corporation/entrepreneur could offer diverse points of view on business. Male/female is pretty clear. You simply need to select the differences that work for you.

Think of some of the best duos in history. What makes them different (and therefore valuable)? McCartney & Lennon. Abbott & Costello. Siskel & Ebert. Bert & Ernie. Sonny & Cher. Milli Vanilli. Ok, maybe not that one.

Each member in those great partnerships offered something different than their teammate. Often, that difference was the opposite of their counterpart. Sometimes, it was simply a different approach. Find those differences that make each of you unique.

The goal of your show is to entertain your audience. Listeners have come to your show to learn something, laugh at something, or be amazed by something. Your job is to create compelling content.

Debates and differing opinions are a great way to stir up emotion with your audience. It doesn’t always need to be an argument. Multiple hosts simply need to offer different information. If both hosts are offering the same content, one of you are just wasting the time of your audience. You are repeating yourself when you could be dishing up new content.

If you host a show with multiple people, find each individual voice and use those differences to entertain your audience.

HELP OTHERS

How can I help others with every show. I am so grateful for your show, keep up the good work, I point all my podcasting friends your way! You have a devoted fan on Oahu, if you need any ideas for family adventures on Oahu…. I’m your Man! – Dave Tupper – Kids Adventures Hawaii

Start with the goal of your show. What is it that you want people to take from this particular episode? How will your content help them?

I’m sure you’ve heard the phrase “what’s in it for me?”
Your audience will be asking this very question every time they tune into your podcast. Your introduction better tell your listener exactly how your topic will affect them. You need to hook them right at the beginning with an intriguing introduction. If you don’t hook them early, they will be gone in search of something more captivating.

When your audience knows what is in it for them, they begin to care. Making your listener care is the only way to get them to listen and more importantly come back again.

As I was listening to a podcast recently, it suddenly hit me. How does this apply to me, and what am I getting out of this podcast? I was having a tough time answering those two questions.

It was an entrepreneural podcast. The host and guest were recounting the launch and growth of the guest’s company. It was a decent story. There were a few highlights about growing out of a basement and finding industry partners. The most interesting part of the story was the fast growth of the company.

After twenty minutes of the show, it hit me. I really have nothing in common with this tech company. The stories being told were very specific to the guest’s company. Most of all, neither the guest nor the host were making the connection between the tale of the company and lessons that could be gleaned by the listener. They were not incorporating the audience into the show at all.

To truly engage your audience, you need to make the listener the star. Nobody wants to watch your home movies unless they are in them.

Your listener doesn’t need to be part of the show to be the star. The content could give them hope, help them envision the future, or relate to their situation. You need to help them make that connection.

The key question is “what’s in it for me?” Your listener isn’t attracted to your podcast by your content. They listen to your podcast because of what your information can do for them. They don’t buy products. They buy benefits.

If your podcast is only focused on you, your product, or your guest without making a connection to the listener, the size of your audience will shrink. Engaging content must be listener focused. Keep your audience engaged by making your listener the star.

Connection, put them in the show, one-on-one communication and teaching without being condescending.

This week, check out the free video I have on PodcastTalentCoach.com about one-on-one communication. We discuss how to make your listener feel like they are part of the show and that your content is specifically for them.

Next week, we will start a series on interviewing. How do you make the most of the time with your interview guest? What is more effective at attracting traffic, interviewing others or being interviewed? In the next few episodes, we will cover that, along with interview terms, and tips to help create powerful interviews.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How To Get Podcast Listeners To Return Next Week – Episode 132

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

How To Get Podcast Listeners To Return Next Week – Episode 132

Copyright: convisum / 123RF Stock Photo
Copyright: convisum / 123RF Stock Photo

 

When you want your listeners to stick around and listen to what you have to say, you need to give them a compelling reason. Your listener needs to anticipate what is to come later in the show. You need to excite them. You need to tease them.

Anticipation is a key feature to storytelling. Your story should build just like a good plot builds in a movie. You need to make your audience anticipate the content that is on the way.

Your story is similar to a vacation you are planning to take. The fantastic anticipation for the trip is almost as pleasurable as the trip itself. You can’t wait for the trip to arrive. You want your listener to feel the same way about your story.

When your listener can’t wait for the story to arrive, you have created some great content with a powerful tease. Your listeners will get more enjoyment from your show when they get the tease payoff more often. The pleasure of the “oh wow” factor will be increased. The joy of anticipation will keep your audience coming back for more.

There are three steps to creating an effective tease.

#1 – Intrigue Me

When you promote content that is coming up later in the show, you must give your audience an intriguing reason to stick around. It isn’t enough to simply say, “A great story about this weekend is coming up.” Few will stick around for the payoff. The tease lacks stickiness. It doesn’t hook the listener.

#2 – Give Them 80%

To create an effective tease, give your listener 80% of the story while leaving out the most important 20%. It is similar to giving the setup for a joke without providing the punch line. Lead your listener right up to the line, but make them wait to step over.

#3 – Make Your Tease Unsearchable

Make it impossible to search online.

You want your listener to keep listening for the payoff to your set up. If I can simply search on Google for the answer to your tease, there is no reason to keep listening. I can just look it up and be done with it.
The three steps to powerful teases will help you begin to engage your audience on the way to building powerful relationships. Use the three steps in your show recap to entice people to listen to the episode. Then, use them again during the introduction of the show to get listeners to enjoy the entire recording.

You’ve worked hard to create your content. A lot of effort has been exerted on your part while writing and recording your show. Make your content intriguing by using these three steps in the art of the tease.

When you use the art of the tease, your listeners will spend more time with your show. The increased frequency of the tease payoffs will help your audience enjoy your content more. When your show is more entertaining, it becomes more engaging. When you truly engage your audience with your content, you can begin building powerful relationships. That’s where trust and influence with your listener begins.
Next week, I will teach you how to critique your podcast on your own. You will learn how to find areas to improve and steps to take to make your show stronger.

I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

The Deconstruction Of A Podcast Episode – Episode 127

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

The Deconstruction Of A Podcast Episode – Episode 127

DECONSTRUCTING A PODCAST

Copyright: eraxion / 123RF Stock Photo

 

In a previous episode of Podcast Talent Coach, I shared 7 ways to drive listeners away from your show. One of the main points suggested you treat every listener as if they are new to the show. We need to continually feed the funnel.

Joshua Liston from The Deadly Arnold podcast was checking out my back catalog when he stumbled across this particular episode. He took exception to one of this particular suggestion.

THANKS

I must say that I do appreciate Joshua for a few reasons. One, he took the time to comment on the episode. Two, he was listening to my back catalog. Finally, he provided some great thought starters for a few solid episodes. I truly appreciate Joshua allowing me to use his comments to help others learn. That is what this community is all about.

In that episode, I suggested one way you drive listeners away is being the podcaster who assumes listeners have heard the show before.

POWERFUL INTRO

If you’re not explaining your podcast purpose each and every show, it will be difficult for new listeners to understand the show. Your audience will feel like they are joining a conversation in the middle. They will be lost.

In this episode, we review an episode that Josh mentions to see how they do these things.

I have selected one of the podcasts Joshua mentions with less of a national platform. Rather than tell you the name, we just jump in to see if the intro pulls you into the episode.

As we discuss the introduction and care for new listeners, please do not interpret this as something you should do at the expense of your current fans.

Sure, the content of your show must be great to keep listeners around. That is simply the price of admission. To get people to subscribe, create great content. That should go without saying.

In order to keep people engaged, you need to make them feel like they are part of the club. This is especially true for new listeners.

If you’re not explaining your podcast purpose each and every show, it will be difficult for new listeners to understand the show. Your audience will feel like they are joining a conversation in the middle. They will be lost.

SHOW REVIEW

In the episode of Back To Work that I review, the hosts do a few things to make new listeners feel included.

They use each other’s name often. This helps us get to know the voice.

We find out Merlin is 40-something and has a daughter. By sharing his life, his listeners get to know him.

Merlin refers to the same five books quite often. Though he is obviously well-read, these books seem to have been very influential on him.

Merlin knows a bit about Hollywood and the process of making movies. We learn this by his discussion of the four quadrant theory.

Merlin is a Democrat.

Merlin is confident and has little fear of speaking in front of large crowds. Dan admires that quality.

IS THE INTRO NECESSARY

On the other hand, there is no introduction to the show. I listened as a casual listener and had no idea what this show was about. There was nothing to suck me into the episode.

Merlin’s 355,000 Twitter followers along with his writings in magazines like Wired, Popular Science and MacWorld probably go a long way in driving listeners to the podcast.

Since the average podcast has roughly 170 downloads per episode, those podcasters cannot assume listeners will stick around if there is no clear benefit.

So many podcasters want to play the part before they are the part. It is similar to living like a billionaire before you are a billionaire. You cannot buy the Porsche, mansion and private plane until you make the money. You cannot act like a podcaster with 100,000 downloads until you earn the attention.

Make everyone feel welcome, supply your listeners with great content, and make your material unique. Then, watch your subscribers grow.

Find Joshua C. Liston at The Deadly Arnold Podcast and at BraverByTheDay.com.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Focus On Current Or New Podcast Listener? – Episode 126

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Focus On Current Or New Podcast Listener? – Episode 126

podcast listeners_

Photo Copyright : Eduardo Huelin/123rf.com

 

In a previous episode of Podcast Talent Coach, I shared 7 ways to drive listeners away from your show. We work so hard to gain listeners. Why would we ever drive them away.

But … should you focus on the current or new podcast listener?

Joshua Liston from The Deadly Arnold podcast was checking out my back catalog when he stumbled across this particular episode. He took exception to one of the 7 ways I mentioned.

In the episode, I suggested one way you drive listeners away is being the podcaster who assumes listeners have heard the show before.

If you’re not explaining your podcast purpose each and every show, it will be difficult for new listeners to understand the show. Your audience will feel like they are joining a conversation in the middle. They will be lost.

Have you ever felt left out of a conversation due to inside jokes. Two other people are chuckling about something, and you have no idea why. “Oh, it’s an inside joke” they say. Why aren’t you important enough to be in on the joke? Why is it inside only to them? Those situations are a bit offensive. You’re not included.

When you are not explaining your podcast, you are not allowing your listener to understand the nuances of your show. They won’t feel like part of the club. Your listener will not feel important or that you care about them. It is quite possible they will leave.

The opening of your podcast should explain the purpose of your podcast and let your listeners know exactly what to expect as if this is the first time they have ever heard the show. We discussed this in the past two episodes when we reviewed the importance of a strong introduction.

A well-crafted introduction serves two purposes.

First, it tells the brand new listener who is hearing the show for the very first time exactly what to expect from the show. You know exactly what is coming your way, even if you have never seen the show before.

Second, those that have heard the show before are confident that they are in the right place. Those regular listeners will find comfort in the opening of the show they hear each time they tune in. Fans will also feel like they are “in the know”. This is similar to singing the theme song of your favorite sitcom. As soon as you hear the first few notes of the theme song, you know you’re on the right channel. Your show intro should elicit the same response.

As you create your show open, treat it as if every listener is saying, “Hey, I’m new here. What’s going on?” You’ll make everyone comfortable as the show begins.

Here are Josh’s comments on the subject:

I must stress that I do disagree with your ideas around “making new listeners feel welcome in every episode”.

Personally I think Podcasters focus too much on their new audience and far too little on those already listening (which is where the majority of engagements and downloads come from for most podcasters). Those same things that you suggest make new/new listeners feel left out (in-jokes, personal references, etc) are the very things that make a longtime listener feel even more part of something special, and exclusive.

If you reference great podcasts that have stood the test of time “Back to Work” “Joe Rogan Exp” “Roderick on the Line” “Nerdist” “Hardcore History” “FOFOP & TOFOP” “Monday Morning Podcast” “Welcome to Night Vale” “We Are Alive” “The Dollop” “99% Invisible” “This American Life.” they make little to no intentional effort to morph their shows personality/language/individuality to entice new listeners to stay – they work incredibly hard in embracing their longtime listeners and fans though!

I can see how your ideas applies to a more transient audience like those of commercial radio stations where listeners are after the content within the content (music, news, score-lines, financial data etc) but for personality driven podcasting I think this falls purely into speculative theory.

-Joshua C. Liston
The Deadly Arnold
BraveryByTheDay.com
In this episode, I offer my assessment of Joshua’s position.

Sure, the content of your show must be great to keep listeners around. That is simply the price of admission. To get people to subscribe, create great content. That should go without saying.

In order to keep people engaged, you need to make them feel like they are part of the club. This is especially true for new listeners.

If you’re not explaining your podcast purpose each and every show, it will be difficult for new listeners to understand the show. Your audience will feel like they are joining a conversation in the middle. They will be lost.

Should you focus on the current or new podcast listener? The answer is both.

Make everyone feel welcome, supply your listeners with great content, and make your material unique. Then, watch your subscribers grow.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Are You Losing Listeners? (Pitfalls Disrupting Podcast Traffic) – Episode 125

2 Comments

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Episode 125 – Are You Losing Listeners? (Pitfalls Disrupting Podcast Traffic)

LISTENERS EXIT

In a previous episode of Podcast Talent Coach, I shared 7 ways to drive listeners away from your show. We work so hard to gain listeners and podcast traffic. Why would we ever drive them away.

Joshua Liston from The Deadly Arnold podcast was checking out my back catalog when he stumbled across this particular episode. He took exception to one of the 7 ways I mentioned.

In the episode, I suggested one way you drive listeners away is being the podcaster who assumes listeners have heard the show before.

You work so hard to attract listeners to your podcast. Growing the audience is a constant challenge for most podcasters. You do all you can to bring more people to the party.

In this episode, we discuss the 7 ways you could be driving listeners away.

In the episode next week, I will dissect one of the episodes suggested by Joshua and demonstrate how successful podcasters eliminate these traps.

There are seven common mistakes podcasters make that drive listeners away. Here is a brief overview of each. See if you recognize these within your show.

THE PODCASTER WHO TALKS AT YOU

Great podcasters are not announcers. Great podcasters are conversationalists. If you can have a conversation with someone you cannot see nor hear, you have the ability to create a great podcast.

Instead of talking at me, talk to me and with me. Let’s have a conversation. You won’t be able to hear my responses. However, how many times have you found yourself talking back to the radio or podcast host? When the listener is responding out loud, you know the host has the ability to be conversational even when the other party isn’t present.

Be personal and talk to your listener, not at her.

THE PODCASTER THAT WASTES YOUR TIME

The wider the focus of your podcast, the better chance your topic will not interest me. It sounds counterintuitive. If you want more listeners, you need to narrowly focus your topic.

When you are too broad, your listener doesn’t know what to expect from your show.

Instead, pick a niche. Make it a tight focus. Pick the segment of your topic that you most enjoy and really focus there.

Focus is powerful. When you are focused, your audience knows exactly what to expect. Your focus builds loyalty, because you aren’t attracting listeners who have no interest in your niche. Since the niche is only focused on the slice of information that that interests your listener, your audience will almost always feel like you are delivering great content. You’ll never be wasting their time.

THE PODCASTER THAT DOES NOT MAKE YOU CARE

When you only deliver the what, the listener has no real reason to care. You are only providing information. Facts are lifeless. You must provide the why before you can provide the what. The “why” makes your listener care.

I’m sure you’ve heard the phrase “what’s in it for me?”

Your audience will be asking this very question every time they tune into your podcast.

When your audience knows what is in it for them, they begin to care. Making your listener care is the only way to get them to listen and more importantly come back again.

Provide the “why” early in the podcast. Make them care.

THE PODCASTER THAT DOES NOT GET YOU INVOLVED

A podcast that is only focused on the host quickly becomes a very lonely podcast. “Enough about me, let’s talk about me.” Listeners surely won’t stick around for that very long. If listeners are not involved, they feel like the host doesn’t care about them.

Make your listener the star. It is your show. You know where it is going. When listeners are involved in your show, it is always your job to lead your guest and make them the star.

Get your listener involved wherever you can. Provide opportunities for listeners to interact with you. Even if you receive very little feedback, the opportunity to do so will send the message to your listeners that you care. The opportunity for involvement goes a long way.

THE PODCASTER THAT DOESN’T HELP OTHERS

Focus on helping others.

Zig Ziglar had many great quotes. One of my favorites is, “You can have anything you want in life just as long as you help enough other people get what they want in life.” How true that is.

As you turn your information into engaging entertainment with your podcast, keep in mind that helping people is part of the foundation of a strong relationship. If you take, take, take, your relationship won’t last long. If you are there to give and help, you will develop friends for life.

Get what you want out of life. Focus on helping others.

THE PODCASTER THAT TRIES TOO HARD TO BE FUNNY

Many podcasters painstakingly try to be funny. Jokes are never funny when the joke teller tries too hard. The forced punchline is uncomfortable. The timing is off. He will lead with something like, “This is funny” or “Here’s a good one” or “You’ll love this”. If I’m going to love it, do you really need to tell me? Won’t I know I love it once you tell me?

The good news is you don’t have to be funny. Stop trying so hard. The funny will come. You are focused on the wrong thing.

Funny follows fun.

THE PODCASTER WHO ASSUMES LISTENERS HAVE HEARD THE SHOW BEFORE

If you’re not explaining your podcast purpose each and every show, it will be difficult for new listeners to understand the show. Your audience will feel like they are joining a conversation in the middle. They will be lost.

Have you ever felt left out of a conversation due to inside jokes. Two other people are chuckling about something, and you have no idea why. “Oh, it’s an inside joke” they say. Why aren’t you important enough to be in on the joke? Why is it inside only to them? Those situations are a bit offensive. You’re not included.

When you are not explaining your podcast, you are not allowing your listener to understand the nuances of your show. They won’t feel like part of the club. Your listener will not feel important or that you care about them. It is quite possible they will leave.

A well-crafted introduction serves two purposes.

First, it tells the brand new listener who is hearing the show for the very first time exactly what to expect from the show.

Second, those that have heard the show before are confident that they are in the right place.

As you create your show open, treat it as if every listener is saying, “Hey, I’m new here. What’s going on?” You’ll make everyone comfortable as the show begins.

Next week, we will review a podcast suggested by Joshua to learn how these ideas are put to use in the real world to attract listeners and drive podcast traffic.
As I mentioned in this episode …

Here is the link to the Podcast Talent Coach Worksheets.

Here is the link to the Podcast Talent Coach Workbook.

Here is the link to Podcast Talent Coach Coaching.
You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How To Construct a Powerful Podcast Introduction – Episode 124

1 Comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

How To Construct a Powerful Podcast Introduction – Episode 124

PowerfulPodcastIntroductions

(DOWNLOAD: Topic Development Worksheet)

On a recent episode of the Podcast Review Show that I do with Dave Jackson, we got into a discussion with a podcaster who struggles with the introduction of his show. This happens with so many hosts. How do you properly begin an episode? What are the important elements of a solid podcast introduction? What is the purpose?

We were talking with Doug Salamone of Mind Drippings podcast. On this particular episode, Doug was interviewing Taylor Pearson, author of “The End Of Jobs”. Doug said he was having trouble forming the introduction of his interviews.

Before you begin your show, determine what are you hoping people will take from the interview. What is the point?

Many podcast introductions are a waste of time. They host wanders into the episode rather than creating anticipation and setting up the content that is to come.

“Tell us a little about yourself, who you are and what you do.” It is such an overused first questions.

Do your homework. Know the important facts about your guest that support the topic. Provide those pieces of information right at the beginning. Then, hit the ground running with great questions.

Make your podcast introduction compelling. It should make your audience want to stick around for the payoff. I hear so many shows begin with their standard show open immediately followed by a bunch of housekeeping. Don’t waste the time of your audience. Your introduction should make a promise (tell the audience what to expect). You should then follow through on that promise (give them the content they expect).

Last week, we discussed the purpose of a strong podcast introduction. This week, I want to walk you through the steps of creating your powerful purpose and intriguing introduction.

These steps come straight from the Topic Development Worksheet online at PodcastTalentCoach.com.

13 STEPS

What do you hope to make the audience laugh at, marvel at or better understand?

What is in it for them?

Why is the topic relevant to your audience?

How will you make the audience care?

What is the source of the topic?

How will the source lend credibility to the topic?

What do you find intriguing about the topic?

What emotion do you hope to stir?

In what context will the story be set?

Where will you take the topic? Where will the story go?

What details will you use?

What is the one thing you hope your listener will remember about you/your show?

Write the intriguing introduction to your topic.

 

Before you begin your show, determine what are you hoping people will take from the interview. What is the point?

Do your homework. Know the important facts about your guest that support the topic. Provide those pieces of information right at the beginning in your podcast introduction. Then, hit the ground running with great questions.

 

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

The Critical Piece To A Great Podcast – Episode 123

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

The Critical Piece To A Great Podcast – Episode 123

Podcast Review Show

On a recent episode of the Podcast Review Show that I do with Dave Jackson, we got into a discussion with a podcaster who struggles with the introduction of his show. This happens with so many hosts. How do you properly begin an episode? Why are the important elements of a solid introduction? What is the purpose?

We were talking with Doug Salamone of Mind Drippings podcast. On this particular episode, Doug was interviewing Taylor Pearson, author of “The End Of Jobs”. Doug said he was having trouble forming the introduction of his interviews.

START WITH WHY

Here is Doug’s first question: “Taylor, why don’t you introduce yourself a little bit more, and start off at the beginning with what brought you to decide to write this book and I’ll just let you roll with it and we’ll get the questions going.”

Doug needs to make us care about the author as he introduces him BEFORE he brings Taylor on the show. Then, Doug needs to make us care about the subject.

Before you begin your show, determine what are you hoping people will take from the interview. What is the point.

When you use, “Tell us about yourself”, it sounds like you didn’t do your homework.

The show is about big ideas. What is the big idea in this episode? The world of jobs is coming to an end. Start there.

Later in the interview, Doug asks, “What are people to do … if the opportunities are limited … and every single year we have thousands upon thousands of people graduating from universities across the country … what are people to do to protect themselves from becoming obsolete in this current economy that we’re seeing everyday increasing where jobs are being eliminated or being exported to countries across the world?”

This is the essence of the conversation. Let’s start here.

Many introductions are a waste of time. They host wanders into the episode rather than creating anticipation and setting up the content.

“Tell us a little about yourself, who you are and what you do.” It is such an overused first questions.

Do your homework. Know the important facts about your guest that support the topic. Provide those pieces of information right at the beginning. Then, hit the ground running with great questions.

Make the introduction of your show compelling. It should make your audience want to stick around for the payoff. I hear so many shows begin with their standard show open immediately followed by a bunch of housekeeping. Don’t waste the time of your audience. Your introduction should make a promise (tell the audience what to expect). You should then follow through on that promise (give them the content they expect).

When a show begins with, “I’ll show you how to make a million dollars in 4 easy-to-understand steps”, followed by, “But first, let me plug 14 things and chat a bit about why I didn’t post an episode last week”, you are losing your audience. Your fan tuned in to hear your secrets, not your problems.

If you have housekeeping notes to pass along, sprinkle them within the show throughout the content. Lead with your strongest material. Housekeeping is not it.

Your introduction should set up your podcast. It should be an intriguing introduction that tells the listener exactly what the podcast is all about. What will I get when I listen? It doesn’t matter whether your podcast is 10 minutes or 60 minutes long. You need to tell the listener what is to come.

“Welcome to Podcast Talent Coach Podcast. My name is Erik K. Johnson. This is where we help you transforming your information into engaging entertainment so we can turn your podcast into powerful, profitable relationships.”

With that quick introduction, I told you exactly what to expect. You know the name of my podcast. You know the name of the host. You know the goal we are setting out to accomplish. I’ve also put you in the mix by referencing your dreams and how my podcast will help you. In those brief seconds, I’ve given you who, what, when and why.

That content should be followed immediately by a creative tease of this particular show. It might be something like, “We will help Steve figure out how to gently end a bad interview. Shelly asks about incorporating a call-to-action without making the show sound like an infomercial. And finally, we will hear a clip for the ‘The Golden Garden’ podcast and help Chris increase the energy and forward momentum in the show. Let’s get to it. First up …” This goes right into the show content. We start delivering on the promise made in the introduction. The show is moving forward.

If I said, “Before we get to it, let me explain the new look of my website”, I would only be relevant to a small portion of my audience. Who cares about my new layout? That would assume first that most of my audience has visited my website prior to this show, and second that they can’t find their own way around the new layout. That’s a pretty big assumption. If is important enough to include, put it at the end, or somehow incorporate the information into an answer.

Don’t waste the time of your audience. Make your introduction intriguing and get to the content immediately.

MAKE THEM CARE

I’m sure you’ve heard the phrase “what’s in it for me?”

Your audience will be asking this very question every time they tune into your podcast. Your introduction better tell your listener exactly how your topic will affect them. You need to hook them right at the beginning with an intriguing introduction. If you don’t hook them early, they will be gone in search of something more captivating.

When your audience knows what is in it for them, they begin to care. Making your listener care is the only way to get them to listen and more importantly come back again.

Lead with an intriguing introduction.

This is true for your podcast in general as well as each individual topic. Your intriguing introduction should hook your audience, let them know exactly what to expect, and allow them to enjoy the story.

What do you hope your audience will take away from this particular discussion? Your introduction should spell it out. It should set up what is to come.

If your goal is to make your listener laugh at your misfortune over the weekend, lead with it. “This weekend was so disastrous, I wouldn’t have had time for anything else to go wrong even if I tried.” The audience will now have time to enjoy the vivid details of your horrible weekend rather than trying to figure out what point you are trying to make.

When you begin your story with the details, your listener spends energy trying to determine the point you are trying to make. They are trying to figure out what the story is about.

Have you ever been stuck listening to someone tell a story while you’re thinking, “Will he ever get to the point?” That is what we are trying to avoid.

Here is an example of a story you might hear. “This weekend we went to the mall. It was just the two of us. We were looking for a gift for my dad.” Are we telling a story about finding gifts? Is this story just recapping the weekend? Maybe it is about my dad. You don’t know. I haven’t told you. There is no lead to this story.

To hook your audience and allow them to truly enjoy the story, lead with an intriguing introduction.

EMOTIONALLY POWERFUL?

A successful podcast is built on a strong relationship with the listener. It could be called a tribe as defined by Seth Godin in his book of the same name. The strong relationships with your listeners begin to develop your brand. You can then monetize your brand and associated relationships with an effective call-to-action. But it starts with the brand.

Powerful brands are more than just recognizable names. Powerful brands are full of emotion. A brand is a collection of perceptions, creating emotional connections, while consistently delivering on a promise. The more powerful the emotional connection, the more powerful the brand.

Take a moment to think of some very powerful brands and the associated emotions of the rabid fans of those brands. Nike. Volkswagen. Star Trek. Starbucks. Apple. Harley Davidson. Fans will go out of their way to interact with their favorite brand. These brands are unique, because they create powerful emotions within their fans that are not found in ordinary brands.

Ordinary brands lack emotion. Keds. Buick. Battlestar Galactica. Dunkin’ Donuts. Hewlett Packard. Honda. The powerful emotions are not present for most people in these brands.

An amazing book entitled “The Power of Cult Branding” by Matthew W. Ragas and B. J. Bueno describes the seven golden rules to cult branding. Emotion is the key to all seven. Social Groups, Courage, Fun, Human Needs, Contribution, Openness, and Freedom. All emotional. None are functional. It’s not the best, biggest, brightest, loudest, or #1 product. Cult brands are focused on emotion, not hype.

If you want to turn your podcast into a powerful brand that you can monetize with a strong call-to-action, stir emotion every time.

Next week, we will walk through the steps in creating a powerful introduction. I’ll give you a step-by-step process.
Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

WHY PODCAST AVATAR GENDER MATTERS – PTC EPISODE 122

1 Comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

WHY PODCAST AVATAR GENDER MATTERS – PTC EPISODE 122

Are you talking to men or women?

There is a big difference between marketing to men and marketing to women. The book “Men Are From Mars, Women Are From Venus” by John Gray, Ph. D. discussed in great detail the communication and relationship differences between men and women. These differences are critical in marketing. They are also important elements to your podcast strategy.

When I have discussed this in the past, I have been labeled a chauvinist. I’ve been called narrow minded. People have said I am simply promoting the stereotypes.

Let me first say these are generalities. Stereotypes are called stereotypes for a reason.

Please understand that I am speaking in generalities. I understand these statements won’t hold true for every person. These points are are simply how most men and women react in common situations as demonstrated through various research studies and many published books.

The definition of stereotype is “a simplified and standardized conception or image invested with special meaning and held in common by members of a group”. There are times when the stereotypical case will not hold true for a specific situation. There is always an exception to the rule. Most of the time, these generalities will be the case.

Today, we are going to cover five major differences between men and women that you need to consider when marketing to the different genders. Keep these differences in mind when you are shaping your podcast content.

These differences also reinforce the importance of defining your target listener. You can find my Listener Development Worksheet to help you define your avatar or target listener online at PodcastTalentCoach.com.

THINKING

In a broad sense, men tend to think very linearly. Women usually think very spatially. To be effective communicating with each gender, you must understand these differences. You must also select one to target. The same message will have difficulty reaching both genders effectively.

When handling tasks, men tend to be single-minded and focused on one goal, while women usually multitask well.

The tendency to focus on one task or many creates another interesting difference between men and women. Because they tend to multitask and focus on multiple items simultaneously, women do not seem to tire of activities as quickly as men. When men focus on one thing only, they will become bored with that particular item before a woman. Men will want to move on to the next thing. Therefore, men tend to like new and different.

Men tend to appreciate change more than women. Women will tolerate repetition much more than men, because they are not as focused on one item at a time. It may also take more messages in different ways to effectively reach and influence a woman.

Men and women also differ in the way they remember things and events. Again, men are linear. Women are spatial.

PROBLEM SOLVING

Men and women also take different approaches in the way they solve problems. Because men think linearly, men focus on the solution. Men try to determine what steps are needed to reach a successful outcome.

COMMUNICATING

Men typically view communication and problems solving as a way to show their strength and power. Men typically see things as a competition. It is a linear approach. They seek validation by solving problems.

Women use communication and problem solving for much different purposes. Women use both as a way to strengthen the relationship. Women seek understanding when tackling a problem.

RELATIONSHIPS

Men and women also handle relationship problems differently. Just like problems in any other area of life, men typically seek the solution (linear) while women tend to use problems to strengthen the relationship (spatial). Understand these differences as you build your relationship with your audience.

MEMORIES

When men remember events, they tend to remember in a linear fashion. They will remember events in sequence as one thing happened, then the next and finally the last. It is a sequential time line.

Women typically remember events in a very spatial way. The memories will be more centered around relationships, people involved and the experience.
These differences between men and women will play an important role as you define your target audience. Will your communication be spatial or linear? This is something you’ll need to decide before you can move forward to create the structure and content of your show.

Gender is only one characteristic of your target audience. There are many others to consider. Just as if you were describing one individual person, gender would only be one characteristic of that person.

Remember, these are generalities. True is most situations. There is always an exception to the rule. You can send all the hate mail you would like. Or, you can get to work assessing your approach to ensure you are reaching your audience in the best way possible.

Find my Listener Development Worksheet online at PodcastTalentCoach.com.

I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can also find tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Where To Find Podcast Topic Ideas – Episode 121

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Where To Find Podcast Topic Ideas – Episode 121

Magazines

Content creators struggle with topic ideas. It is natural. There are days when few ideas are coming to mind.

The other day, I was listening to the great motivational speaker Les Brown. He says speaking is natural. You don’t hear of people facing speaker’s block. Why do people run into writer’s block?

You simply need to find topics that pique your interest.

These topics could stir any sort of emotion within you. They could make you laugh, cry, or simply say hmmm.

The good news is that you can find topics everywhere. We tend to limit ourselves to our niche or genre. Expand. Topics are everywhere.

YOUR INTEREST

During my 25-year radio career, I’ve attend many, many seminars on creating great radio. One session eventually led to a coaching relationship with Bill McMahon.

Bill had been coaching radio talent for quite some time. He had coached Jeff & Jer in San Diego along with many others. He had a great process for creating great radio.

In our sessions, Bill would always encourage us to determine what we hoped to make the audience laugh at, marvel at or better understand. Then, start there.

Before we could get there, we needed to find the topic.

TOPIC GENERATION

The idea for topic generation came from another radio mentor of mine. Dan O’Day is probably more famous in radio circles for creating great advertising. However, he did a radio session one time on finding great topics from everyday articles. Any article could spur a topic.

Find any magazine or blog or paper. Scan through it until a headline catches your eye. As you read the article, highlight any sentence or word that captures your attention. When you are finished reading the article, find the one sentence or word that grabs you most.

With this sentence or word, spend three minutes brainstorming and freeform writing about that sentence. Set a timer. Write everything that comes to mind. Put it all on the paper. Write instead of typing. It will let the ideas come more freely.

At the end of the three minutes, look through the words on the sheet. Find the one idea that really jumps out that can be turned into a great podcast topic.

Use articles out of everyday periodicals.

PLAN IT

The third tip came from internet marketer Ryan Diess. He suggest creating a planner that includes publish date, post type, your category, your offer and the headline. Ryan offers a list of over 40 post types. You can find that link HERE.

Finally, I’ve created a worksheet that will help you ask questions to develop your topic. Once you find the sentence that piques your interest, use the worksheet to flush it out.

EXAMPLES

Here is an example of how I would use this method in my podcast.

USA Hockey – “The Meek Shall Inherit the Ice” p20 June/July 2013
“When the nation’s top quarter of college hockey teams hook up at a neutral site, only one gets to go home with a shiny gold trophy” – What makes a winning podcast. – Dissect the winners of the podcast awards – What industry events are available to learn?

“Going back to the 1950’s, when college hockey was a relatively new thing…” – Where podcasting began. – How podcasting grew from broadcasting and the theater. – What makes great theater? – What can we learn from those that came before?

“But, every now and then, a smaller school … would crash the party.” – What can we learn from some of the fastest growing podcasts? – Review some new, undiscovered podcasts. – Review a show on the show.

TOOLS

Ten Questions from the Topic Development Worksheet

1. Why is the topic relevant to your audience?
2. How will you make the audience care?
3. What is the source of the topic?
4. How will the source lend credibility to the topic?
5. What do you find intriguing about the topic?
6. What emotion do you hope to stir?
7. In what context will the story be set?
8. Where will you take the topic? Where will the story go?
9. What details will you use?
10. What is the one thing you hope your listener will remember about you/your show?
Finally, write the intriguing introduction to your topic.

Don’t settle for the first idea. Work and mold your topic.

It is easy to do an interview exactly like you do every other interview. Just like you’ve heard everyone do every other interview. Unfortunately, it will sound like every other interview.

It is easy to approach a topic just like everyone else.

Do something different. Stand out. Make your show different. Find new questions. Find ways to ask questions differently. Gain attention by being unique.

If you are discussing an article, do something different. If most hosts would simply read the article and comment, zig when they are zagging. Grab the phone and call the subject of the article. Interview the author. Act it out. Create a parody of it that is so over-the-top that it becomes memorable. Find that unique way to rise above the rest.

If you continue to settle for the first idea when presenting an idea, you’ll keep delivering typical content. We want to make you memorable. We want you to stand out and get noticed. When your content is vanilla and just like everyone else, you become wallpaper that nobody notices. You also become easy to replace.

Push yourself. Brainstorm until you find something that is great. Then, run with it and make it engaging and memorable. Don’t settle for the first idea.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Use the Podcast Talent Coach Topic Development Worksheet to discover new podcast topics all around you.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Case Study: How To Set Your Price – Episode 119

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Case Study: How To Set Your Price – Episode 119

 

Set Your Price

If you are like me, and many others in the online space, you struggle with pricing. You don’t want it to be too low and leave money on the table. On the other hand, you don’t want it to be too high and not make any sales.

So, where do you set the price?

Pricing is tricky. There is a lot of art to setting your price. Most is trial and error.

There really is no “correct” price. Price is determined by supply and demand. The price of anything is that point where a seller is willing and able to sell AND a buyer is willing and able to buy. It is a continuum.

If a seller is not making much money on a sale, she will focus on another area of business that is creating more profit. If she is a public speaker on self defense and earns $2,500 per speaking opportunity on the weekends, she is creating decent income.

If she then creates an online course teaching other women self-defense and creates sales of $3,000 per week with an hour of work online marketing the course, she may opt to do less speaking and more work online.

Her speaking gigs require her to find clients, travel to the location, give the presentation for an hour or two (depending on dinner and other presentations), possibly spend the night, travel home and miss time with her family. That is a lot to give up in order to make $2,500 when an hour a night on her schedule could earn $500 more.

People may be willing and able to buy her speaking at$2,500. However, she may not be willing to sell it for that. She may do a few speeches. It may just be less frequent. If her price increases to $5,000, the decision may be different.

HOW DO YOU DECIDE?

When I began coaching podcasters, I came to that very problem. I was in that place so many entrepreneurs find themselves. A price needed to be set for my services.

What would podcasters be willing and able to pay that I would be willing to accept?

In this episode, I take you step-by-step through the process I took to set the pricing for my podcast coaching.

So, how do you set your price.

OVERVIEW

First, ask your customers what they will buy. This could be a survey of your list. You could simply study the market and determine what they are already buying. Find a few people that could use your help and ask five or ten of them.

Next, determine what problem you are solving for your audience. People buy benefits and solutions. People don’t buy mops. They buy clean floors. Solve a problem they know they have.

Then, price on value. Know what value you have to offer. Your experience, knowledge and ability all play into your value. This will determine why it should be you rather than anyone else.

You can now set a price by looking at the market and seeing what they charge. Buy a few similar products to see what is included if necessary. You want your price to be competitive, but not necessarily the cheapest.

Your price does not need to be less than everyone else. It should probably be more expensive than others in order to stand out. Make it a great value for the price to justify being at the top end.

If you tell your audience what to do, you can charge a low price. If you teach them how to do, you are able to set a mid-level price. When you do it for the, you can be at the high end.

To be at the top of the range, go all out and solve all of their problems. Be a full-service machine. Prove the value and then add a bit more.

Most importantly, have a sales process. Know how you will attract people to your process. Define how you will demonstrate your value and benefits. Give your audience a ton of value, then the opportunity to buy.

I am not guaranteeing you will make money. I am not promising you that you will get rich, or even make a dime for that matter. I do not know you or your abilities.

I am saying this process worked for me. You may find a few helpful tips here that could help you in some way.

If you show your visitors the value of your product or service while giving them more than they expected, there is a good chance they will buy.

As in my example, there are times when the price doesn’t make sense. This is when you need to review your process.

Is the issue the price tag as it was with my program at the beginning?

Does the roadblock appear due to the structure of the product or service as it did with my 12-week program rather than weekly calls?

Are your clients looking for a product or service tailored to their needs, like my calls ever other week?

Rather than launching your product to thousands of people at one time, launch to a few. See if they are interested at that price and value. Gather some feedback. Make adjustments. Launch again to a few more people.

As you adjust your sales process, you will find a spot where clients are willing and able to buy your product at a price you are willing and able to sell. If you are not selling enough, add more value or lower the price. If you are selling too much, raise the price.

Tinker until it feels right. There is no correct price. There is only a price with which you are comfortable and that pleases your audience.

See the info page for my coaching services HERE:

PODCAST TALENT COACH COACHING

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How Radio And Podcasting Are The Same – Episode 118

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

How Radio And Podcasting Are The Same – Episode 118

The podcast “elite” will sometimes say, “This isn’t radio, this is podcasting. It’s different here.”

Well, I have news for you. Podcasting and radio are more alike than some will admit. You could benefit a bit by recognizing the similarities and borrowing the best practices.

There are many ways that radio and podcasting are the same.

The Same …

1. Same Tools

Both create with audio equipment.

This one is pretty obvious. Both are creating shows using a mic and other audio equipment.

The different ways the equipment is used makes it art. One sculptor may work with wood when another works with rock. Both are still sculptors and artists.

2. Same Approach

Both sit in a room alone trying to entertain people they cannot see.

It sounds crazy when you say it out loud. Both podcasters and broadcasters sit alone in a room talking with people they can neither see nor hear. Both try to predict the reaction of the listener while creating the entertainment.

3. Same Conversation

Both have real conversations with the listener.

Being authentic is critical to success of both podcasters and listeners. Both try to build knowledge and trust with the audience in order to develop a relationship.

4. Same Visions

Both create images in the mind of the listener.

When you tell great stories, your listener gets to know you. This is part of the “know, like and trust” philosophy of doing business.

Stories with vivid details allow the listener to develop images in the theater of the mind. These stories allow her to enjoy the story in her own way.

5. Same Experience

Both are individual activities.

When two people watch the same video, little is left to the imagination. When the same two people hear audio, each will develop individual images in their mind.

No two images will be identical. Listening is an individual activity.

6. Same Connection

Both try to make a one-on-one connection and create a following.

The podcaster and broadcaster are both trying to create a tribe for their content. If you are not trying to grow your audience, you will eventually be talking to yourself.

7. Same Episodes

Both produce episodic content that keeps listeners returning.

This is especially true in talk radio. Content is regularly produced by both podcasters and broadcasters. Those episodes of content build upon each other to create an ongoing show.

8. Same Goal

Both hope to capitalize on the attention using a strong call-to-action.

Content is created by both in order to attract an audience. Once the audience is built, both try to activate that audience with a call-to-action.

The goal may be monetization, support or simply returning for the next episode. Either way, both hope to move a group of people.

9. Both Can Interact

Both are able to interact in real time.

This wasn’t true a few years ago. However, now that technology has come such a long way, both podcasters and broadcasters can interact with the audience in real time.

Podcasters chat with their listeners in real time using phone systems, Google hangout, chat rooms, and other methods. No longer is this feature limited to broadcasters.

… And Sometimes Different

There are a few features of podcasting that differs from broadcasting.

1. Podcasters Time Shift

Podcasting can be time shifted. This can be a benefit over broadcasting.

Podcast listeners can enjoy the show anytime they would like. They do not need to be next to the radio at a given time in order to hear their favorite show.

This is a feature and not necessarily something that makes podcasting inherently different from broadcasting. When we are talking about the art and goal of the audio, this is just a different way of delivering.

2. Podcasters Benefit From The Beginning

Podcast listeners start at the beginning. Mark Ramsey did a great session on this at New Media Expo 2015.

Some broadcast listeners join the show at the beginning and some join in the middle of the show. Podcast listeners all start at the beginning of the episode.

Rarely will a podcast listener download a show, scroll through to the 17:00 mark and begin listening there unless there is a specific direction to do so.

3. Podcasters Can Niche Down

Podcasting can afford to be more niche. By nature of the medium, broadcasting must be mass appeal. This is definitely a benefit for podcasting.

4. Podcasting Is Inclusive

Almost anyone can create a podcast. Podcasting requires a minimal investment. This makes it easy for most to get involved. There is no limit to the number of podcasts that can be created.

Getting on the radio requires getting through the gate keeper. Your other option is to buy your own station. Both are quite difficult.

Again, advantage podcasting.

The nine similarities between the two formats are largely foundational. The essence of the art is the same. The goal, methodology and tactics are identical between the podcasting and radio.

Podcasting enjoys a few benefits over broadcasting. The few differences are hardly enough to proclaim podcasting much different than radio.

I’d love to know what you think. E-mail me anytime at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Podcast Resources – Episode 117

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Podcast Resources – Episode 117

Podcast Resources

(These tools can be found on the resource page at PodcastTalentCoach.com. Most links on that page are affiliate links. I receive a variable commission for all purchases made using those links. If you would like to support the show, please take advantage of some of these resources.)

I have recently received questions from listeners looking to launch a podcast in 2016. I thought this would be a good time to review the tools I use to in my business. This includes the tools I use to create my podcast, website and newsletter. We will also review the resources I use to learn, grow and develop.

This episode is an encore presentation of an earlier episode you may have missed. If you did catch it last time, let this serve as inspiration and a little refresher.

I have been using most of these resources for at least 24 months. Some have been used longer. A couple tools are more recent. For the most part, I have been a long-time user and have been quite happy with each of them. That is why I feel confident recommending them to you. You can find affiliate links to most of these online at PodcastTalentCoach.com.

COACHING RESOURCE

This list doesn’t include much technical information, such as mixers, processors and software. I leave that to Dave Jackson at the School of Podcasting. He is the tech expert that helps me. If you are looking for help setting up the studio, Dave is your guy. He leads off my resources.

TECHNICAL TOOLS

A few technical tools from my studio include my mic, my mac and a few web tools.

My studio mic is an ElectroVoice RE20. This runs about $450. It is a high quality mic. This mic is probably much more than a beginning podcaster needs. However, if you are serious about podcasting, this is a great mic.

My backup mic is a Audio-Technica ATR-2100. It is a quality USB mic for the money. This costs around $60.

For editing, I use Adobe Audition in the studio. I will occasionally use Garage Band for quick projects or when I’m traveling.

I use a Mac Book Pro 13” for the flexibility. I cost me $1,200.

My mp3s are tagged with ID3 Editor from PA Software. The price tag was $15.

I host my audio with Libsyn. It runs $20/month.

My URLs were purchased through GoDaddy. The price really depends on the URL. You can usually find a deal. After the initial deal, I pay about $45/year.

I have a website on Homestead and one on Host Gator with WordPress. Homestead is a stand alone site builder. Host Gator just hosts my WordPress site. Homestead is $20/month. HostGator is $135/year, just over $11/month. WordPress is free.

On my website, I use Paypal for my transactions. Most of my providers accept it. Plus, they have a card option for my customers.

I use Aweber for my newsletter. It is $196/year. Just over $16/month. I looked at Mail Chimp. Both are very similar services if you have a list under 5,000.

Canva.com is a decent resource for creating graphics. They have a decent photo library as well. Most photos are about $1/photo.

I self-published my workbook through Create Space, an Amazon company. You simply upload a .pdf. It is fairly simple to use. Not very expensive. They also sell the workbook through Amazon and converted it to Kindle.

I am in the process of creating a membership portal through WishList Member. $297. They have solid training videos. I am not yet complete with this one.

LEARNING TOOLS

Dan Miller and 48Days.com is where it all started. He has great tools to help you find your passion and the work you love.

Internet Business Mastery is a great podcast and course that have helped me refine my business focus. Jeremy & Jason have been there and done it.

Michael Hyatt has a great membership site with Platform University. It is based on his book Platform, which is a must read as you develop your podcast. There is great learning inside the community. He only opens membership a couple times a year for enrollment. I got in early on this one and haven’t looked back since.

Audible.com has turned my car into a mobile classroom. I am usually listening to a couple books a month on top of the podcasts. You can get a free book when you use my affiliate link on the resources page.

Most of all, I cannot say enough about Dave Jackson and the School of Podcasting. If you want to learn the technical nuts and bolts, check out his course, membership and training tools.

You can find affiliate links to most of these online at PodcastTalentCoach.com. I would appreciate the support if you choose to use any of these links and great products.

I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How Do I Market My Podcast ? – Episode 114

1 Comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

How Do I Market My Podcast ? – Episode 114

Answering listener questions

Thank you for allowing me to help you with your podcast. I get a great deal of joy helping podcasters achieve their goals.

A few weeks ago, I asked you for questions and ways I can help you with your show. I received some great questions from you. This week, I want to go through a few with you.

How do you market your show? How can I get to the point of launch? How do I fight the Impostor Syndrome? How do I name my podcast?

I’m struggling with promotion/marketing and spreading the word.
-Greg from the “I Want To Know” podcast

There are many ways to market and promote. Most of it takes time.

I learned a lot about marketing from Paige Nienaber from CPR Promotions. He often refers to this drip style of marketing as dog crap marketing.

Paige lives in Minnesota, where it snows a lot every year. The ground is typically covered with snow from November to March.

Paige also owns a dog. If you are a dog owner, you know all about cleaning the back yard. The dog makes deposits. You clean it up.

Just because there is snow on the ground doesn’t mean the dog doesn’t need to go out to do his business. It just makes it tougher to clean up.

When the snow finally melts in March, you find the results of all the hard work of your dog. It wasn’t done in a few days. It built up slowly over months of productive work by the dog.

The same is true for your marketing. Work on it daily and let the results build over time.

Here are six tips you can use.

1. Know your most frequent listeners by name and use them.
2. Use stories to stand out and be remembered.
3. Host events to create community.
4. Make it easy to share your content.
5. Don’t blow your first impression.
6. Write great show notes with helpful links that your audience can use.

You can find a worksheet of 52 podcast marketing tips at PodcastTalentCoach.com.

I am a beginner, not even live yet, in fact having problems getting from intro, outro, episode and artwork to live. So frustrating, feeling like I am THIS close.
– Corrine

This is a matter of finding the courage to launch. Fight the impostor syndrome. Learn as you go.

If you have your intro, outro, episode notes and artwork, you are ready to go live.

Create a WordPress site and sign up for a Libsyn account. This should put you in a great position to launch.

If it is belief in yourself that is holding you back, take baby steps. Record three episodes telling yourself you won’t really post these. You are just practicing. Get them recorded.

Once you have the episodes recorded, put them on Libsyn and post to your WordPress site to ensure the technology works. Test the links. Listen to the shows. Submit it to iTunes. Just tell yourself you can always change it if necessary.

After you are sure everything works, move on to the next few episodes. Changing those first three episodes is posible. However, it is more work. I think once you get them posted, you will be more excited and interested in working on the next few episodes rather than tinkering with the first three. Move forward in baby steps.

If it is the technology that is holding you back, check out Dave Jackson at the School of Podcasting. He has great tutorials that will help you create a website, set up a Libsyn account and submit your show to iTunes. He also has a great offer where he will set up your site if you order your hosting through him.

Dave always says if you can post on Facebook, you can create a website with WordPress and launch a podcast. Don’t let the intimidation stop you. There are many resources that can help.

I want to launch a show I can be proud of. I quickly get into my own head and get slapped down by the Nobody’s Going to Like This Fairy. Stupid fairy. Any tips for shutting that voice up?
– Greg

I began my broadcasting career when I was 19. It was completely by accident. I was going to college to get my architecture degree. Since I was 12-years-old, I had been tailoring my education to be an architect or engineer.

In college, I had the same fear of public speaking as most people. In our design classes, we had to do presentations in front of a panel of judges. I absolutely hated doing these presentations.

During class, four or five students would present during the hour. It would take about a week to get through the entire class. That was the worst part. The anxiety would build for presentation day only to not get your name called. I would have to live through the anxiety again in anticipation of presenting during the next class.

I never envisioned being a public speaker, radio talent or any other presenter.

My younger brother worked for a radio station at the time. I was home for the weekend doing nothing like most college students. That was when the phone rang. It was the manager of the radio station looking for my brother to fill in during a shift. My brother wasn’t home and I was offered a part-time job.

My career in radio started just running the board for long-form programs. I only talked on the radio between the 30-minute shows. I might give the time or temperature. Otherwise, I would sit around while the show played. Speaking was minimal.

As an elective for my architecture degree, I took a class called “Broadcasting For The Non-Major”. I figured being in a radio station for a part-time job should make this class a little easier. It would also help me learn more about my job.

That class eventually led me to become the music director of the college station.

That position got me a job working overnights at a commercial station. Suddenly, I instantly found myself talking to 10,000 people. I was no longer talking between long-form programs to a handful of old people. This was real radio.

Over time, I started to get comfortable talking on the radio. It took a little time. I eventually got there.

As I started picking up more hours on the air, my boss started to send me out broadcasting live in front of a crowd. I was being sent onstage to introduce concerts in front of 10,000 people. These were no longer people I couldn’t see. They were right in front of me.

It took me years to figure out how to overcome those butterflies I would get each time I stepped in front of a crowd. There were tips and tricks I learned along the way to help me. It was a combination of things I learned over the years that helped me defeat the jitters. Here are a few ways to shake the butterflies out of your system. It could save you years of trial and error.

Preparation is the key idea in the process.

Here are four steps to properly prepare for your show.

1. Overcome Jitters
– Prepare your material
– Rehearse
– Focus on one person – preferably your single target listener you have defined
– Tell yourself you are an expert at your opinion
– Making people either love you or hate you only means you are making people care.

2. Create Great Notes
– Bullet points – don’t script
– Tell stories
– Give examples – play audio
– Determine your open and close, intro and outro for show and each topic … “now it’s time for” is not an appropriate intro

3. Set the Room
– Get the temp correct – be comfortable
– Get some room temp water
– No distractions – phone, family

4. Prepare Your Equipment
– Close other programs
– Prepare your software
– Turn off your phone, close e-mail, close IM
– Test your mic and set your levels
Contact and prepare guests & co-hosts

The places I am struggling with my future podcast is mainly the what to name it. I have ideas for about 3 different podcasts (though I only want to start with one). The main problem is naming them also i.e. website name and so forth. I have an idea about formats but with never having done a podcast, they seem to escape me. I know I won’t be perfect at first and I am okay with that. But at the same time I would like to be somewhat in order. A little more guidance on this would be greatly appreciated.
– Richard

The name of your podcast sets up your brand. It should tell people exactly what they will get from your show. Don’t get cute.

If you name your show “Outside the Lines”, nobody will know if that is a show about paint-by-numbers, football or off roading. “School of Podcasting” is pretty clear. You know what you are going to get.

Take five minutes and brainstorm. Start writing every name you can think of that relates to your niche. There are no bad ideas here. Every idea will lead to another. Don’t critique. Just write as much as you can.

After the five minutes is up, review the list. Highlight the names you like.

These names should be clear about your content. Find names that capture the imagination. Look for names that sound interesting.

Once you have narrowed the list to five to ten names, ask others for their opinion. Explain the criteria of a great name. Have them give you their top three choices.

Read over the five or ten lists of three. Look for the names that get the most mentions.

Now, take action. Pick a name and run with it.

What is the worst that can happen? You get a year into it and need to adjust it. That’s ok. On a podcast the other day, I heard someone say, “If you wait until all of the stoplights turn green before you begin your journey, you’ll never start.”

Just begin. Don’t wait for things to be perfect. That will never happen. Just start.
Thanks for all of the questions. If you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

6 Ways Stories Make Your Podcast Powerful – Episode 106

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

6 Ways Stories Make Your Podcast Powerful

Powerful PodcastStories

The art of storytelling can be powerful. A story can pass life lessons from one generation to another. Tales can help people remember information. Stories bring words to life.

There have been thousands of great storytellers throughout time. You don’t need to be Chaucer or the Brothers Grimm to use stories to make your content come alive. Use stories wherever possible, and your information will become engaging and entertaining. It will also be memorable.

Here are six ways stories help the information in your podcast become powerful, engaging content.

A LAND FAR, FAR AWAY

Stories help your listener escape his everyday life. A tale that is told well will transport your listener to another place and time through their imagination. You help them forget their problems.

When you tell stories in your podcast, you give your listener hope. Tales of success help your listener see what is possible. Tragic stories make him thankful for what he has. Stories that simply make your listener think help her better understand something.

Stories that contain wonderful, vivid words create fantastic pictures in the mind of your listener. When your listener is intently focused on your story, she forgets she is listening to a podcast. She is so engrossed by your story, everything around her has disappeared. Your content has become her sole focus.

HEY, I KNOW YOU

People trust people they know. If you’re selling a product or service, people buy from people they trust. If you hope to make that sale, you need to create strong, meaningful relationships with your audience. Stories will help you develop those powerful relationships.

When you tell stories about yourself and your experiences, you reveal things about yourself. Revelation is a natural part of storytelling. Self-revelation allows your listener to get to know you. Your listener spends time with you every week as you tell him more and more about yourself. Then, even if you have never met him, your listener feels like he has known you for years. You’re building a relationship without ever meeting. Stories of self-revelation help those friendships develop.

A great anecdote helps define your character. Your listener wants to know what to expect from you and your show. The stories you tell help define who you are. Your listener will get to know you. After some time, she will be able to predict how you will react to things. You become familiar. Familiarity is another ingredient to a healthy friendship.

HUMANITY

Stories are either compelling, humorous or tragic. A great narrative will make your audience marvel at, laugh at or better understand something. Feelings make you human.

When you evoke emotions in your audience, your listener feels like you are just like her. Your stories reveal real-life experiences. You are telling her you’ve had similar things happen in your life. She can relate. She thinks in her head, “You’re one of us!” Your relationship continues to strengthen.

I REMEMBER THAT


Grimm’s Fairy Tales are so memorable, because they are lessons disguised as wonderful stories. Over 200 lessons were included in the books from the Brothers Grimm. Cinderella, Rapunzel, and Hansel and Gretel are all stories that are remembered well nearly 200 years after they were written. Stories link words to pictures in order to make the words memorable.

Great stories will make your information memorable as well. Use the tale of your latest saga to make your point. It will help your listener remember your content.

LIVE VICARIOUSLY

Your listeners can live vicariously through you when you tell them a great story. If you tell you listener how you made a fortune with your information, he gets to experience your joy almost as if he made the fortune right along with you. Your words help create the imagery in his mind.

Help people dream. Create fantastic stories that people can see in their own theater of the mind. Paint great pictures with your words. Your listener will see your story in his head.

Stories allow your listener to feel they joy without experiencing the risk. Your audience can walk through your hardships and feel the elation as you survive without actually living the pain. Delightful stories entertain listeners, because they can experience so much in a short period of time through you.

TAKE A CAR RIDE

Your podcast is 30 minutes long. That’s quite a bit of time to spend with someone. Will your listener want to spend 30 minutes in a car with you each week? When you record a podcast, you are asking them to do just that.

Your listener will spend meaningful, personal time with you each week. You better do all you can to create a strong relationship with your audience. Get listeners to like you.

When you reveal things about yourself through your stories, people will decide if they like you or not. Be real. Don’t force your story or change the details simply to make people like you. Tell the truth. If you bend the truth this time, you may forget next time. The truth will always come out. When it does, your relationship will be tarnished for good.

Reveal the truth. People will see you as a real human being. They will get to like you for who you are, flaws and all. The friendship will develop. Next thing you know, you’ll be taking a 30-minute car ride with them every week. Stories can make that happen.
Stories are powerful tools. They help your audience escape their problems.

Anecdotes help your listener get to know you. That’s where relationships begin. Your tales will show you are human. You are a real person with real flaws, just like your listener. Stories will make your information memorable, by drawing pictures in the mind of your listener.

Your audience can live vicariously through you when you tell them about your experiences. When you create that friendship, your listener will be willing to take that 30-minute car ride with you every week.

AUDACITY WORKSHOP

Click Here!

I would like to thank Steve Stewart over at MoneyPlanSOS.com. He has created a wonderful learning tool called the Audacity Workshop. This past week, he included me in one of the modules.

Our webinar was called “How To Create Killer Podcast Outlines”. We covered all of the steps laid out in the Show Prep Planning Worksheet available in the Free Worksheet Section at PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Then, I added another 30 minutes of bonus content exclusive to the Audacity Workshop. That bonus material covers ways to really refine your content in the planning stage in order to deliver killer content.

We discuss how to structure your introduction. You’ll learn how to effectively tease and promote the content in your episode, how vivid details bring your stories to life, and what content to include in your powerful call-to-action.

The best part … that is just one module. The workshop is packed full of great material and guest instructors. It is worth a look.

If you would like access to the content, here is my Audacity Workshop affiliate link. Take a look. I think you will be impressed by the depth of the instruction.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Begin creating great stories today, and make your podcast powerful.

Podcast

Purple Cow Your Podcast Brand – Episode 103

2 Comments

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Purple Cow Your Podcast Brand – Episode 103

The unexpected is amusing, delightful and memorable. Being direct assumes your listener cares about your marketing message. She doesn’t. Your listener cares about his or her needs, wants and desires. Attract their attention by doing the unexpected.

In his book “The Purple Cow”, Seth Godin says, “Cows, after you’ve seen one or two or ten, are boring. A purple cow, though … ow that would be something.” Phenomenal, counterintuitive, exciting and unbelievable.

If you want to get noticed, you need to stand out. You cannot afford to be a different shade of gray.

BJ Bueno in his book “The Power Of Cult Branding” describes the same. Oprah, Star Trek, Harley Davidson, Apple, Vans shoes. They are cult brands because they are incredibly different. They are not simply a percentage better or brighter or less filling. They are different.

Just a side note, if you would like to support the show, please use my affiliate links to both of these books.

Physical versions:

You can get a free audio book with a free trial to Audible using my affiliate link.  CLICK HERE.

If you are considering either book, I’d love to have you use my link.

To engage your podcast listener and create a relationship, you need to be memorable. In order to be memorable, you must be unique. Be distinct, unusual, and unexpected. If you sound like every other show, you will not stand out and get noticed.

DISTINCT

Be unique. If everyone else is interviewing the popular clique in your niche, make your show different. Stand out. Interview different people. Interview the same people in different ways. Create a different interview style. Instead of interviewing, turn it into an expose or magazine style feature.

Jimmy Fallon is great at “not” interviewing people. He will do a lip sync challenge. Sometimes he will do a skit. He might turn it into a game show. It isn’t the typical interview.

UNUSUAL

Is everyone doing it the same way? Do it differently. You could add listener calls to the show. Don’t wait for them to call you. Reach out to people who e-mail you and ask if you can call and record them.

When I did episode 100 and 101, I didn’t hope people would call a voicemail number. I reached out and set up a call just like I would with an interview. Be proactive.

Apple is unusual. Wikipedia is unusual. Volkswagen is unusual. Stand out. Don’t be a different shade of gray.

There is a car dealer in Omaha that does things differently. Instead of being a little better or different, they have flipped the car buying experience on its head.

The dealership has a customer parking lot clearly marked. You are not attacked by 15 car salesmen the minute you drive on the lot. They hold the door for you. They help you find the person you need.

The dealer also understands that you have a lot of info from the web, so they don’t take an entire day to get the deal done. They have eliminated the games.

They just want to sell more cars. They don’t necessarily need to get every penny out of a deal. They more time they save, the more time they have to sell another car.

By doing things differently, this dealership has become the #1 Nissan dealer in the region. On top of that, they’ve only been open a few years.

UNEXPECTED

Another dealer took it over the top with my service.

My battery wouldn’t hold a charge. I figured it was my alternator. So, I took it to the dealership.

If you have ever had a battery replaced, you know how painful it can be to reset your radio, clock and other electronic features in your car.

When I picked up my car, they had reset my radio, clock and everything else. The first thing the mechanic did when he got into my car was write down my radio stations. Not only was it reprogrammed, it was back on the original station.

This dealership does the unexpected. They are also the #1 Ford F-150 pickup dealer in the country.

Dave Jackson does the unexpected when he interrupts his interviews with interesting asides. He drives the point home by interrupting himself. Who would think of doing that? It goes against every interviewing standard. Well, it adds unexpected surprised to his interviews.

Drop in some audio to surprise your listener. Take the show in a direction that your listener wouldn’t expect. If they think you are going right, go left.

If you can create unique, memorable experiences for your listener by incorporating the unexpected, you begin to create powerful, meaningful relationships.

Are you using cows?

I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

How Do I ___ On My Podcast? – Episode 100

3 Comments

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

How Do I ____ In My Podcast? – Episode 100

How To

THANK YOU!

Welcome to Episode 100. With your help, I have been creating this podcast for 100 episodes.

On this episode, I want to do something special.

NEW PATHS

I have never had another person on the show. Up to this point, I have simply been sharing my 25 years of broadcasting knowledge with you.

Today, I have invited a few listeners to join me on the show to share their questions about podcast content and creation.

The response and questions were so great, I had to split the show into two episodes in order to keep it to about 30 minutes each.

A few questions allow us to dive into some new material. A few help us explore a few topics a little deeper. There are even a few twists along the way.

FRIENDS & INSPIRATION

Here are the people who join on this episode and inspire me to do this each week.

Dave Jackson – School of Podcasting
“How do you get used to talking to the wall when doing a solo show?”

(I also do a podcast with Dave called “The Podcast Review Show”. Wanna get reviewed? Click HERE.)

Steve Stewart – Money Plan SOS
“The impostor syndrome seems to be creeping in. How does somebody get into the right mindset where they actually feel like they can bring some value even though they may not be the best in the industry?”

Megumi Takeda – Working on her first episode
“Do you have any advice to help smooth out the moments when interviews come to a dead end line of questions and need to transition into another topic?”

David Freeman – Authors Pay It Forward
“What is the most comfortable level of preparation for a podcast interview?”

Next week, we will hear from a few other listeners with more great questions.

Do you have a question? I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

4 Ways To Make Your Podcast Different Starting Today – Episode 098

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

4 Ways To Make Your Podcast Different Starting Today – Episode 098

Your different podcast

When you try to please everyone, you end up pleasing no one. Make people take notice. You are an expert at your opinion. Give it to people.

Take A Stand

Pick a side.

Some of the nicest people make the worst podcast hosts. They try to please everyone in the audience. Those people tend to blend into the background and go unnoticed.

I once coached a radio host who was one of the best storytellers I had ever met. When he and I would meet one-on-one for coaching, he would tell me some of the funniest stories I had ever heard. He would tell me stories of his dad that would have me crying from laughing so hard.

He once told me his dad was absolutely convinced the PT Cruiser was the best car ever made. As much as my host would try to explain that the PT Cruiser was basically an incarnation of the Dodge Neon, his father wouldn’t believe it.

The two of them would get in these heated arguments in public about this car. Of all the things in life you could argue about, this happened to be the PT Cruiser.

The way the story was told was full of fabulous details. The host really had the ability to make the stories come to life.

As much as I would encourage him, the host would not tell those stories on the radio. He didn’t believe the audience as a whole would be interested.

Instead, he played it safe. He only discussed vanilla content that would not upset anyone. Unfortunately, the show never took hold.

Ray Romano is a great example of success stemming from the stories of real life. Ray used stories of his family in his stand-up comedy. That routine eventually became the hit TV show “Everybody Loves Raymond”.

Upset Someone

If you are not upsetting someone, you aren’t trying hard enough.

I would much rather have half the audience hate me and the other half love me rather than the entire audience have no opinion one way or the other. If the audience doesn’t have an opinion, they don’t care. I’m doing nothing to stir their emotion if I’m not making them pick a side.

If you haven’t picked a side and really focused your topic, people won’t care. They will not be passionate about your show.

Speak your mind. Be different. Get noticed. Make people care.

4 Steps

Here are four ways to make your podcast different from other shows in your niche.

1. Be real. Be yourself. Do no simply try to be an imitation of another show or host. Above all, tell the truth. It is much easier than remembers a character you have created.
2. All people to know you through stories. The details within your stories will reveal who you are. People do business with those that they know, like and trust. This is the first step.
3. Pick a side. Stand for something. That is the only way to stand out.
4. Avoid shades of gray. Be drastically different.
I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

3 Steps To The Art Of The Tease – Episode 097

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

3 Steps To The Art Of The Tease – Episode 097

Tease

When you want your listeners to stick around and listen to what you have to say, you need to give them a compelling reason. Your listener needs to anticipate what is to come later in the show. You need to excite them. You need to tease them.

Anticipation is a key feature to storytelling. Your story should build just like a good plot builds in a movie. You need to make your audience anticipate the content that is on the way.

Your story is similar to a vacation you are planning to take. The fantastic anticipation for the trip is almost as pleasurable as the trip itself. You can’t wait for the trip to arrive. You want your listener to feel the same way about your story.

When your listener can’t wait for the story to arrive, you have created some great content with an powerful tease. Your listeners will get more enjoyment from your show when they get the tease payoff more often. The pleasure of the “oh wow” factor will be increased. The joy of anticipation will keep your audience coming back for more.

There are three steps to creating an effective tease.

#1 – Intrigue Me

When you promote content that is coming up later in the show, you must give your audience an intriguing reason to stick around. It isn’t enough to simply say, “A great story about this weekend is coming up.” Few will stick around for the payoff. The tease lacks stickiness. It doesn’t hook the listener.

A creative tease produces anticipation. Instead, use something like, “You’re never gonna believe who I was introduced to this past weekend. My world is about to take a wild turn.” With that statement, your imagination begins to work.

Who could it be? Was it a celebrity? An investor? A mentor or hero? Imagination is the magic of a creative tease. Stir the imagination of your audience to truly engage them with your content.

When possible, intrigue by incorporating the listeners world. “This weekend, I discovered a way to save $100 a month on my grocery bill by changing one thing in the way we shop. I’ll tell you how you can do it too.” It answers “what’s in it for me” for your listener.

#2 – Give Them 80%

To create an effective tease, give your listener 80% of the story while leaving out the most important 20%. It is similar to giving the setup for a joke without providing the punch line. Lead your listener right up to the line, but make them wait to step over.

The key to an effective tease is to withhold the most important 20%. Let’s use our previous example of the attic weekend. I could say, “You’re not gonna believe it, but I found a $25,000 antique painting in the attic this weekend. I’ll tell you what’s on it coming up.”

This is a perfect example of withholding the wrong 20%. Who cares who is on it. If it’s worth $25,000, it could be a painting of the sky. It wouldn’t matter to me. I’d only be asking where I could sell it.

$25,000 is the most exciting piece of information in the entire story. That is the piece that I need to withhold to create some excitement. To properly tease, I need to say, “In the attic this weekend, I found an antique painting of Napoleon. You’re never gonna believe how much it is worth.” You are more likely to stick around to see if I can retire on my winnings when I set it up in this fashion.

Make it impossible to search online.

You want your listener to keep listening for the payoff to your set up. If I can simply search on Google for the answer to your tease, there is no reason to keep listening. I can just look it up and be done with it.

#3 – Make Your Tease Unsearchable

Let’s say I have a story about Joe Celebrity getting drunk at High Profile Bar in Las Vegas over the weekend where he got arrested for assault. I could say, “Another movie star got arrested this weekend after he got in a fight with a customer at High Profile Bar in Las Vegas. I’ll tell you who it is coming up.”

Celebrity name is part of the correct 20% I’m withholding. However, I can look this story up on Google in a heartbeat. If I search “Arrest High Profile Bar Las Vegas”, the chances are good that I will find the story in the first few search results. The tease isn’t effective. It is too easy to search.

To make the tease more powerful, make it impossible to search. “Another bar fight over the weekend landed another celebrity in jail. The story is coming up.” This tease makes it much more difficult to search. If you entered “celebrity bar fight weekend” in Google, 70 million results show up. It will be much easier to wait for my payoff than to begin searching 70 million Google entries.
The three steps to powerful teases will help you begin to engage your audience on the way to building powerful relationships. Use the three steps in your show recap to entice people to listen to the episode. Then, use them again during the introduction of the show to get listeners to enjoy the entire recording.

You’ve worked hard to create your content. A lot of effort has been exerted on your part while writing and recording your show. Make your content intriguing by using these three steps in the art of the tease.

When you use the art of the tease, your listeners will spend more time with your show. The increase frequency of the tease payoffs will help your audience enjoy your content more. When your show is more entertaining, it becomes more engaging. When you truly engage your audience with your content, you can begin building powerful relationships. That’s where trust and influence with your listener begins.
I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Six Tips To Land Better Podcast Interviews – Episode 095

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Six Tips To Land Better Podcast Interviews – Episode 095

Image

How do you land the big interview guests? This is part four of my series on interviewing.

In Episode 092, we talked about interview priority #1. We talked about making your guest look good. When you make your guest look good, everyone wins.

In Episode 093, you learned two steps to powerful interviews. To create unique interviews, be sure you ask creative, interesting questions. Then, be sure to actively listen to the answers.

Then, in Episode 094, we discussed the three skills of great interviewers. To create engaging content that stands out in the sea of sameness, great interviewers learn to lose the script, know their guest and not just the bio, and keep the interview focused on the guest.

Before we get into finding guests for your show, let’s talk a bit more about great questions. When you develop the ability to find engaging, unique questions, you are well on your way to creating a podcast that will stand out.

Turn Over The Interview Rocks

How do you find great questions for your guest during your interview? Look in unlikely places. If you want to truly engage your audience, you need to ask engaging questions of your guest.

The guest’s website or news release is a decent place to get familiar with your guest. However, if you only use these common sources for the basis of your questions, you will be asking the same questions every other interviewer is asking. Your interview won’t be different and will not stand out from the crowd.

One source I like to use is the people traveling with the guest. Ask your guest’s traveling companion if anything amusing has happened lately. It will sound wonderfully spontaneous when you ask about it during the interview.

Country artist Miranda Lambert once joined me on my show before her performance as opening act for Kenny Chesney. Before she arrived, I asked her record label representative what she had been doing lately. He told me she had injured her leg night hunting a few days earlier.

After Miranda and I exchanged typical interview pleasantries, I said, “It looks like you have a little limp in your step. What happened?” She really wasn’t limping and was a bit surprised that I had noticed.

Miranda now got the chance to tell me a great story about falling down a small ravine while night hunting with her husband Blake Shelton. It was a wonderful question that included a story about her well-publicized relationship with Blake without asking typical interview questions. I didn’t ask, “So, what have you and Blake been up to lately?” I’m sure she gets questions like that often.

Be unique. Be original. Make your interview engaging for your audience and guest. Turn over the interview rocks.

Fish For Interviews With Bigger Bait

How do you land that big guest for your podcast? Here are a few 6 useful tips.

1 – FIND THE INTRODUCTION

Find people that know your prospect. See if they will introduce you.

Just the other day, a radio colleague came to me seeking an interview with Taylor Swift. I have interviewed her a couple times. He knew I was able to make an introduction for him.

2 – THE GATEKEEPER’S FRIEND

There are times when big names have people that run their schedule. This could be a personal assistant. It might be a booking agent. You need to make friends with these people.

In the music business, I always go through the record label. I need to create a strong relationship with that person in order to be at the top of the list when interview opportunities come about.

3 – WHAT’S IN IT FOR ME?

To score a guest interview for your podcast, you need to begin by explaining how the interview will benefit your prospective guest. The fact that your audience will love it has no bearing. It really doesn’t matter to your guest if your show or your audience will benefit from the guest’s appearance.

When your guest makes the decision whether to appear on your show, they will only consider how the appearance will benefit them personally.

Are they promoting a new book? Do they have a new product available?

What is in it for your guest? Make it easy.

4 – SHOW THEM WHAT YOU’VE GOT

Provide your prospects some examples of your great work. If you have endorsements, share those as well.

Create a short sizzle reel containing some of your best work. Provide some social proof that they won’t be alone in accepting your invitation.

5 – SIZE ISN’T THE ONLY THING THAT MATTERS

Many podcast hosts use their audience size to lure guests. If you have a reasonable audience size, surely use it to your advantage. However, don’t stop there. You may be overlooking many other ways you could benefit your guest.

You could offer to give your guest exposure on your website. You may have visitors to your site that do not listen to the show. Promote your guest on the site with a link to their content. This will be an additional benefit.

Mention your guest and interview in your blog. Again, your guest will be reaching additional audience. You are helping them spread their message beyond your podcast.

Your audience for any one of these avenues may be small. However, when you combine the benefit of each distribution method, your proposal for the interview will be more appealing to your guest. Use every audience you have to your advantage.

Offer to promote the interview and your guest’s information to your mailing list. You may have many people that receive your newsletter who may never listen to your podcast. By including a link to your guests website in your mailing, your guest will reach additional people. Take credit for that.

6- DON’T TRIP OVER THE NAMES YOU DROP

Play to your guest’s ego by dropping a few names. If you have had other notable guests on your show in the past, let your guest know. Tell your prospective guest they will be among good company. They will feel more comfortable saying yes to your request.
Use these six tips to help land some of those elusive, big guests for your podcast. Before you know it, you will be chatting it up with some of the best.
If you have never subscribed to the Podcast Talent Coach podcast, please spend two minutes to do so. I would truly appreciate your generosity. Click the link and then the subscribe button in iTunes.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

What Is Holding You Back? – PTC Episode 089

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

What Is Holding You Back? – PTC Episode 089

Holding You Back

At New Media Expo 2015, I met many podcasters that were weeks and months away from launching.

“I’m 30 days away from launching.”

“I’m about 90 days from going live with my podcast.”

“I’m still conducting interviews preparing for my launch this summer.”

What is holding you back?

I know what you feel. I was in your shoes when launching my podcast. Planning. Learning. Researching. Trying to get it just right.

Don’t let perfection keep you from launching.

We often let procrastination creep into our lives disguised as “planning” and “researching”. We tell ourselves we will launch right after we complete a few more steps on our “to do” list.

Here is the problem: The “to do” list keeps growing preventing us from launching.

When I was launching, I started with a blog. The blog grew slowly. I finally came to the realization that podcasters would rather listen to podcasts than read.

My podcast planning began.

I started watching videos on podcasting. Podcasts about podcasting filled my iPhone. Newsletter subscriptions hit my e-mail inbox. The NMX virtual ticket was my next purchase. I even bought books about podcasting. I consumed everything I could find.

I kept telling myself I was preparing. Truth is, I was just procrastinating.

Months into my learning and planning stage, Dave Jackson from School of Podcasting reached out. Dave found my blog and wondered why I didn’t have a podcast.

Dave, don’t you understand? I’m planning. I’m researching. I’m learning. Look at all the work I’m doing.

Dave wasn’t buying it. He had seen this movie before and knew how it ended.

During that 90 minute phone call, Dave pushed me. He challenged me. Dave had confidence that I could launch in a week or two. I simply needed to move.

That was the trick.

Start with the first step.

You’ve heard it before. Every journey begins with the first step.

Your first step may not be in the right direction. However, you make corrections as you go. Eventually, you reach your destination.

People often ask me how I can stand and speak in front of 15,000 people. I started with the first step.

Speaking in front of 20 people in speech class was tough enough.

To earn extra money in college, I began working as a wedding DJ. That job forced me to make announcements to groups of people every weekend.

One weekend it hit me.

People simply are not as interested in my speaking success and failure as I am.

If I mess us while speaking, there is a good chance I will be the only one to remember. People don’t care that much.

The same is true with your podcast. If you mess it up, few will notice let alone care.

Dave Jackson always uses a quote from Ryan Parker from FoodCraftsmen.com. “Nobody will punch you in the face.”

Are you letting self doubt keep you from launching? Is the Impostor Syndrome holding you back?

“Why would anyone care what I have to say?”

“What if I fail?”

“What if I make a fool of myself?”

All of the self doubt is natural.

We tend to make more of our mistakes than anyone else.

Don’t let the fears hold you back. Find someone to push you and hold you accountable.

We could surely work together where I can help that happen. You could also just find a friend that will push you to launch. Either way, push yourself to make it happen.

Now is the time to launch. Not 90 days from now. Not 30 days from now. Not after you have 8 episodes in the can.

Launch now.

Record an episode and get it out. Set some deadlines and take some baby steps.

Let’s make it happen. Pick a date and launch.
I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Top 12 Takeaways From NMX – Episode 087

1 Comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Top 12 Takeaways From NMX – Episode 087

Photo bombed by Mark Harmon. Rob Greenlee, Rob Walch, Erik K. Johnson, Seth Resler and Dave Jackson.
Photo bombed by Mark Harmon. Rob Greenlee, Rob Walch, Erik K. Johnson, Seth Resler and Dave Jackson.

Before we jump in this week, can I ask a quick favor? If you have never subscribed to the Podcast Talent Coach Podcast, can you please take two minutes to do so and leave a review? It will help us get exposed to new podcasters and grow our community. Thanks a million. CLICK HERE.

New Media Expo 2015 wrapped up in Las Vegas last week. What an amazing event.

As Director of the Podcasting Track at NMX, Dave Jackson from the School of Podcasting put together an amazing line up of talent.

Though the sessions were packed full of great information, the relationships created at these events make it more than just a learning opportunity. I had the chance to connect with great people I have known for a bit. Here are just a few:

Dave Jackson – School of Podcasting
Rem Lavictoire – Sci-Fi Movie Podcast
Daniel J. Lewis – The Audacity To Podcast
Bill Conrad – New Media Gold

I also had the chance to meet a few new people and connect with those I have only known over e-mail. Here are a few of those great people:

Rob Walch – Libsyn
Rob Greenlee – Spreaker
Nick Seuberling – Inside The Jungle
Corey Fineran – Ivy Envy
Pat Flynn – Smart Passive Income
Seth Resler – SethResler.com

There were many others that I met and created valuable conversations. New Media Expo is such an incredible event for our podcasting community.

After I attend a conference like this, usually on the flight home, I like to review my notes to find the big points I can put to use as soon as I arrive home. This week, I would like to share with you my top 12 takeaways from NMX.

This list isn’t nearly exhaustive of the things I learned. Some are not even new, but great reminders. We dig into each one in this episode.

1. Schedule it, so it gets done.

2. If advertising is driving people away from traditional media, why are so many podcasters so anxious to add commercials to their show?

3. From Mignon Fogarty: E-mail newsletter is the #1 way to reach your audience. Make sure it has a personal tone.

4. From Chris Ducker: There seems to be a lack of originality in the online business space. Stop being lazy and come up with your own (stuff).

5. From Rob Walch: iOS usage crushes android devices 6:1 in download ratio. (In this episode, we also discuss a few tips for iTunes search he provided.)

6. From Lou Mongello: Don’t forget the importance of face-to-face contact and communication.

7. From Mark Ramsey: Beginnings matter. Radio listeners always come in somewhere in the middle. Podcast listeners always come in at the beginning.

8. From Pat Flynn: I’d rather live a life full of oh wells, than a life full of what ifs.

9. From Dave Jackson: When you wonder why anyone would ever listen to you, remember that you are special (neat). Then, embrace your uniqueness, and understand the bar isn’t set very high.

10. From Daniel J. Lewis: The description in iTunes does not help SEO, but does help the PERSON. Make your episode titles appealing, as if they are your portfolio.

11. From David Hooper: People aren’t paying you to podcast. They are paying you to help solve their problems.

12. From Cliff Ravenscraft: When growing your audience/community, connect to your existing audience and make the experience great for them. Get word of mouth to spread.

Thanks for spending another week with me. I truly appreciate your time.

I also want to thank Joshua and Mercy for the amazing feedback regarding the last episode about your “why”. Many of you sent feedback, which I greatly appreciate. I had wonderful exchanges with Joshua and Mercy that helped me create a great plan. Thanks for all you do for me.

If you have never subscribed to the Podcast Talent Coach podcast, please spend two minutes to do so. I would truly appreciate your generosity.

Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

The Real Reason People Listen To Your Podcast – Episode 083

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

The Real Reason People Listen To Your Podcast – Episode 083

Dreams

Why do people listen to your podcast? Why would anyone spend the time to listen to your show?

Have you ever paused to give that question some consideration?

Why do people spend time with audio at any given point in time?

THE REASONS

There are two primary reasons people listen to audio. Companionship and dreams.

It is human nature to desire companionship. People do not want to be alone. Whether they are driving, jogging, biking, mowing or doing something else by themselves, they want to do it with someone else.

Audio serves the role of companion.

DREAMS

The other reason people spend time with podcasts is to dream. People want to live vicariously through your dreams, stories, challenges and successes. They want to enjoy your success without needing to suffer the pain of your failures.

Tell stories to help fulfill the desire of your listener to dream.

People dream about having a different (and usually better) life. They want to experience those things others are experiencing. The grass always seems greener on the other side of the fence. People crave living the lives of others.

Your listeners want to live vicariously through you. They want to experience your success. They wish they had the courage to do the things you have done. Your fans want to be you in some way or another.

Voyeurism is a reason many people watch the shows they watch, listen to the stories they hear, or read the books they read. They want to experience the lives of others.

MY STORY

Architecture was my original career path. It wasn’t until three years into my architecture degree that I realized radio was the profession I was designed to pursue. I was able to work in a profession I absolutely love. Now, after 25 years in radio, I have taken the talent coaching facet of radio and turned it into a path helping podcasters create amazing content.

That path has now led me to be a speaker at some of the best podcasting conferences in the country. I was a speaker at Podcast Movement 2014. This year, I will give a presentation at New Media Expo in Las Vegas in April. My life is full of amazing events, because I dared to dream and follow my passion.

DREAMS

Your listeners want to dream. Help them.

People eavesdrop on the conversations of others for the very same reasons. They can experience the life of others without the risk of failure. Eavesdropping doesn’t take the courage that it takes to actually live the life.

By telling great stories about your experiences, you help your audience fulfill the desire to live vicariously through you. If your show contains audio of your feats and experiences, you allow your audience to become the voyeurs they desire. When you interview people on your show, you allow your listener to eavesdrop on your conversation.

When you simply lecture as the content of your show, you fail to help your listener experience any of those three desires.

KNOW, LIKE & TRUST

Find new ways to deliver your material to your audience. You will make those important connections that turn into friendships. Those relationships will foster loyalty to your show. Your tribe will follow you wherever you go. That’s a powerful thing.

Tell stories of self-revelation. See where it takes you. You’ll be surprised how many people wish they could be you.

 

I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

5 Ways To Use Social Media To Drive Engagement – Episode 082

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

5 Ways To Use Social Media To Drive Engagement – Episode 082

Bluebird Cafe

Using social media to drive our businesses is nothing new. However, there are a million different philosophies about how to properly use the platforms.

At the Country Radio Seminar in Nashville recently, social media was the topic of quite a few panels, presentations and discussions. I gathered some facts and quite a few tips and tricks for you to use.

There is quite the difference between Facebook and Twitter. Many see the two platforms as similar and equally important. That couldn’t be further from the truth.

83% of people use Facebook everyday. 17% use Pinterest. 12% use Instagram and only 8% use Twitter on a daily basis.

Facebook is personal. The platform is used to connect with family and friends to share life. This is often the first thing people do when they wake up in the morning.

Twitter is interesting, real time communication. The platform allows you to interact with others. Twitter is a discussion when used effectively.

Facebook and Twitter should be used differently. Content lives and is relevant longer on Facebook. Twitter is the here and now.

Here are five ways to use social media more effectively to drive your podcast engagement.

ACKNOWLEDGE

To create community and engagement using social media, make those that follow you feel interesting. Retweet their content. Acknowledge them. Get involved in the discussion.

STOP YELLING

Use social media like you are a fan instead of a marketer yelling at people. Get excited about the things that get your fans excited.

Use the 90/10 rule. 90% of your content should be entertaining and helpful. Only 10% of your posts should be selling anything.

BE PURPOSEFUL

Keep three goals in mind when you are using social media to engage your tribe. Seek to either inform, entertain or appreciate. “Hey, buy my book” is none of the above. You can promote your book while accomplishing one of the three goals. You simply need to be creative.

Most people unfollow someone because of uninteresting content.

STIR EMOTION

Stirring emotion within your tribe will get them excited. Play to their heart instead of their head.

Use positive feelings most of the time. Stir a mix of motions, but always bring it back to a positive, happy ending or hope. Finally, surprise your tribe.

YOU ARE ON CAMERA

Video is really driving engagement on social media. Figure out how to incorporate a little of that into your strategy. Inform, entertain or acknowledge using video once in awhile.

Make personal connections and interactions to drive your engagement. Social media is a great way to accomplish those connections.
The Country Radio Seminar taught me so much. It is also an amazing way to meet new people and make connections. You can do the same. Join me at New Media Expo April 13-16 in Las Vegas. I would love to see you when I present my session on powerful storytelling.

Learn how to use stories to create that engagement and powerful call to action. Meet a ton of new people to help you move your business forward. Use my affiliate link and promo code to save $100 on your registration here.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

52 Tips To Attract Podcast Traffic – Episode 078

1 Comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

52 Tips To Attract Podcast Traffic

I'm a sucker for a great roller coaster.
I’m a sucker for a great roller coaster.

 

Here are 52 ways to engage your audience, attract them to visit your website and draw them to your podcast.

When you shine the spotlight on your listener, they will tell others about it.

When engagement is easy for your listener with a clear benefit, traffic and engagement will increase.

Get all 52 ideas here:

www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/traffic.html

 

 

  1. Network with shows in the same genre.
  2. Help people meet. Create community.
  3. Use the phrase, “Next time you’ll hear …”
  4. Get interviewed on other shows.
  5. Make your artwork standout.
  6. Write great show notes that your audience can use with links.
  7. Create business cards that promote the show instead of your phone number.
  8. Create a contest and give something away on our show.
  9. Leave feed back for other shows.

 

Get all 52 ideas here:

www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/traffic.html

 

I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

5 Questions To Find Your Podcast Focus – Episode 077

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

5 Questions To Find Your Focus – PTC Episode 077

Focus

 

SUBSCRIBE TO THE SHOW ON iTUNES HERE.

itunes logo

 

Whether you are a seasoned podcaster or brand new to the game, refining your podcast focus is always an important step to keep your listener engaged.

Brand new podcasters can use these five questions to refine the focus of their podcast idea.

Podcasters have been doing it for awhile can use these though starters in order to step back and assess the quality of their content and determine if they are reaching the goals established.

These questions will help you find content that your listener desires, solve a problem your listener encounters often, and find topics that make it easy for you to create that sticky content.

Sharpen your podcast focus using these five questions.

What are you passionate about?

– You will find it much easier to create content on a regular basis if you are discussing something that stirs your passion.

 

What are your unique qualities?

– Your unique qualities will separate you from the other podcasts in your niche.

 

What topics tend to occupy your conversations?

– If you find it easy to often discuss a topic in conversation, you will find it easy to discuss it regularly on your podcast.

 

What do you like to do in your spare time?

– Your passions usually occupy your spare time. If you find those things that occupy your spare time, you may have a solid topic for your podcast.

 

What topics do people ask you about most?

– If people are asking you about particular topics, that is usually a good signal there is a problem there along with some interest.

 

Make your content more engaging. Use these 5 questions to sharpen your podcast focus.

 

I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Here Is A Quick Way To Make Them Care – Episode 074

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Here Is A Quick Way To Make Them Care – Episode 074

freeimage-5478254

Making your listener care is the only way to get them to listen and more importantly come back again.

I’m sure you’ve heard the phrase “what’s in it for me?”

Your audience will be asking this very question every time they tune into your podcast. Your introduction better tell your listener exactly how your topic will affect them. You need to hook them right at the beginning with an intriguing introduction. If you don’t hook them early, they will be gone in search of something more captivating.

When your audience knows what is in it for them, they begin to care.

Lead with an intriguing introduction.

Start your podcast with the benefit right up front. Hook them early.

This is true for your podcast in general as well as each individual topic. Your intriguing introduction should hook your audience, let them know exactly what to expect, and allow them to enjoy the story.

What do you hope your audience will take away from this particular discussion? Your introduction should spell it out. It should set up what is to come.

If your goal is to make your listener laugh at the horrible restaurant service you received, lead with it. “When we were out to eat this weekend, I couldn’t get the waiter to pay attention to our table if I had been waving $20 bills in the air.” The audience will now have time to enjoy the vivid details of your restaurant story rather than trying to figure out your point.

When you begin your story with the details, your listener spends energy trying to determine the point you are trying to make. They are trying to figure out what the story is about.

Have you ever been stuck listening to someone tell a story while you’re thinking, “Will he ever get to the point?” That is what we are trying to avoid.

Here is an example of a story you might hear. “This weekend I had some time on my hands. I figured it would be a good weekend to clean out the attic. I dug through the garage to find the ladder and get at it.” Are we telling a story about a mishap in the attic? Is this story just recapping the weekend? Maybe it is about discovering something in the attic. You don’t know. I haven’t told you. There is no lead to this story.

To hook your audience and allow them to truly enjoy the story, lead with an intriguing introduction.

Be A Storyteller For Success.

As you create your podcast, become a great storyteller. Great storytellers create fans.

Interest in your story never remains constant. Your information can only become entertainment when interest is rising. If interest is falling, the show is becoming boring and is no longer entertainment. A great story continues to develop the plot and raise the interest.

Have you ever sat through a long, monotonous story that never seems to end? You stare and wonder if the speaker actually has a point to this monologue. You pray for your cell phone to ring and save you. That scenario is exactly what you want to avoid. Practice becoming a great storyteller.

Stories help define your character and personality. You should always be yourself. It is difficult to play a character consistently and tell great stories. Your true feelings and identity will always be revealed in the stories you tell. If you are successful hiding your true self, you simply are not telling great stories. Vivid details and interesting points that stir emotions in your listeners can only come from your true feelings. Reveal your true character. Storytellers create raving fans.

Make them forget.

When your audience is listening to your podcast, make them forget they are listening to a recording. Take them to another place. Make your storytelling so strong that the imagination of your listener puts her in another time and place. That’s what great storytelling is all about. That’s what great relationships are all about.

People seek entertainment to escape from reality. They want entertainment like movies, concerts, television, radio and podcasts to make them forget about all of their problems. Entertainment that succeeds will take the audience member to some other place and time.

When you record your podcast, you need to create that wonderful theater of the mind. It doesn’t matter if you’re reading fiction or talking about gardening, put your audience in the moment. Make your listener forget they are listening to a recording.

Become a great storyteller, take your listener to another place and time to make them forget about their problems, and hook them early by leading with an intriguing introduction.

Get the story development worksheet as part of the pack of worksheets available for free online at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Creating Word Of Mouth – Episode 071

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Creating Word Of Mouth – Episode 071

Word-Of-Mouth

How do you create a show that people remember? My theory is simple. If you want word of mouth do things worth talking about.

That particular phrase is one I learned from Seth Godin. However, I learned that theory years and years ago.

Learning From Radio

When I started in radio 25 years ago, my goal was to make every break a home run. Creating a show that creates buzz appears to be a daunting task.

A typical radio show is four hours. With an average of four talk breaks or bits an hour, a daily show would include sixteen bits a show. At three minutes a bit for a morning show, we talking about 48 minutes of material. That would roughly equal to an average podcast.

After a few years in radio, I realized that creating sixteen different pieces of content that are stellar and buzz-worthy is nearly impossible on a regular basis. It is also unnecessary. Your listener will not remember all sixteen things you do on the show this week.

People remember one big thing. Create the one killer bit that will create some buzz.

You can’t manufacture marketing and make people talk. The buzz is created when you do something amazing. To discover what is amazing, you need to continue to try different things.

You will be surprised by what moves people. People will mention hearing things on your show that you never dreamed would make a connection. The more you receive that feedback, the more you will be able to recognize it when it happens.

Be occasionally great rather than consistently good.

You don’t win by removing mistakes. You win by giving your audience a reason to listen. Occasionally great bits will give your listener those reasons.

If you conduct interviews on your show, you do not need to make every question Earth shattering. You need one or two great questions that people will remember. Your listener will say, “Did you hear what she asked her guest?” The answer will be one great question, not the entire interview.

Make your listener remember one thing. Consistently good is admission to the game. Occasionally great wins.

Examples of Occasionally Great

Let’s looks at some examples of both.

In baseball, who are some of the players that come to mind?

How about Willie Keeler and Jimmy Rollins? They hold the record for most Major League Baseball consecutive games with a hit.

Willie Keeler is #2 with 45 hits in 1896. Jimmy Rollins is #8 with 38 in 2005.

This means they consistently get on base. Valuable to the team. But hardly memorable.

How about Barry Bonds, Hank Aaron, Babe Ruth, Willie Mays, and Alex Rodriguez? These are the Top 5 of the list of players with the most Major League Baseball home runs.

Other than Babe Ruth at .342, the other four had batting averages between .298 and .305. In comparison, Keeler hit .341 in his career.

These home run guys got a hit less than one out of three tries. Less than stellar, yet memorable. Occasionally great.

Maybe American football is your sport.

Would you consider Chad Pennington one of the most memorable quarterbacks to every play the game? He holds a 66% career passing percentage in the National Football League over 10 seasons playing for 2 different teams. That puts him at #2 on the list.

Pennington completed 2 of every 3 passing attempts. Pretty consistent. Not quite memorable.

Could you put Bart Starr and Joe Namath on a list of great quarterbacks?

Bart Starr was the QB of Superbowl 1 & 2. Joe Namath was also a Superbowl quarterback. Their stories are legends.

Starr is #71 on the passing percentage list at 57% over 15 seasons. Namath is #163 on the same list at 50% over 8 seasons. Less consistent, but memorable.

Let’s talk acting.

Christopher Lee has made 276 movie and acting appearances. He has been in Dracula and The Lord Of The Rings.

Robert Loggia was in Scarface and made 223 other film and acting appearances.

You saw Ernie Hudson in The Crow. If not there, he was in 190 other movies and productions. You wold probably recognize him if you saw him.

All three are solid, consistent actors. They are hardly household names.

Every heard of Tom Hanks. He has only made 37 films and other appearances. Less than 20% of the number Hudson has appeared in. Less than 14% of Lee.

On the other hand, to date, Tom Hanks’ films have averaged $96.3M per movie. A few have been occasionally great and won Oscars. Not nearly the number of appearances. His home runs make up for it.

Will Smith has made 29 theatrical appearances. His movies average $127M. Fewer films. More blockbusters.

Will Smith is also known as a hip hop star. However, he has only released 4 solo albums. Two of his albums went gold. One is 2x platinum. One is 9x platinum.

Will Smith actually released more albums as half of DJ Jazzy Jeff & The Fresh Prince. That act released 5 albums. Three of those reached gold, one platinum and one 3x platinum.

These guys are all huge, because they are occasionally great.

Find Your One Thing

Don’t try to be everything to everyone. Be the best at one thing.

What are you known for? What is the one thing you can do on the episode this week that your listener will remember?

Find your one thing. Create word of mouth. Be occasionally great.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Erik@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Thankful Podcast – Episode 069

2 Comments

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Thankful Podcast – Episode 069

Thank You

We celebrated Thanksgiving here in the United States last week. It is a wonderful time of year when we step back and give thanks for all we have. This week, I would like to share a few things for which I am thankful with the hope that I might help you discover some inspiration.

Three years ago, I began my journey to help podcasters refine their art. I was not sure where I was headed. I only knew that I wanted to follow my passion.

Podcasting wasn’t my original passion. It was architecture. From the time I was 12, I knew I wanted to be an architect. Through middle school and high school, my classes led me down that path.

While getting my college degree in architecture, after working two years as a draftsman, I found my way into radio. The architecture degree required a few electives. My younger brother worked at a radio station and with me as a disc jockey. I thought radio sounded like an entertaining elective.

The class was Broadcasting For The Non-Major. The class led me to become the music director of the campus station. After a few months, I had a part-time job at a local radio station.

Since I was so close to finishing, I decided to complete my architecture degree. Once complete, I continued to work in radio and pursue my passion. Broadcasting become my life.

Architecture and radio are actually quite similar. Both require the ability to be creative within a set of guidelines. Both professions require a combination of creative and analytical skills.

After a few years in radio, I discovered my true passion was helping talent refine their craft and content. I fell in love with creating content that captured the imagination of people and created effective calls to action.

The world of podcasting is like the new frontier. We are able to create with very few parameters. Along with that freedom comes responsibility. You must set your own rules.

That is my passion. Each day, I have the privilege of helping wonderful podcasters hone their craft and create amazing content to reach their goals. For that, I am truly grateful.

That is the foundation of this thankful podcast.

I didn’t get here on my own. There are quite a few people that helped me achieve all that I have. This Thanksgiving, I want to thank those that have helped me. As you continue your journey, you may find some inspiration here as well.

This is my thankful podcast.

My Family

The support I receive from my wife and two wonderful children is priceless. They encourage me with every step I take. Find inspiration in the ones you love. Let that love and encouragement lead you to great things.

You

You are the reason I do this show every week. Knowing that I help you with your content, your art and your passion drives me to create every week. The fact that you give me 30 minutes of your time every week means the world to me. Please know that I am thankful for that gift every time it comes my way.

Dave Jackson

When I began down this path, Dave Jackson was the first to reach out to me and offer help. Most of my achievements were partly due to the help Dave provided.

Dave runs the School of Podcasting. His knowledge of podcasting and resources have helped me every step of the way. I cannot possibly thank him enough.

Jeff Beals

Before I even discovered podcasting would be my path, Jeff Beals was an inspiration. As part of my mastermind group, Jeff was my sounding board. His words and guidance always motivated me.

Jeff has a great book called “Selling Saturdays”. He interviewed football coaches regarding recruiting, selling and inspiring. The book contains wonderful stories. No matter if you are selling ideas or widgets, this book will help you achieve.

Rem Lavictoire

When I am stuck in a rut, Rem Lavictoire is always there with a few words of inspiration. I’m not sure how he knows. His e-mail shows up in my e-mail box just at the right time.

If you have attended New Media Expo or Podcast Movement in 2014, I am sure you have seen Rem. He is usually the first to the microphone after a session with some of the best questions you will ever hear.

Rem has given me inspiration and motivation through his friendship. I am grateful for all the support he has provided over the years. Rem has a great podcast call the Sci-Fi Movie Podcast. Find him at www. Sci-FiMoviePodcast.com.

Kenn Blanchard

Kenn and I met through Dave Jackson. Kenn Blanchard has a podcast that has really inspired me in my faith and fatherhood. His podcast is called “Black Man With A Gun”. Kenn offers words of wisdom and inspiration every week. His Father’s Day show is one of my all-time favorites. Check him out when you can.

 

A few men have inspired me from afar. Through their teachings, they have inspired, mentored and taught me along this journey.

Dan Miller inspired me through his “48 Days” teachings. His podcast and books have motivated me to pursue work that I love.

Gary Vaynerchuk and his book “Crush It” showed me the way to structure and achieve all that I have.

Brendon Burchard helped me launch Podcast Talent Coach through his teaching in the “Millionaire Messenger”. His book and CDs inspired me to share my knowledge with the world.

This Thanksgiving, these are the people for which I am most thankful. Without you, I would not be able to do this every week. Thank you for being part of my journey. Let me know how I can help you in any way possible. To you I dedicate this thankful podcast.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Erik@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Powerful Marketing With Podcast Benefits – Episode 065

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Listener Benefit Of Your Podcast – Episode 065

I was listening to the biography of Steve Jobs by Walter Isaacson the other day. It really got me thinking about powerful marketing and how to create it.

The particular section of the book that caught my attention discussed the “1984” apple commercial. The message of the commercial was that apple would save humanity from conformity. It was a nod to George Orwell’s novel “Nineteen Eighty-Four”.

http://youtu.be/axSnW-ygU5g

The “1984” commercial, when viewed by the Apple Board of Directors, was deemed unacceptable to air. The board suggested the advertising agency sell both the 30-second and 60-second time slots they had purchased during the 1984 during the Super Bowl.

The ad agency sold the :30, but didn’t try very hard to unload the :60. Jobs and a few others found the funds to run the commercial one time. The only other time it was aired was once on a few local stations.

With that one airing, the “1984” commercial created millions of dollars in buzz. Network news shows were talking about the commercial. It was the top commercial of the Super Bowl that year. In fact, Advertising Age magazine named the spot one of the Top 50 Greatest Commercials.

The commercial was almost never seen nationally.

What makes marketing like this so powerful? How can we make our podcast message that strong?

You vs. Me

Great marketing is like a mirror. It is a reflection of the customer, not of the company. Great products that use great marketing are focused on the needs, wants and desires of their customers. To turn your podcast into a great brand, focus on your listener and not on yourself.

Scheels had a great commercial for their snowboarding gear. The commercial was completely focused on the lifestyle of the snowboarder. It didn’t feature all of the great salespeople or wide aisles in the store or sale prices. The commercial was a mirror reflecting the customer.

To turn your information into engaging entertainment with your podcast, focus on the listener. Use words like “you” instead of “I”, “me” or “we”. Convey your content from the point of view of your listener. They will feel appreciated. They will be engaged. Your podcast will become a relationship. Success will follow. When it is You vs. Me, always pick you.

It’s the Snap, Crackle, Pop … Not the Puffed Rice

Rice. Sugar. Salt. Malt flavor. Mmmmm. I can’t wait to get a bowl of that!

Your listeners aren’t attracted by the contents of your show. They don’t care if your show discusses money or business or politics or sports. All your listener cares about is the benefits they will receive from your show.

Here are a few podcast descriptions I found today on iTunes.

“Those people that make videos on YouTube now have their own audio podcast. Hope you will stay awhile.”

“(unnamed podcast) produces original stories each week for families around the world. Each week on the (unnamed podcast), we’ll be sharing a free story from one of our original story series.”

“The world’s favorite podcast about old video games reaches its next stage! Join (hosts) and a variety of guests as they discuss the favorite games and topics of yesteryear.”

I’m sure these are solid podcasts. They were all listed in the “New & Noteworthy”. The content may be great, but the descriptions lack any snap, crackle or pop.

People get attracted to your show by the benefits, not ingredients.

Consumers by the fun of the Snap, Crackle & Pop. They aren’t buying the puffed rice.

Listeners are seeking the fun of learning life’s lessons through stories, not original stories for families.

The audience wants nostalgic memories of teenage afternoons wasted in the arcade in front of Donkey Kong, Ms. Pac Man and Dragon’s Lair, not discussion of your favorite games and topics.

When a listener decides to listen to your podcast, they ask, “What will this podcast do for me?” If the answer is topics and discussions, your listener is probably moving on. If it is nostalgic memories and comedic bits of “name that video game theme”, you might just entice him to check out your show.

There is a reason the fun of the experience is on the front of the box and the ingredients are relegated to the side. You need to sell the fun.

This week, examine your podcast description. Are you leading with the benefits? Are you selling the results? Make it exciting.

I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Erik@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

When Did Marketing Become Taboo? – Episode 063

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

When Did Marketing Become Taboo?

When Did Marketing Become Taboo

I was listening to Daniel J. Lewis on “The Audacity To Podcast” Sept. 15th episode “How To Deal With Negative Feedback Toward You”. When did commercials become bad?

Here is the comment/quote:

“I feel like I just listened to an hour long infomercial. Daniel, I recognize your need to cross-promote and I realize that your income comes from podcasting. I feel overloaded with commercial information and have quite a difficult time separating out the real content from the commercial content. It’s just too much. Sorting out the things I would consider using from the things I have tried in the past but didn’t work from the commercials just wasn’t worth the hour I wasted this afternoon listening to your podcast today.”

Daniel goes to great lengths to avoid being self-promotional. He mentions his products at the end or when it is contextually relevant. Hence the “I have a tough time separating out the real content from the commercial content”. If one blends into the other, it fits with the content. Daniel hardly creates his podcast to be one big commercial.

On the other hand, why are the product mentions so bad? How do you find out about great products? How did you find out about the last great movie you saw? How did you discover the last great book you read? Didn’t someone tell you about it? Regardless if that person was a friend or part of a marketing message, that communication helped you discover new things. That is what marketing is all about.

Sure, not every marketing message is going to be tailored to your needs. There will be some that might miss the mark. It could be the mass mailing you received from the pizza joint down the street because you have a family of 4. It could be the political flyer you received because of your party affiliation.

Is it that difficult to ignore the irrelevant? Throw it out.

So, how do we make our marketing message relevant? How do we make the message valuable instead of an interruption?

Are You Shouting?

You can’t shout your way into a person’s trust circle. They only way to gain trust is to add value. Give them something they can use. Building trust is the foundation of revenue generation for your podcast.

As you build trusting relationships with your podcast, continue to ask yourself, “How am I helping my listener?” Continue to give, and the trust will develop over time.

When you begin every discussion with your product, needs or wants, people will tune you out. You will begin to sound (and be treated) like advertisements for used cars. Shouting doesn’t work. Your listener won’t care and will rarely return.

Daniel does the opposite in “The Audacity To Podcast”. He usually starts by helping his listener. Then, if it fits, he will recommend a product or service to his audience.

Serve first, many times over. Then and only then can you effectively sell.

Shows like the “Dave Ramsey Show”, “48 Days To The Work You Love” and “The Audacity To Podcast” are all designed to help their listeners first. Sure, they all have products to sell as the end result. However, they never begin with their product. The discussions on these shows always begin with the listener’s needs in mind first.

Why is it bad to sell? Why must podcasting be only altruistic? If I have something that might help you solve your problems, why would it be wrong to recommend it to you while making a few dollars at the same time?

If you loved mowing grass, would it be right to expect you to mow my grass for free? You love to do it. Why should I pay you? If it is acceptable to charge you for mowing your yard, why isn’t acceptable to earn some money for helping you with your business?

As you prepare for your show, find great ways to help. Your help may come in the form of entertainment. You may serve as companionship for your podcast listener. Help them find other forms of companionship as well. If your podcast is only one hour per week, there are 167 more hours in the week that aren’t occupied by your show. Your listeners will surely need more companionship to fill a few of those hours. Help your audience fill those hours, too.

Are you building trust, or are you shouting? Develop the friendship by delivering companionship.

Are You Delivering What They Seek?

People listen to podcasts, the radio and other audio for companionship. They don’t want to drive alone. People have an inner desire to be around other people. Companionship is the reason people listen to your podcast, even if you are selling something. Your listener will always ask, “What’s in it for me?”

Make your listener feel comfortable, as if they are spending time with a friend. When people listen to guys like Adam Carolla, they feel like they know him. Women feel like they could actually hang out with Ellen DeGeneres when they watch her show. Leo Laporte comes across as your friend when you listen to his tech podcast. Each of these shows are about that comfortable connection.

When you make your listener feel comfortable, they will come back time and again. You are their companionship. Are you delivering what they seek?

This week, start with your listener in mind. Ask yourself, “What is in it for them?” I want you to feel confident about your content. You will not please everyone. Focus on your one target listener you have defined using the Target Listener Worksheet at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

If you upset a few people, they either get over it or they would never be your customer in the first place. At least you are doing something to make them care.

Let me know how I can help you with your podcast. E-mail your questions to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can also find other tools including worksheets, a workbook and videos to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let me teach you how to turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

7 Common Podcast Mistakes That Drive Listeners Away – Episode 060

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

7 Common Podcast Mistakes That Drive Listeners Away – Episode 060

Podcast Mistakes

Listeners have many, many options for their entertainment. When you create your show, you are not simply competing with all of the other podcasts in the space. You are competing with all of the other entertainment options available to your listeners.

TV, CDs, radio, satellite radio, on demand video, Youtube, audiobooks. The options are endless.

It is only a start to create great content that attracts your listener and is better than every other options available to your listener at that time. You also need to ensure that the things you do within the episode do not drive your podcast listeners away. Many podcasters give their audience reason to leave without even realizing it.

This week, we will discuss 7 most common podcast mistakes that drive listeners away. There are many others. See how many of these 7 common podcast mistakes you recognize from your show. Then, let’s figure out how to fix them to make your show even stronger.

You Focus On Yourself

You can have anything you want in life as long as you help enough other people get what they want. Make your show less about you and more about helping your listener. You can tell your story and then frame the result around the listener’s perspective.

You Are Not Engaging And Use No Stories

Stories are powerful. We discussed this power in the past few episodes. Pull you listener into your content by making it personal. Then, turn the mirror on them. How can your stories help your listener?

You Are Talking At Me, Instead Of To Me

Treat your listener as an audience of one. Audio is a personal medium. People listen by themselves while creating personal visions in their own head. Have a one-on-one conversation with your listener. Talk to your listener and not at them.

You Are Unfocused & Unprepared

Know your goal. You cannot get to your destination unless you know where you want to go. Develop your goal. Then, be prepared. Gather your material and information before you begin recording.

You Open The Door

Let your content flow from one topic to the other like a conversation. Avoid “now it’s time for …” When you are having a conversation at a party, you don’t say, “… and that is what my kids are doing. Now, it’s time to talk about my golf game.” You just flow into the next topic organically. Also, be sure to take the first exit so you do not overstay your welcome.

You Are Not Interested

Be interesting by being interested. Get rid of the stale questions and content. Make your self unique by being curious.

You Lack Show Biz

This is show business. Use theater of the mind. Make your audio powerful by transporting your listener to another place and time. Add some flavor with creative sound effects, powerful production elements and some audio magic.

 

Let me know how I can help you with your podcast. E-mail your questions to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can also find other tools including worksheets, a workbook and videos to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let me teach you how to turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

The Secret To Know, Like And Trust – PTC Episode 057

2 Comments

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Secrets to Know, Like and Trust – PTC Episode 057
Four Essential Elements of Powerful Storytelling

Trust Me

WHY STORYTELLING

Have you noticed a lot of the business interview podcasts sound the same? We are hearing the same guests answer the same questions time and time again. How do you become unique in this sea of sameness?

Storytelling can transform your podcast. Your personal experiences and stories make you unique. No one has experienced the things you have experienced in the same way you have. If you want to stand out from every other podcast, share your personal stories during your show.

People do business with other people they know, like and trust. Your stories create that knowledge. That is where true friendships begin.

Stories help define your character and personality. If you want your listener to get to know you, share those personal connections. Connect, motivate and inspire your audience with your stories.

Don’t fit in, stand out.

Your personal experiences are the only way to make the content your own. Great songwriters do it. Great filmmakers do it. Share your stories and stand out.

ENGAGEMENT

In podcasting, you cannot afford to be boring. Interest in your story never remains constant. Your information can only become entertainment when interest is rising. A great story continues to develop the plot and raise the interest.

To create engagement, tell great stories. Keep the interest of your listener rising.

Date your listeners. You need to earn the privilege of talking to people who want to be talked to and selling things to people who want to be sold to. To earn that privilege, you need to build friendship.

Great friendships are developed through self revelation. When you share your personal thoughts and feelings with an individual through stories, you begin to create a bond with that person. It is life enrichment. Making our lives better through friendship is the reason we do not live is seclusion.

Over time, sharing stories will begin to build trust with your listener. Your stories share your values and beliefs.

Practice becoming a great storyteller.

GREAT STORYTELLERS

Practice being a great storyteller. Have the courage to listen to yourself. Hear and have courage to record your personal connections to the events happening around you.

When you use your podcast to create friendships, you are asking people to spend time with your every week. People share time with others that they like. They are asking themselves, “Would I enjoy taking a one-hour car ride with this person every week?”

People listen to audio while they drive, run and workout so they are not alone. They use the audio as companionship. Let your listener get to know you.

Your stories will also let others live vicariously through you. Your listener can enjoy your story of struggle and success without enduring the hard work and pain. Let them enjoy your stories.

ELEMENTS OF GREAT STORIES

There are four essential elements of great stories.

  • Engaging introduction
  • Reveal the details
  • Powerful Resolution
  • What else?

Engaging Introduction

Give them a reason to care. What do you want the audience to feel? Your stories make you human. Will it be humorous, compelling or tragic. My talent coach Bill McMahon would always ask, “What do you hope to make the audience laugh at, marvel at or better understand?”

Your listener can experience various emotions through your stories. You could elicit joy, sympathy, empathy, anger, tragedy, tenderness, humor, rage, patriotism or many others. Emotions make that personal connection to your story.

Pull your listener into the story. Your engaging introduction is a roadmap. It should be a solid headline that tells your listener exactly where your story will go. “Tell me if I’m gonna go to Hell for this…”

Reveal the details

Details are more believable than generalities. Your details will make your story come to life.

When you develop your details, use all 5 senses. Draw the picture in the mind’s eye of your listener. Make the story come to life. Put your listener right there in the moment. This is theater of the mind.

Your details reveal specifics about your thoughts, beliefs and character.

Resolution

Your resolution should be a powerful reframing of introduction. Your will know when you reach your conclusion when you have successfully achieved the emotional goal set at the beginning. What did you hope to make your audience laugh at, marvel at or better understand? When you’ve achieved that goal, get to the resolution.

What else?

Asking “What Else” will transform your show. Let your story lead to something bigger. Maybe you turn your story into a discussion on Facebook. Maybe your story leads into an interview. What else can you do with it? Create some great entertainment.

HOW YOU CAN BE A STORYTELLER

What do you want to make your listener feel?
What is the engaging set up?
How will it be revealed in the story with vivid details?
What is the resolution?
What else can you do with it?

I’d love to help you create great stories with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can also find other tools including worksheets, a workbook and videos to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

3 Step To Create Your Avatar – PTC 055

1 Comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

3 Steps To Create Your Avatar – PTC Episode 055

Hi Erik, thanks for your awesome podcast. I have one question for you You define your avatar with a bunch of well-crafted questions, but where do you get the data to answer them? Is it hard data you have got from your following (if any)? Is it just a fruit of your imagination? Is it a mix of both? How much of the avatar is based on hard data, and how much is a projection of yourself defining it? Thanks and keep up the awesome work!
-Alessandro

Create a unique avatar

Great question, Alessandro! It is actually a little bit of both. It will evolve over time.

Our goal is to create a vision of that one, unique, ideal listener.

There are really three steps to creating your ideal listener.  Each step relates to the life cycle of your podcast.

Step 1

If you are just starting out, you need to create your ideal customer out of your imagination.

  • Who would you like your ideal customer to be? Start there.
  • Who do you want?
  • Who will listen and get involved
  • Who will be best served by your content
  • Who will buy your stuff

Step 2

Once you begin to get some feedback from your audience, refine your target with that information.

  • Who is posting in your comments
  • Who is sending your e-mail
  • Who is asking for more information

Step 3

Finally, when you have an audience of decent size, survey them.

  • It does not need to be a formal survey
  • One of strongest is an e-mail often used that simply says “where an I help you”
  • To get specific demographic info, you will need a formal survey
  • Ask questions that will help you know and serve them better
  • Do not ask questions that will not give you info you can use and will only waste the time of your listener

Overall, you want your avatar to represent that individual that in most engaged with your show and likely to take action when you make that request.

Audience Of One

Knowing your target audience will allow you to treat your audience as an audience of one.

As you are creating your podcast, treat your audience like you are talking to each person individually. This is critical when creating a trusting relationship with your audience.

I hear many shows address their audience as a group with comments like “hello everyone” or “hey guys”. Each person in your audience is listening to you as an individual. Audio is a very personal medium. Many times, they are listening with headphones. It is just you and her. Talk to her just like that.

Addressing a crowd on the radio began when radio began. As radio was just being created, station owners needed content to broadcast. Radio programming began with rebroadcasting live, theater events. The person on the stage would address the crowd as “ladies and gentleman”.

As radio progressed, live audiences were eliminated. However, people on the radio continued to address the audience as a group. It was fitting. The family still gathered around the radio before television was introduced to the family room. An on-air personality could address the audience as a group and be justified in doing so.

Radio then became a personal medium. The television replaced the radio as family entertainment. In-car and headphones became the preferred method of radio listening. Each listener was now creating images and visions in his or her own head that were unique to their imagination. Their thoughts were different from those of any other listener. The conversation was now between the person on the air and the individual listening.

Unfortunately, radio personalities continued to address the listener as a group. “It has always been done this way.” The disconnect began.

Podcasts are even more individualistic than radio. Most people select a podcast because of their own tastes. Groupthink does not play a factor as it would to select a movie or television show for the family. It is one person listening on their own to a show that interests them.

If you are talking to your listener as if they are in a group, using plural terms like everyone and you guys and you all, your listener will wonder who you are addressing. They will think, “You guys? I’m listening by myself. Who are you talking to?” In the end, they will not follow your call-to-action, because they will think someone else in your “group” will handle it. Talk to an audience of one and build that relationship with each listener individually.

 

I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can also find other tools including worksheets, a workbook and videos to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Never Know Who You Help – PTC Episode 054

2 Comments

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

You Never Know Who Your Podcast Might Help

PTC Episode 054

Who You Help
Tough to bathe with no thumbs

I received a piece of feedback from Kenn Blanchard the other day. He said he was inspired so much by my “chit chat” episode that he went back into the studio to completely rerecord his latest episode.

Kenn creates a few podcasts. I listen to “Black Man With A Gun” He recently launched a second called “Motorcycle Radio”.

We talk a lot about the help you provide people with your podcast. As you create your content, keep in mind that you never know who you might be helping or how much that help may mean.

Gary Vaynerchuk has an entire chapter in his book “Crush It” devoted to care. It is probably the easiest chapter you will ever read. It is also possibly the toughest chapter to execute well.

Extra Mile

It is unfortunate in business today that “going the extra mile” isn’t even necessary to stand out most of the time. Being consistent and delivering on your brand’s promise will usually make you better than most of the competition.

It amazes me that delivering a simple recap after the job is complete to one of our clients can create astonishment on their part. They are so numb to the average lack of care from their other suppliers that any sense of attention will get them to take notice.

I’ve seen many, many bands go through the motions. I am not trying to make excuses. However, It’s like a couple trying to get back together after a breakup. The relationship ended for a reason the first time. Getting together again may be good for a beer. Any longer will probably only make you realize why you broke up in the first place … even when you’re making hundreds of thousands of dollars to do it.

Trust Circle

You can’t shout your way into a person’s trust circle. They only way to gain trust is to add value. Give them something they can use. Building trust is the foundation of revenue generation for your podcast.

As you build trusting relationships with your podcast, continue to ask yourself, “How am I helping my listener?” Continue to give, and the trust will develop over time.

When you begin every discussion with your product, needs or wants, people will tune you out. You will begin to sound (and be treated) like advertisements for used cars. Shouting doesn’t work. Your listener won’t care and will rarely return.

Serve first, many times over. Then and only then can you effectively sell.

Shows like the 48 Days To The Work You Love, School of Podcasting and Internet Business Mastery are all designed to help their listeners first. Sure, they all have products to sell as the end result. However, they never begin with their product. The discussions on these shows always begin with the listener’s needs in mind first.

As you prepare for your show, find great ways to help. Your help may come in the form of entertainment. You may serve as companionship for your podcast listener. Help them find other forms of companionship as well. If your podcast is only one hour per week, there are 167 more hours in the week that aren’t occupied by your show. Your listeners will surely need more companionship to fill a few of those hours. Help your audience fill those hours, too.

Let’s Help Each Other

I would love to answer any question you might have. I have been in broadcasting for well over 20 years. Coaching on-air radio talent has been part of my day-to-day role since 1995. Studying and developing marketing and promotional campaigns for our radio stations and clients is also something I do on a regular basis.

If you could use some help in any of these areas, please shoot me an e-mail at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Your questions will help me refine my show. You will help me select topics. It will also make the show much more enjoyable for you. I would love to hear your questions and offer you podcast help.

If you could take a minute to shoot me an e-mail, or even comment on any of my posts that may have helped you, I would truly appreciate it. Making this show better is always my goal.

Let me know how I can help you. In turn, let’s help each other.

I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can also find other tools including worksheets, a workbook and videos to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

You Are An Expert – PTC Episode 053

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

You Are An Expert – PTC Episode 053

Podcast ExpertPodcast ExpertPodcast ExpertPodcast Expert

As I was grabbing a quick bite to eat at the local fast food restaurant earlier this week, I was reminded we are all an expert at something to someone.

After ordering my food, I pulled up to the drive thru window of the fast food restaurant to pay. My total came to $4.38. I handed the kid in the window $5.38. The amount completely puzzled him.

He looked at the currency for quite some time. I was beginning to think he didn’t realize I needed change. After what seemed like two minutes, he looked around for his manager.

When he realized his manager was helping another customer, he looked back at the money trying to devise a plan B.

The kid finally stuck his head into the window and asked, “Are you good at math?”

I said, “The total was $4.38, right?” He replied with, “Yeah.” I said, “You owe me a dollar.”

“Oh, that’s what I thought,” he replied with relief as he ducked to the register to retrieve my dollar.

At that point, I realized we are all an expert to somebody. Even people who do not normally deal in American currency could probably guess that $5.38 minus $4.38 equals $1. To this kid, I could have been Newton or Archimedes or Pythagoras.

You may not feel you are an expert in your field, because you don’t have the experience or success equal to others. On the other hand, realize you have more experience than the beginner.

If you think about where you were two years ago, you are much more experienced than a person in that position now. Help those folks make the two-year journey to get to the point where you are now.

Six Ways To Demonstrate Your Expertise

Help people learn what you know.

Help people find the tools you have discovered through your journey.

Help people find the right people in the industry where they can learn more.

Find people who are in a position that you have conquered.
Share your stories of triumph and woe to encourage those following behind you.

Help those that do not have quite as much knowledge and experience that you have.

If you have been in your field for any length of time, there will always be somebody with less experience than you. Find those people, and help them succeed.

You may not be number one in the field. That doesn’t matter. You can always be seen as an expert in the eyes of someone at some point. You simply need to find them. Then, help them in your expert sort of way. Who knows, maybe you are good at math.

I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can also find other tools including worksheets, a workbook and videos to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

At Last, The Secret To Podcast Chit Chat Revealed – PTC Episode 052

1 Comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

At Last, The Secret To Podcast Chit Chat Revealed

PTC Episode 052

Podcast Chit Chat

Chit Chat at the beginning of your podcast has long been discussed. Is it appropriate? How much is too much?  When are you wasting the time of the pirates listening?

I was listening to a marketing podcast once. I just about gave up and moved onto another show. I had to force myself to stick with it. You would have thought they may have uploaded the wrong show.

Here is the opening of the podcast. I’ve eliminated the names and other identifying parts. I really don’t intend to call out anyone. I simply want to show you how chit chat can destroy your engagement.

Show host: Welcome to (marketing podcast). I’m your host (host name). (website). We’ve got a couple people hangin’ out in the live chat with us. (chat link) And you know, I shouldn’t say that, because I’ve taken the link down from the site. But if you’re listening and wanna see the schedule, it is fairly current. Although, not exactly throughout the summer. I am joined today, as I frequently am lately, by (co-host name) of (other show name). How’s it goin’ (co-host name)?

Co-host: It is wonderful up here.
Show host: Is the … uh … now you guys probably didn’t have a lot of snow like we didn’t have a lot of snow, which I’m still bummed about. But, I’m trying not to talk about it. How’s your … how’s your weather in ____?
Co-host: It’s pretty good. It’s, uh … it’s been a pretty warm winter.

They proceeded to discuss the Celsius to Fahrenheit conversion for the first 10 minutes of the 30-minute show. At 10:45 into the show, host says, “Should we get into some questions?”

This is a show designed to coach businesses to attract more customers.

How did we get lost down some path about temperature conversions?

I’m not even sure I can say it got lost. The show never laid out the expectations of the show. Neither does the show title. As I’ve written before, the opening of the show must tell your audience what the show is all about right at the beginning. Let your listener know what to expect. Assume they are listening to the show for the very first time.

Six minutes into the show, they actually say, “You’re safe by now skipping over the first 10 minutes” of the show. What!?! You’ve got me, now you’re actually telling me this isn’t worth my time?

At this point they aren’t really lost. They are well aware they are wasting my time. There are over 100,000 podcasts available. These shows are all trying to attract me. These guys actually have me paying attention (the tough part) and are wasting the incredible opportunity. What are the chances I’ll actually be back?

In addition to the chit chat that has absolutely nothing to do with the topic, they gave you info at the open of the show that you can’t even act on. They gave you a chat link that isn’t even active anymore. They gave you a schedule which is “fairly” current, “although not exactly”. Then, they tell me I can skip over this part of the show.

This sort of chit chat destroys your credibility and trust. People have come to hear you deliver on your promise of your topic. Talking for ten minutes about the weather does not accomplish that, unless you are the Weather Channel podcast.

Your show must deliver on the brand promise right out of the box. That is the key to audience engagement. Your listener has come to your show for a reason. If you get lost on some tangent, your audience will be gone in a heartbeat.

In this case, there are many podcasts available dealing with marketing. Instead of continuing to listen to this podcast, I moved on and found the “Unpodcast” with Scott Stratten. Scott was one of the keynote speakers at NMX2014. Scott has a bit of chit chat in his episodes. The difference is the relevance of Scott’s chit chat to his topic.

Chit chat during your show is appropriate if you can link it back to your topic. Let’s say you open your show with, “My local television news did an amazing marketing job getting in front of 100,000 people this weekend at the sporting event simply by keeping fans up to speed on the weather.” If you follow that with some chit chat about how crazy the weather has been and how the station used that to their marketing advantage, you have linked it to your topic.

Chit chat here is perfectly acceptable. It makes sense.

If you are talking about the new studio you have built on a show about podcasting, that would be completely understandable.

If you are talking about your weekend fishing and have no way to link it to your podcast about automobile parts, you are wasting time.

It is a fine line. If the information supports your topic, you are on the right path. If it does not fit with the subject matter at hand, find another story that does.

Lay out the expectations in your introduction. Deliver on those expectations immediately. If you find you’re getting off on a tangent, get back on track as soon as possible.

You will quickly find you are talking to yourself if your listener says to themselves, “I think we’re lost.”

Intriguing Introduction

Use a great, personal story to lead with an intriguing introduction. This is where chit chat comes in handy. It is a personal, chit chat story that will engage people. Your chit chat brings them into the topic for this episode.

This is true for your podcast in general as well as each individual topic. Your intriguing introduction should hook your audience, let them know exactly what to expect, and allow them to enjoy the story.

What do you hope your audience will take away from this particular discussion? Your introduction should spell it out. It should set up what is to come.

If your goal is to make your listener laugh at your misfortune over the weekend, lead with it. “This weekend was so disastrous, I wouldn’t have had time for anything else to go wrong even if I tried.” The audience will now have time to enjoy the vivid details of your horrible weekend rather than trying to figure out what point you are trying to make.

When you begin your story with the details, your listener spends energy trying to determine the point you are trying to make. They are trying to figure out what the story is about.

Have you ever been stuck listening to someone tell a story while you’re thinking, “Will he ever get to the point?” That is what we are trying to avoid.

Here is an example of a story you might hear. “This weekend we went to the mall. It was just the two of us. We were looking for a gift for my dad.” Are we telling a story about finding gifts? Is this story just recapping the weekend? Maybe it is about my dad. You don’t know. I haven’t told you. There is no lead to this story.

To hook your audience and allow them to truly enjoy the story, lead with an intriguing introduction.

 

I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can also find other tools including worksheets, a workbook and videos to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Get More Podcast Traffic – PTC Episode 049

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Get More Podcast Traffic – PTC Episode 049

Get More Podcast Traffic

How do I get more podcast traffic? I hear that question all of the time. I recently conducted a survey of my subscribers. The question asked most often had something to do with traffic and engagement with their podcast. “How do I get more podcast traffic?”

I knew the subject was a hot topic, because I see discussions everywhere. How many product launches have you seen that promise to teach you how to get more traffic?

In 1962, Time magazine called David Ogilvy “the most sought-after wizard in today’s advertising industry.” David Ogilvy is quoted as saying, “Great marketing only makes a bad product fail faster.” Be careful what you wish for.

First, make your product great. Then, bring people to the party.

Let’s make your content engaging and memorable before we invite your prospects to the show. If you create a unique experience, your engagement will be much more effective when people come to the party.

Let’s discuss how we become unique. Then, let’s discuss a few organic ways to gain some attention.

 

Create your own style

Don’t try to be somebody else. You are best at being you.

Create you own show structure. There are enough knockoffs.

Highlight your sense of humor.

Tell stories that define your character.

Discuss topics that interest you. Be interesting by being interested.

 

Remove the clichés

Definition of cliché: a trite, stereotyped expression; a sentence or phrase, usually expressing a popular or common thought or idea, that has lost originality, ingenuity, and impact by long overuse.

If you want to sound unique and original, replace your clichés with something fresh.

Top business clichés:

  • Thinking outside of the box
  • Win-win situation
  • Giving 110%
  • Best Practices
  • Synergy
  • Paradigm Shift
  • Low-hanging fruit
  • Push the envelope
  • Take it to the next level
  • A leading provider of…

When you use the same phrases used by everyone else, you become vanilla.

If you want to be unique, grab a thesaurus and find some new words

 

Be memorable

What can you do on the show this week that hasn’t been done before?

Listen to Dave Jackson on his 400th episode of “School of Podcasting” where he was hi jacked by the Binky & The Wiz morning show. You won’t hear that on any other show.

Some loved it. Some hated it. Everyone that heard it remembered it.

Removing every flaw and sterilizing your show will not make it memorable.

Be audacious. Be adventuresome. Be creative.

Be boisterous … sometimes.

Be tender other times.

Do it in a way that only you can do it.

Brainstorm until you have something exciting.

 

Sell The Sizzle

People do not buy products. They buy what the product can do for them.

You don’t go to a restaurant to buy a steak. You go the restaurant, because you’re hungry and want one of your favorite dishes. You want that tender piece of meat that you can cut with a butter knife. The one that will just melt in your mouth, because it is the best steak around. It is cooked perfectly. You are not rushing in there because the cow was corn-fed and aged to perfection. Who cares. Those are attributes, not benefits. Does it taste great? Will it fill me up? Does it remind me of the great family dinners we used to have when I was a kid? I’m in. Those are the benefits.

Sell the sizzle, not the steak.

 

Now that we have a great product, how to we bring people to the party?

Sure you could buy all of those expensive products or a bunch of Facebook ads. I’m sure they work.

 

There is an easier way. And, it is free.

Get your name out there by getting involved.

 

Getting Involved

How many podcasts do you listen to that beg you to get involved with the show? Email us. Leave us a voicemail. Post on our Facebook page. Find us on Twitter. Don’t forget that we have a speakpipe link on the website. Use a carrier pigeon. There are a million ways. Everyone wants engagement.

When you reach out and engage with others, they include you on the show. This does two things.

First, it puts you in front of their audience. That could bring a new audience to your show.

Second, through the Law of Reciprocity, the host of the show may be more inclined to engage with your show. A little thank you gesture. What goes around comes around.

Reciprocity in social psychology refers to responding to a positive action with another positive action, rewarding kind actions. When you do something nice for someone, they feel inclined to do something nice for you in return.

Gary Vaynerchuk spends an great deal of time discussing this in his book “Crush It”. It is a great book that I highly recommend.

Gary basically says, “Put your stuff out there. Then, go engage with everyone else.” Be seen. Meet people where THEY live.

Then, be patient.

You won’t get 100,000 listeners immediately. Grow slowly. Adjust and get it right as you progress. Build the foundation.

As Gary says, “do it again, and again, and again, and again.” Keep engaging. They will come. It only takes your time.

Schedule 30 minutes a day to interact with your audience where they are. You will eventually build the traffic you desire.

 

Get more podcast traffic, but first be unique.

  • Create your own style
  • Remove the clichés
  • Be memorable
  • Sell the sizzle
  • Get involved

 

I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can also find tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Stories Transform Your Podcast – PTC Episode 047

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Storytelling Transforms Your Podcast

Magazines

Have you noticed a lot of the business interview podcasts sound the same? We are hearing the same guests answer the same questions time and time again. How do you become unique in this sea of sameness?

Storytelling transforms your podcast.

People do business with people they know, like and trust. Stories help you develop that knowledge, likability and trust.

Your stories define you and will touch many more people than typical information. The stories you tell and the details you include reveal many things about you. That begins to develop that like and trust.

It can be a bit scary to reveal things about yourself on your podcast. Develop the ability to recognize your unique thoughts and the courage to reveal them on your show.

Two radio coaches have influenced me greatly over the years. They each have similar views on storytelling.

Radio consultant Randy Lane says use stories to “make it human by making it humorous, compelling or tragic”.

Radio talent coach Bill McMahon suggests you decide what you hope to make your audience “Laugh at, marvel at or better understand.”

How do you want your audience to feel after hearing your story? Frame that feeling in your engaging introduction. Decide what you hope to reveal about yourself with the story.

Stories help you connect, motivate and inspire.

There are four parts to the storytelling structure.

 

Engaging introduction

This pulls your listener right into the story. Your introduction should tell your listener exactly where the story is headed.

 

Vivid details

How will your emotion be revealed in the story? Use vivid details to make your story come to life in the theater of the mind.

 

Powerful conclusion

Wrap up the story by reframing of your engaging introduction.

 

What else?

Asking “What Else” will transform your show. Don’t let the story simply end and fade away. Turn it into something powerful.

Many treat a subject in a similar manner. That is why we hear the same style of interview. If you want to stand out and be different, transform you content by using your unique style.

“What Else” can we do with a compelling story? You could create a video, continue the conversation on social media, follow up with listener input in the following episode or various other things. Let your story lead to something bigger.

Ask “what else can we do” and see where it leads.

Storytelling transforms your podcast.

 

A few housekeeping notes this week.

Coupon code ends this week!

Get a one-hour coaching session with Dave Jackson and me for only $50 if you act before June 30, 2014.

Dave and I are now hosting the Podcast Review Show together. Our guests appear on the show to have their podcast reviewed by the two of us.

Typically, hiring the two of us individually for an hour would be hundreds of dollars. Not only do you get an hour of consulting from us on this show, you get to plug your show for a sixty minutes.

Our guests typically pay $99 to be featured on the show. Dave and I have decided to cut you a break. By using the code “coach50”, you can appear on the show for only $50.

You get half off. Still an hour. Still feedback from both of us. Still plugging your show. Half the price.

The code is “coach50”. This deal ends June 30, 2014. Get in on it now before we close it.

GET REVIEWED – CLICK HERE.

 

Podcast Movement

If you are truly serious about building your podcast, improving your show and increasing your traffic, you should also be attending the Podcast Movement in Dallas on August 16 & 17.

Find my affiliate link online at PodcastTalentCoach.com. We are only 8 weeks away from the Podcast Movement. Register today.

 

I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can also find tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

 

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Where To Begin Podcasting – PTC 046

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Where To Begin Podcasting – PTC 046

IMG_0756

Let’s help you determine where to begin podcasting.

I recently had lunch with the guys from the “200churches” podcast. Jeff Keady and Jonny Craig are pastors at a 200church in Northwest, Iowa. They want to encourage and support other pastors of “smaller” churches.

As we were having lunch, Jeff was telling me about their start in podcasting. They had all of the equipment and were ready to roll. As they were about to record their very first episode, Jeff said he didn’t know where to start. What was the first thing he was supposed to say?  How do you figure out where to begin podcasting?

Where to begin is a natural problem. You know what you want to say. You simply don’t know where to start it all. How far back to the beginning of your message should you go?

You have all the equipment. You have set up the technical details of the podcast. How does the show content begin?

Whether you are a brand new podcaster, or someone with hundreds of episodes under your belt, this episode will help you with your content. If you are just beginning, this will help you create your framework. We will walk through content preparation as you lay out the show.

If you are an “old pro”, this content will be a great refresher to help you step back and evaluate your progress. When we have done something for a long time, assumptions begin to creep into the content. We sometimes take small details for granted as if our listener has been with the show from the beginning.

 

There are six steps to defining your content and preparing your podcast.  These six steps will help you determine where to begin podcasting.

1. What do you hope to accomplish?

This includes both the topic and the show overall. Set a goal for each topic, the episode and your podcast in general.

2. What are the interesting topics you hope to address on this particular episode?

As you determine your topics, look for a theme to develop.

3. How will you treat each specific topic you hope to address?

What will you do with the content? You could answer the question, demonstrate the answer, play some audio, show charts to support your answer, or use some other treatment. Find a way to make it your own. Your approach should be unique to you.

4. Create an outline for the flow of the show topics.

This is important for the show introduction.  Bullet points should suffice.  Do not script your content.

5. What supporting information will you need for the show?

Organize and highlight for easy access during the show. This will help you sound prepared as you begin to build credibility with your audience.

6. Write your introduction. Write your conclusion. Include your call to action.

 

If you would like a worksheet to walk you through this process and others, visit the worksheet section at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.  These worksheets will further help you determine where to begin podcasting.

 

I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can also find tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

 

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Powerful Podcast Stories – PTC Episode 043

1 Comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

6 Ways Stories make your podcast powerful

PTC Episode 043

Zig Ziglar used great stories in every point he made. He was a wonderful storyteller.

Dave Jackson and I spoke with the Contractor’s Secret Weapon podcast this week on the Podcast Review Show. They hosts told a great story about earning the #1 spot on Google. The story really helped solidify their points.

You don’t need to include constant stories in your podcast. You only need a few memorable stories to make your podcast stronger.

6 ways stories make your podcast powerful.

 

Transport your listener to other places using stories

  • Visual words
  • Theater of the mind

 

Would I enjoy taking a one-hour car ride with this person every week?

  • Develop friendships
  • Like a one-on-one conversation in a car

 

Do I know the host by listening to the show?

  • Reveal things about yourself
  • People get to know and like you

 

Stories define your character

  • People begin to trust you

 

Let others live vicariously through your stories

  • They can enjoy your journeys without the risk
  • May be the reason there are so many entrepreneur podcasts

 

Stories make you human

  • Humorous, compelling or tragic
  • Laugh, marvel, sympathize
  • Put yourself on the same level as your listener

 

There are worksheets available on the Podcast Talent Coach website that will help you develop your stories. These worksheets are free. The Show Prep and Topic Development worksheets will be most helpful with your stories.

You can receive further help walking through the worksheets by getting the Podcast Talent Coach Workbook. It is available in paperback HERE and on the Kindle HERE.

To discuss my personalized, one-on-one coaching, you can reach me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

 

If you are truly serious about building your podcast, improving your show and increasing your traffic, you should also be attending the Podcast Movement in Dallas on August 16 & 17. Find my affiliate link online at PodcastTalentCoach.com. Prices increase by $40 on June 1. Act now!

 

I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can also find tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Memorable Podcast Brand – PTC Episode 042

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Memorable Podcast Brand – Episode 042

Have you noticed all of the interview shows popping up lately?

It seems everyone wants to have an interview podcast. Many simply copy the other successful interview podcasts and hope to stand out. How can you be different while being the same?

Jared Easley and I were talking the other day. He publishes the wonderful podcast “Starve The Doubts”. We were discussing his approach to make his interview show stand out amongst the sea of sameness.

Jared creates a unique approach to the interview show in a couple different ways. First, he not only has a guest to interview on his show, he also has a guest interviewer join him to ask the questions. This gives the show an extra dimension. The questions on every interview have a little different perspective.

Second, Jared asks unique questions. He opens every show asking about the guests favorite concert. He then sprinkles in “would you rather” and “fill in the blank” questions. Jared does his homework on every guest to create questions that are well-informed.

These two steps help to create a unique interview experience and overall solid, memorable podcast.

 

Be Memorable

If you want to keep your listener coming back show after show, you need to make them remember to come back. You need to remain top-of-mind for your listener. That is the purpose of audience engagement. Make your listener remember you for something specific about your show.

As you build your show, make it about one thing. Find one particular thing that will be remembered. If you try to be all things to all people, you will water down the show. Everything will be nice. However, isn’t usually truly memorable. You will get lost in the millions of messages your listener receives on a daily basis.

Find one point that you can make amazing. Take it over the top. Make it the “goodbye” scene in “Titanic”. Make it the “I am your father” scene in “Empire Strikes Back” between Luke Skywalker and Darth Vader. Your particular point could be the point where you assure your caller that everything will be ok. It could be the fantastic story of your brush with celebrity. It is your show. Find the magic.

Stir emotion. Make it amazing. Bring your listener back. Be memorable.

 

Do They Remember?

When you consider the entertainment options podcast listeners have, the importance of creating a powerful brand really becomes apparent.

I searched iTunes for podcasts about hockey. There are hundreds of hockey podcasts available. Thousands and thousands of episodes exist that deal with hockey. You can find various topics, including drills, NHL teams, coaching, fantasy hockey and many more.

How do you stand out? How do you get noticed?

Your listener needs to remember your podcast, so they can return and listen again. That is the way to build a following. It really doesn’t matter how many people listen today. What builds a strong podcast is the number of listeners that come back the next time, and the next time, and the time after that. You build your audience slowly with more listeners this week than you had last week. Get your listener to remember to return.

Using your brand to create strong relationships with your listeners is critical to the health of your podcast. If you are bland, you will get lost in the sea of average. There are over 100,000 podcasts available for consumption. Most of them are average or worse. If you refine your content, turn your information into entertainment, and transform your podcast into powerful relationships, you will easily stand out from the crowd. It is a must not only for your success, but your mere survival. Begin your brand today.

 

The Memorable Podcast Brand Uses Cows

The unexpected is amusing, delightful and memorable. Being direct assumes your listener cares about your marketing message. They don’t. Your listener cares about his or her needs, wants and desires. Attract their attention by doing the unexpected.

To engage your podcast listener and create a relationship, you need to be memorable. In order to be memorable, you must be unique. Be distinct, unusual, and unexpected. If you sound like every other show, you will not stand out and get noticed.

Chick-fil-a could have easily become another fast food restaurant lost in the sea of mediocrity. Founder Truett Cathy wouldn’t let that happen. The company pays great attention to the details and does the unexpected at every turn.

The Chick-fil-a mission statement is, “Be America’s Best Quick-Service Restaurant.” Sure, every fast food joint wants to be the best. Few are willing to put in the work.

One Saturday, we were on a road trip. We were passing through Des Moines, IA at 8:45p as we pulled into the mall to grab a quick bite. We found out the mall closed at 9p. As you can imagine, most restaurants in the food court were cleaning up. We were one of two parties there to eat.

We stepped up to the Chick-fil-a counter and apologized for cutting it so close and causing them extra work. The gentleman behind the counter assured us it was no trouble at all. We received our (fresh) food quickly and grabbed a table in the middle of the food court.

About five minutes later, the Chick-fil-a employee came to our food court table to make sure everything was alright. This was a mall food court. Few fast food restaurants ever check on you in their own establishment. You especially do not receive this sort of attention 10 minutes before closing.

That level of service is the norm at Chick-fil-a. They always take the extra step to surprise and stand out. It is carried through to the careers they offer, the scholarships they provide to their employees and the process of accepting partners and franchisees.

The company uses cows in their commercials to promote chicken sandwiches. The Chick-fil-a website even has a special section devoted to the cows. When a cow parachutes into a football game promoting chicken sandwiches, it us unexpected. Chick-fil-a is memorable.

If you can create unique, memorable experiences for your listener by incorporating the unexpected, you begin to create powerful, meaningful relationships.

Are you using your own cows in your podcast?

 

The Memorable Podcast Brand Swings For The Fence

Rather than being consistently good with your podcast, be occasionally great.

Your listener will remember one big thing from your show. They will not remember every detail, every comment or every e-mail answer. They will remember that one thing you did. Each show, try to make one big splash that will be memorable.

Swing for the fence.

Many know the great Babe Ruth as one of the greatest home run hitters in baseball. Many also know that Ruth struck out roughly twice as often as the league average. He struck out 1,330 times.

Babe set out to do something exciting. We wanted to be memorable. Sometimes, that meant striking out.

People don’t remember all of the singles Babe hit. Even though he is 2nd all-time with his on-base percentage of .474, nobody talks about all the times Ruth got on base. He had 1,517 singles and 506 doubles to his 714 home runs. That is nearly twice as many singles as homers. Doubles and home runs were just about equal.

Why do people remember all of the home runs? Because they were exciting. Babe was occasionally great. He was great often enough to be memorable.

You don’t have to set records. Simply make your podcast occasionally great. Nobody remembers your strikeouts. Don’t worry about them. When you finally hit the home run, people will remember.

Every now and then, swing for the fence

 

Risky Stands Out For The Memorable Podcast Brand

As we develop meaningful relationships with your podcast, we in turn build credibility that will support our call-to-action within your show. To develop strong relationships, you need to create engaging entertainment that will get you remembered by your listener. To be remembered, you must stand out.

You stand out when you are loved. You are remembered when you are hated. You fade into the background when you are plain, vanilla and trying to not upset anyone. If you don’t stir strong emotions, you are easily forgotten.

When we create, we expose our perspective. We open ourselves to criticism. It is natural to want your thoughts, views, art and creation to be accepted by everyone. To avoid being disappointed, we often play it safe.

Those fantastic, memorable personalities are usually both loved and hated. Rush Limbaugh is loved by the conservatives and hated by the liberals. Dave Ramsey is loved by the conservative investor and hated by credit card companies and whole life insurance salespeople. Dr. Laura Schlessinger would consistently be critical of her callers. Yet she would receive more callers than she could handle on any given show.

Safety lacks creativity. It is risky to be truly creative. However, that is really the only way to get noticed. Safe blends in. Risky stands out.

Create that memorable podcast brand to keep your listener coming back show after show. Remain top-of-mind for your listener. Make them remember to come back next week.

 

I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can also find tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

The Show Funnel Solution – PTC Episode 041

2 Comments

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

The Show Funnel Solution – PTC Episode 041

If you listen to online business podcasts, you’ve surely heard the business funnel discussed. Online marketers move a large group of people into the big end of the funnel. As the price increases, the funnel gets smaller indicating fewer people buying.

Similar to the business funnel, we want to move our listeners through a show funnel. We want to engage our listeners, hook them by piquing their interest, and finally moving them through our content.

The size of the listener pool gets smaller as the group moves through the funnel. Many people will see our headline. A portion of those people will move further to read the description. An even smaller group will continue to move through the funnel by beginning to listen to the show. A subset of that group will actually get to the end of the episode.

How can we move our listeners through the episode more efficiently? How can we get more of our listeners to reach the end of the episode?

In this episode, we discuss five tips to help you with your engaging content and the listener progression through your funnel.

 

1. Develop A Goal For Your Show

As you develop your podcast, you need to determine what you hope to accomplish with the show. What will the show be about? What do you hope to make your audience feel? Is there some call to action you wish to make your listener take?

After you have developed the goal for your show, stick to it. All content on your show should support your goal.

If your goal is to help consumers get out of debt, don’t spend a lot of time discussing your favorite, new CD. Your listener has come to your show expecting you to deliver on your promise. If you tell her you help people get out of debt, deliver that content to her. When you start discussing anything other than that, your brand promise is tarnished. She will be headed elsewhere.

In his “My Disney Podcast”, Correy Webb discusses all things Disney. He discusses his cruise adventures, visits to the parks and other traveling tips. If Correy suddenly began discussing the poker game he had with his buddies last weekend, you would be disappointed. Poker isn’t the reason you’re listening. His Disney promise would be broken.

A great brand is built slowly with great consistency. Deliver on your brand’s promise. However, before you can deliver, you need to develop a goal for your show.

 

2. Prepare For Your Show

Before you begin to record your show, you should spend just as much time preparing for the show. It is very similar to mapping out a trip. You not only need to know where you are going, you need to know how to get there.

Many hosts will have an idea of which topics they hope to address on the show. They may have a few e-mail questions to answer or a current event to discuss. That is where most quit. They think, “Well, I have our ideas. Let’s do this.” They then begin recording.

This is a big mistake. You must plan what you hope to do with each topic. How do you hope to answer the questions? What will your opinion be on the current event. Most importantly, how will you present it to your listener.

If you plan to answer an e-mail question only because you think it is a good question, but you do not plan out your answer, you will wade through the answer. It will take you much more time to answer the question than is necessary. Your show will therefore lack momentum. Your listener will become easily bored. When you stumble your way through your answer unprepared, your listener will wonder if you actually now where you are going.

Before you open the mic, plan out your show. Jot down some notes. Write down the few important points you need to mention as you’re answering the question. Then, make sure you stick to your plan.

Dan Miller does a wonderful job of this in his podcast “48 Days to The Work You Love”. He knows exactly which questions he wants to answer in his show. He knows exactly how he wants to answer them. He also has a few solid examples for each answer. Dan tends to over-promise at the beginning of the show with the questions he hopes to answer. He should either stick to a time limit for each answer, or promise fewer with the potential of a few “bonus” answers at the end if time permits.

Give your show more momentum and energy. It will happen when you prepare for your show.

 

3. Tease Me

Anticipation is a key feature to storytelling. Your story should build just like a good plot builds in a movie. You need to make your audience anticipate the content that is on the way. It is like a vacation you are planning to take. The fantastic anticipation for the trip is almost as pleasurable as the trip itself. You can’t wait for the trip to arrive. You want your listener to feel the same way about your content. When they can’t wait for the story to arrive, you have created some great content.

Teasing is the art of creating anticipation for your audience to entice them to stick around for the payoff to your setup. It is a critical element of your show. Teasing helps create momentum for your podcast.

When you promote parts of the show that are coming up, you must creatively tease your audience. You must give them a reason to stick around. It isn’t enough to simply say, “A great story about this weekend is coming up.” Few will stick around for the payoff. Tease. Create anticipation. Instead, use something like, “You’re never gonna believe what I found in the attic this past weekend.”

The evening news does a wonderful job at teasing. Create anticipation. Tease me.

 

4. Create A Power Intro

The opening of your podcast should explain the purpose of your podcast and let your listeners know exactly what to expect as if this is the first time they have ever heard the show.

A well-crafted introduction serves two purposes.

First, it tells the brand new listener who is hearing the show for the very first time exactly what to expect from the show. It is like the intro to a late night talk show. “From New York. It’s the Late Show with David Letterman. Tonight, Tom Cruise. Larry The Cable Guy. And Katy Perry. Letters from the mail bag. Tonight’s Top Ten list. And Paul Shaffer and the CBS Orchestra. And now, former New York City Medical Examiner … David Letterman.” You know exactly what is coming your way, even if you have never seen the show before.

Second, those that have heard the show before are confident that they are in the right place. Those regular listeners will find comfort in the opening of the show they hear each time they tune in. Fans will also feel like they are “in the know”. This is similar to singing the theme song of your favorite sitcom. As soon as you hear the first few notes of the theme song, you know you’re on the right channel. Your show intro should elicit the same response.

As you create your show open, treat it as if every listener is saying, “Hey, I’m new here. What’s going on?” You’ll make everyone comfortable as the show begins.

 

5. Make Your Listener The Star

Make your listener the star. It is your show. You know where it is going. When listeners are involved in your show, it is always your job to lead your guest and make them the star.

There are many ways to incorporate your listeners into your show. Live interviews, live calls, recorded voicemail messages, and e-mail are a few of the possibilities. Incorporating listeners into the show gives your entire audience a vested interest in the show.

With guests, you must remember you always know more about your show than they know. You know the goals of your show. You know the plot and strategy. You are always on the show. They are new. Lead your guest.

Phrases like “great question”, “I’m glad you mentioned that” and “I didn’t realize that” make your guest feel they are adding to the show … as long as you are authentic in your comments.

Financial guru and radio host Dave Ramsey is great at guiding his listeners. When a caller begins to ramble on, he will always step in with, “How can I best help you today?” That is a great way to say, “Get to the point.” You need to remember that your callers are not professional. They are not sure how to adequately edit their question while still providing all of the necessary elements.

Just as you do not need to answer every e-mail you receive on your show, you do not need to read the entire e-mail. When you are using voicemail and e-mail questions, edit them before you use them. Keep the essence of the question while eliminating the unnecessary details. Nobody will fault you for editing a 4 minute voicemail message to a great 30 seconds. They will probably thank you. The edited call is still the call as long as you aren’t changing their words. Your show is entertainment. Edit it as such.

When interviewing a well-known guest, make it easy for them. Open with great questions for which you already know the answer. Talk hosts like Jay Leno and David Letterman have producers that do a pre-interview with their guests. They will ask the guest, “If Jay asks you about ____, what will you say?” The producer then puts the great questions on the blue cards for the host. Jay may not know the answer, but the guest knows the question is coming.

If you know your guest has done some amazing things, ask them about it. Then, let them answer. I hear so many hosts interview guests as if they are trying to show the guest how much they actually know. In turn, they answer the question as they are asking it. This leaves the guest very little to say.

You and your show become great when you make your guests and listeners the star.

 

Using these five tips will help you refine your content and give it focus. This will help you move your listener through your show funnel. Develop a clear goal, prepare for the episode, tease your listener, write a power intro and make your listener a star. You will be well on your way to transforming your show.

 

A few housekeeping notes for you.

Dave Jackson and I are now hosting the Podcast Review Show together. Our guests appear on the show to have their podcast reviewed by the two of us. Typically, hiring the two of us individually for an hour would be hundreds of dollars. Not only do you get an hour of consulting from us on this show, you get to plug your show for a sixty minutes.

Our guests typically pay $99 to be featured on the show. I’ve convinced Dave to cut you a break. By using the code coach50, you can appear on the show for only $49.50. You get half off. Still an hour. Still feedback from both of us. Still plugging your show. Half the price.

The code is coach50.

Now, we cannot possibly review everyone. Once we fill the available slots, this deal will go away. We have already had a great response. Just a few openings remain. If you are serious about your improvement and would like to be on the show, get registered today.

We have not made anyone cry yet. At half price, it surely cannot hurt that much. Just use coach50 when you register.

 

If you are truly serious about building your podcast, improving your show and increasing your traffic, you should also be attending the Podcast Movement in Dallas on August 16 & 17. Find my affiliate link online at PodcastTalentCoach.com.

 

I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can also find tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

The Gender Marketing Difference – PTC Episode 040

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

THE GENDER MARKETING DIFFERENCE – PTC EPISODE 40

There is a big difference between marketing to men and marketing to women. The book “Men Are From Mars, Women Are From Venus” by John Gray, Ph. D. discussed in great detail the communication and relationship differences between men and women. These differences are critical in marketing. They are also important elements to your podcast strategy.

I’ll be speaking at the Podcast Movement in Dallas August 16th & 17th. My affiliate link is online at PodcastTalentCoach.com. I will be doing a session on this very topic showing you how to make use of these marketing tactics in your podcast.

Today, we are going to cover five major differences you need to consider when marketing to the different genders. Keep these differences in mind when you are shaping your podcast content.

Please understand that I am speaking in generalities. I understand these statements won’t hold true for every person. These points are are simply how most men and women react in common situations. The definition of stereotype is “a simplified and standardized conception or image invested with special meaning and held in common by members of a group” There are times when the stereotypical case will not hold true for a specific situation. Most of the time, this is the case.

 

THINKING

In a broad sense, men tend to think very linearly. Women usually think very spatially. To be effective communicating with each gender, you must understand these differences. You must also select one to target. The same message will have difficulty reaching both genders effectively.

 

PROBLEM SOLVING

Men and women also take different approaches in the way they solve the problems. Because men think linearly, men focus on the solution. Men try to determine what steps are needed to reach a successful outcome. If a man is in need of a new car, he will find the solution step by step. A man will review his options, compare the features, determine the best buy for the money that will do the job, and make the purchase. Men typically move through a problem step-by-step. If the steps are all completed successfully, he buys the vehicle.

Because women tend to think globally, they are typically concerned with the way their relationships are affected by problems and the possible solutions. A woman tends to consider how each person in her close circle is affected by each possible solution. If she is in need of a new car, she will typically consider her needs and those of her family. Will her kids be safe? Is there enough room for everyone? Will the features please her family? Are there entertainment features available to keep her kids occupied on trips? She will also consider how her friends will view the purchase and if she is being treated right by the salesperson. If the relationships all benefit from the purchase, she buys the vehicle.

You can see evidence of this difference in the way auto makers market to the different genders. Minivans aimed toward women will play up the features for the entire family. The commercial will depict the envy of the neighbors. The storyline may even show mom juggling soccer practice, shopping, carpooling and work. These commercials tend to be very spatial in nature and focused on relationships.

Commercials for trucks that are targeted toward men will usually tout the problem solving ability of the truck. The script will play up the horsepower, torque and hauling capacity of the truck. The commercial will usually show the truck pulling some ridiculously heavy load, like trees or ships or something. Men will be convinced they can get the job done with this particular truck. The steps are very linear.

When handling tasks, men tend to be single-minded and focused on one goal, while women usually multitask well. This difference probably began with the cavemen. Each had well-defined duties in the household back in the cave.

Cavemen would set out to find dinner and bring it home. He had one task with one goal. Women handled the entire household doing many things at one time. Men needed to be very focused to find dinner without being eaten by a tiger. Women needed to multitask in order to tend to the house (or cave), handle the children and keep the family in line all at the same time.

You can see this difference in society today. When men are watching television, they watch television. When men attend a sporting event, they watch the event. Men are typically focused on the thing they are doing. This is usually true even if they are doing it with friends.

Women, on the other hand, typically have the ability to multitask very well. Women can be cooking 3 different dishes for dinner, talking on the phone, and keeping an eye on the evening news all while being fully aware of what the children are doing in the other room. Women multitask in a way that astonishes men. Men cannot understand why women spend an entire baseball game talking with the people around her rather than watching the game. Men are there to watch the game. Women attend because it is a way to socialize and strengthen her relationships. She enjoys the game for much different reasons.

The tendency to focus on one task or many creates another interesting difference between men and women. Because they tend to multitask and focus on multiple items simultaneously, women do not seem to tire of activities as quickly as men. When men focus on one thing only, they will become bored with that particular item before a woman. Men will want to move on to the next thing. Therefore, men tend to like new and different. They tend to appreciate change more than women. Women will tolerate repetition much more than men, because they are not as focused on one item at a time. It may also take more messages in different ways to effectively reach and influence a woman.

Men and women also differ in the way they remember things and events. Again, men are linear. Women are spatial.

 

COMMUNICATING

Men typically view communication and problems solving as a way to show their strength and power. Men typically see things as a competition. It is a linear approach. They seek validation by solving problems. When men are communicating with each other, you will often see each attempt to “one-up” the other. You will often hear, “Oh, you think that’s bad. One time something worse happened to me.” Other men do not typically take offense to these comments. These challenges are a way for men to show their power and dominance.

Women use communication and problem solving for much different purposes. Women use both as a way to strengthen the relationship. Women seek understanding when tackling a problem. Rather than seeking validation, women are typically seeking empathy from and an opportunity to bond with their communication partner. You will rarely hear a woman try to “one-up” the person with which they are communicating. However, you will hear, “Oh, that’s terrible. What did you do?”

When I go out to lunch with my buddies, we have a good time. When I get home, my wife will ask me what we talked about. I will tell her, “Nothing really. Sports and politics.” She finds it baffling that we didn’t discuss his son’s birthday or our family vacation. We debate the nuances of professional versus college sports. We might discuss the benefits of one political candidate over another. That’s how men communicate. Men use a friendly challenge to bond. Women tend to see that style as a lack of understanding.

 

RELATIONSHIPS

Men and women also handle relationship problems differently. Just like problems in any other area of life, men typically seek the solution (linear) while women tend to use problems to strengthen the relationship (spatial). Understand these differences as you build your relationship with your audience.

Let’s take a typical, hypothetical couple. Tina and Adam have been together for 3 years. Their standard Friday night is eating take out and watching TV. Tina says, “Adam, we never go out anymore.” In Tina’s head, she is thinking, “Our relationship needs more ‘us’ time. We don’t spend enough time together having fun.” Adam replies, “Fine, let’s go out tomorrow night.” Adam is thinking, “Done, problem solved.” Tina then gets a little more aggressive with, “That’s not what I mean.” Now Adam is really confused. “You just said we don’t go out enough. Let’s go out tomorrow night. What’s the problem.” Tina says, “I’m not just talking about going out.”

Conversations similar to these fall apart, because men and women approach the problem in much different ways. Women use the conversation to strengthen the relationship. Men use communication to solve the problem. “Going out tomorrow night” means different things to each of them.

 

MEMORIES

When men remember events, they tend to remember in a linear fashion. They will remember events in sequence as one thing happened, then the next and finally the last. It is a sequential time line. If a man were recalling a party, they would typically begin with the setting and who arrived first. He would walk through the time line of the party. His description might begin with, “Things got going in the kitchen. We moved downstairs and shot some pool. Paul had a bit too much to drink and after he broke the lamp trying to dance, the party came to a halt and everyone headed home.” It is a step-by-step recollection of the events.

Women typically remember events in a very spatial way. They will remember who attended the party. They will remember the great time that was had by everyone. Women will recall some of the great conversations that took place. The memories would possibly include the laughs, the gathering places and the details of the atmosphere. The recollections of women tend to be global in nature.

These differences between men and women will play an important role as you define your target audience. Will your communication be spatial or linear? This is something you’ll need to decide before you can move forward to create the structure and content of your show.

Gender is only one characteristic of your target audience. There are many others to consider. Just as if you were describing one individual person, gender would only be one characteristic of that person.

 

I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can also find tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Focus Of Your Podcast – PTC Episode 037

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Focus Of Your Podcast – PTC Episode 037

A few notes before the episode this week. I am speaking at the Podcast Movement in Dallas August 16th and 17th, 2014. It is a national podcast conference that has an amazing roster of presenters and speakers. It is less than $135 (including fees) for the standard ticket before June 1, 2014. I would love to have you join me there using my affiliate link. Get your ticket by clicking the logo in the bottom right corner online at PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Dave Jackson recently invited me to join him on the Podcast Review Show. You can find the show and listen at PodcastReviewShow.com. Each week we invite a podcaster on the show for a critique of their entire business from content to website to revenue opportunities.

If you would like to be featured on the show, click the “Get Reviewed” link at PodcastReviewShow.com.

Show Focus

I was listening to the Solopreneur Hour Podcast with Michael O’Neal this week. His show is one of my regular, weekly listens. The podcast frequently features an interview with a successful person in business. Michael does a nice job relating his content to my business.

Many podcasters get lost in the interview and fail to make the important connection to the listener.

When you define the focus of your show, you create a filter for your content. This filter helps determine which content makes the show. It also helps frame your content with respect to your listener.

(Get the “Show Focus Worksheet” HERE.)

To succeed, you need to set yourself apart from the crowd. You cannot simply be better. You must be amazingly different. Make the connection of your content to the needs of your listeners. Help your audience solve their problems and eliminate their frustrations.

Even if you are a seasoned podcaster, it may be time for a tune up. Does your show have a strong focus? Is your content truly helping your listener? Have you defined what is in it for them?

Begin with your passions. When you are creating your podcast, find subject matter that stirs a fire inside you. If you can talk about it for hours, you are probably on target. If you can come up with fifty different topics on your area of interest, you could have a winning subject.

What topics and subjects typically occupy most of your conversations? This is probably where you will find the focus of your podcast. You will be talking about the same subject matter show after show. You better love it. To be interesting, you first need to be interested.

Once you have your topic, define your unique qualities. Remember, you don’t simply want to be better. You want to be amazingly different from the others. My show is focused on content. Where most shows about podcasting center on the technical aspect, I use my 25 years of broadcasting experience to create content you cannot find elsewhere. That is my unique position.

This is where we narrow your topic. Really focus on the niche. You cannot be everything to everybody. Being broad creates a bland podcast that lacks focus. Be specific.

The size of your niche is not nearly as important as the passion of the niche. Help people that are passionate about your topic. This is where you will succeed.

Where can you help? Determine what frustrates your listeners. Figure out what your audience needs to do to double their business or happiness or success. Then, help them accomplish those things. Create solutions with your show.

Finally, use this filter for all of your content. Define the focus of your show. As you prepare for each episode, run your topics and content through this filter to ensure the focus is on your listener.

If you are interviewing people on your show, run it through your filter. What is in it for your listeners? How can they put that information to use?

Even if you are a comedy podcast for entertainment only, your listener is still getting a benefit from your show. They are coming to you for companionship. They want to forget about their problems for a bit. Your content filter should ensure you are helping them accomplish that goal.

 

Here is your “to do” list for this week.

1. Step back for an overview of your show. Define the goal for your podcast.

2. Determine where and how you are helping your listeners.

3. Ensure your niche is focused enough.

4. Put all of your content through your listener filter.

 

Next week, we will discuss tips for the two-person podcast. We will examine five areas you should define and develop if you have a show with multiple hosts.

 

I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can also find tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Creating Podcast Avatars – PTC Episode 035

2 Comments

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Creating Podcast Avatars

Before you can create a great podcast with meaningful, powerful relationships, you need to define your target listener. Most podcasts decide they are focused on a niche and leave it at that. I hear, “My podcast is for entrepreneurs.” A broad category of listeners isn’t defined nearly well enough to help you focus your content.

When creating content, you will approach fans of the Oakland Raiders of the National Football League different than you would talk to fans of the New York Philharmonic. You will speak differently to young men in college than you would to grandmothers who enjoy knitting. When you define your target audience, you will define your strategy to reach that audience.

If you are creating a podcast around retirement, your target audience may be defined by gender and age, such as men in their early twenties or 50-year-old women. Their age is the commonality.

Your target audience could also be defined by a common passion. The podcast could cater to fans of Harley Davidson who ride at least 25,000 miles per year. Their fanaticism ties them together.

This episode walks you through your listener definition using the Podcast Talent Coach worksheet found online at PodcastTalentCoach.com.

 

This week, complete the worksheet to really define your avatar. I think you’ll be surprised how it helps shape your content.

 

I’d love to help you with your podcast. Please let me know how I might be of assistance. You can also find tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

More Podcast Engagement – PTC Episode 034

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

More Podcast Engagement – PTC Episode 034

A few notes this week …

A big thanks to Dave Jackson at The School of Podcasting for having me on his 400th episode. That was quite an honor. We had a lot of fun. Check it out when you have a minute.

 

The Podcast Talent Coach workbook is now available in paperback. The workbook will walk you step-by-step through my worksheets. You will gain a better understanding of the purpose behind each question and worksheet as you develop your content. Find it at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

 

I received an e-mail the other day that contained a question I’m asked quite often. For quite some time, I’ve tried to solve the problem myself. I’ve read books, listened to interviews, purchased products and reviewed tons of notes and articles I’ve collected over the years. The question? How do we create more engagement with our podcasts?

 

Before we jump into engagement, let’s review your checklist from last week. On the last episode, we discussed ways to sound more confident in your content. Your checklist included four items.

– Be yourself. Tell a story on your podcast this week that will reveal something about you.

– Do everything in your own style. Start by defining that style.

– Move beyond information by defining what is in it for your listener. Stir emotion.

– Review a past episode while actually listening like a listener.

Now that you have some time between posting the episode and reviewing it, this might be a good week to listen to your show like a listener. See if you actually accomplished all four points.

I hope the episode helped you and served you to create your podcast with more confidence.

 

Through all of my research and years of experience, I’ve discovered a few key steps to create interaction. This week, let’s cover 7 steps to create more engagement with your podcast.

 

1. Be A Storyteller For Success

As you create your podcast, become a great storyteller. Great storytellers create fans.

Interest in your story never remains constant. Your information can only become entertainment when interest is rising. If interest is falling, the show is becoming boring and is no longer entertainment. A great story continues to develop the plot and raise the interest.

Have you ever sat through a long, monotonous story that never seems to end? You stare and wonder if the speaker actually has a point to this monologue. You pray for your cell phone to ring and save you. That scenario is exactly what you want to avoid. Practice becoming a great storyteller.

Stories help define your character and personality. You should always be yourself. It is difficult to play a character consistently and tell great stories. Your true feelings and identity will always be revealed in the stories you tell. If you are successful hiding your true self, you simply are not telling great stories. Vivid details and interesting points that stir emotions in your listeners can only come from your true feelings. Reveal your true character. Storytellers create raving fans.

 

2. Ask Them To Engage

How do you expect them to know you want them to be part of your show if you don’t ask?

Be sure to make your request specific. Tell your listener exactly what you want her to do.

 

3. Make It Easy To Engage

You may use social media, your website, an e-mail address, voicemail, or a number of other methods to reach you. Simplify it. Create one contact page on your website containing the info to avoid the need for a laundry list during your show. Then, always provide that one contact source. By using that one source, you also prevent your listener from getting caught in the decision paradox.

Make the questions specific, so they don’t have to think. Give your listener a question to answer or specific piece of information to provide. If he isn’t forced to be creative and “work” to create content for your show, you will have more success creating engagement.

 

4. Focus On Helping Others

Zig Ziglar had many great quotes. One of my favorites is, “You can have anything you want in life just as long as you help enough other people get what they want in life.” How true that is.

As you turn your information into engaging entertainment with your podcast, keep in mind that helping people is part of the foundation of a strong relationship. If you take, take, take, your relationship won’t last long. If you are there to give and help, you will develop friends for life.

Ziglar is a great example of helping people. His speeches always offer great tips to improve your life, sales or attitude. He also has great books, CDs and other products he sells. However, most of his time is spent on helping others. There is a lot of free Ziglar information available. He helps others and eventually sales come his way.

Get what you want out of life. Focus on helping others.

 

5. Make It About Them

If you want people to engage, there has to be something in it for them. Make them care.

 

6. Tease And Set Up The Next Episode

Prepare your audience to participate. Let them know the topic for next week. Then, ask them if they have a question about that particular topic. If you have a guest, ask if there is a question they would like you to ask. Michael Hyatt does a great job at this on his podcast “This Is Your Life“.

 

7.Thank Your Audience

Thanks for listening. I appreciate the help you give me.

It is such an easy way to strengthen your relationship with your audience. Your listeners have given you something they can never get back. That is their time.

Show your appreciation. A simple thank you will go a long way with your listener. If they know you are honestly grateful for their time, the chance they will listen again goes way up.

It must be honest and authentic. You can’t thank them in a gas-station-attendant-I’ll-never-see-you-again kind of way. You must deliver it from the heart. It should be the kind of thank you that you would give a stranger who stopped to help when you ran out of gas.

Your listener is your lifeblood. Without your listener you have no show. She has many, many choices when allocating her time. Let her know you appreciate her for spending her time with you.

… And thank you for stopping by. You have done a ton for me just by being here.

 

Next week we will discuss how to define your target audience better than the generic avatar you have now. We’ll get specific. If you have questions about that topic, head to www.PodcastTalentCoach.com to get your questions answered.

I’d love to help you with your podcast. Please let me know how I might be of assistance. You can also find tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Turn Your Podcast Into A Conversation – PTC Episode 030

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

TURN YOUR PODCAST INTO A CONVERSATION

PTC EPISODE 030

Let’s have a conversation. People want to feel part of the discussion and not like they are sitting in a lecture. How do you create that atmosphere on your podcast?

1. Talk to me, not at me

2. Treat your audience as an audience of one

3. Let your listener live vicariously through you

4. Use your regular voice

5. Do everything in your own style

 

Talk To Me, Not At Me

When you are podcasting, talk “to” your listener.  Don’t talk “at” her.  You are not announcing.  You are having a personal conversation and building a relationship.

Podcasting is an intimate conversation with one person.  The conversation is typically one person speaking into a microphone addressing another single individual.  There may sometimes be hundreds of thousands of people listening.  However, they are all listening by themselves.  Even in an automobile with others listening via communal speakers, the members of the audience are listening by themselves in their own head.  Each listener is developing their own unique, mental images.

Have a conversation directly with that individual.  Put your listener in the moment.  Avoid addressing the group.  Instead of using “hello everyone”, use “hi, how are you?”  Make her feel like you are talking directly to her.  It will make your podcast relationship much stronger.

 

Audience Of One

As you are creating your podcast, treat your audience like you are talking to each person individually.  This is critical when creating a trusting relationship with your audience.

I hear many shows address their audience as a group with comments like “hello everyone” or “hey guys”.  Each person in your audience is listening to you as an individual.  Audio is a very personal medium.  Many times, they are listening with headphones.  It is just you and her.  Talk to her just like that.

Addressing a crowd on the radio began when radio began.  As radio was just being created, station owners needed content to broadcast.  Radio programming began with rebroadcasting live, theater events.  The person on the stage would address the crowd as “ladies and gentleman”.

As radio progressed, live audiences were eliminated.  However, people on the radio continued to address the audience as a group.  It was fitting.  The family still gathered around the radio before television was introduced to the family room.  An on-air personality could address the audience as a group and be justified in doing so.

Radio then became a personal medium.  The television replaced the radio as family entertainment.  In-car and headphones became the preferred method of radio listening.  Each listener was now creating images and visions in his or her own head that were unique to their imagination.  Their thoughts were different from those of any other listener.  The conversation was now between the person on the air and the individual listening.

Unfortunately, radio personalities continued to address the listener as a group.  ”It has always been done this way.”  The disconnect began.

Podcasts are even more individualistic than radio.  Most people select a podcast because of their own tastes.  Groupthink does not play a factor as it would to select a movie or television show for the family.  It is one person listening on their own to a show that interests them.

If you are talking to your listener as if they are in a group, using plural terms like everyone and you guys and you all, your listener will wonder who you are addressing.  They will think, “You guys?  I’m listening by myself.  Who are you talking to?”  In the end, they will not follow your call-to-action, because they will think someone else in your “group” will handle it.  Talk to an audience of one and build that relationship with each listener individually.

Nobody like to be lectured to. Data and facts get dull & boring. Engage by being conversational. Tell stories. This is a converstaion, not a lecture

 

Vicarious

Can I Be You?

Vicarious. Voyerism. Eavesdropping.

Those are three main reasons people listen to your podcast. Tell stories to help fulfill those desires.

People dream about having a different (and usually better) life. They want to experience those things others are experiencing. The grass always seems greener on the other side of the fence. People crave living the lives of others.

Your listeners want to live vicariously through you. They want to experience your success. They wish they had the courage to do the things you have done. Your fans want to be you in some way or another.

Voyerism is a reason many people watch the shows they watch, listen to the stories they hear, or read the books they read. They want to experience the lives of others.

People eavesdrop on the conversations of others for the very same reasons. They can experience the life of others without the risk of faliure. Eavesdropping doesn’t take the courage that it takes to actually live the life.

By telling great stories about your experiences, you help your audience fulfill the desire to live vicariously through you. If your show contains audio of your feats and experiences, you allow your audience to become the voyers they desire. When you interview people on your show, you allow your listener to eavesdrop on your conversation.

When you simply lecture as the content of your show, you fail to help your listener experience any of those three desires. Find new ways to deliver your material to your audience. You will make those important connections that turn into friendships. Those relationships will foster loyalty to your show. Your tribe will follow you wherever you go. That’s a powerful thing.

Tell stories of self-revelation. See where it takes you. You’ll be surprised how many people wish they could be you.

 

Use Your Regular Voice

The scoop is that fake announcer voice that you hear quite often. It’s like a slow start with a gradual build.

“Wwwwweeeelllllcome to the big show.”

It sounds like your voice is going up and down as if it is on a yo-yo.

Real people don’t talk like that. You are trying to build trusting relationships with your audience. You want to sound real and authentic.

When you sound like a supermarket announcer, you sound fake. Your listeners will find it hard to trust you, because they know that isn’t really you. The audio they are hearing sounds like a character you are portraying.

Don’t let your voice bounce like a ball. You can be excited and enthusiastic. You can also be real and natural at the same time. Just be yourself.

When the inflection of your voice bounces up and down, you will find it difficult to truly engage your listener. Be real. Avoid the scoop.

 

Create Everything In Your Style

Create everything you do in your own style. You can only stand out among all other shows when you create your own unique style. You must then make sure everything you do is consistent with that style.

Many new broadcasters try to emulate the style of their hero or mentor. They attempt to imitate the styles they hear from other broadcasters. Unfortunately, copying doesn’t create a unique style. Copying typically creates a watered-down version of some other style. When creating your content, be yourself and find your own style.

Some of the greatest broadcasters didn’t start the ascension to the top until they abandoned the attempts to broadcast in the style they thought others desired and began being true to themselves.

Oprah Winfrey quit trying to be a traditional news anchor. She also quit doing the typical tabloid, daytime talk show. When she began to create the show she always desired, she went to the top of the game.

Howard Stern began as a radio DJ sounding like every other radio DJ. He was playing the records and spouting the lines written by management while going nowhere. When Stern decided he was going to do radio his way, he began to make a name for himself. He also went to the top.

Rush Limbaugh followed a very similar path. He had a cheesy radio name. He followed the format designed by somebody else. Limbaugh made every attempt to fulfill the typical radio DJ stereotype. He also got fired again and again. When he decided to broadcast in his style and true to his beliefs, he began his rise to the top.

Adam Corolla made his climb when he took full control over his style and show. He was climbing the DJ ladder in Los Angeles. Corolla had some decent television work. He then decided to create his own show in his own style via podcast. That began his rise as one of the biggest podcasters in the world.

All of these broadcasters made the decision to stop copying others. They all created shows that were true to their style.

They each also stay true to their style in everything they do. You will never hear Rush sound like Howard. You’ll never mistake something Oprah says as something Adam might say. Being true to their style isn’t something that takes conscious effort. It comes easy to each of them, because it is true to who they are as people.

Be true to yourself. It will make it easy to create everything you do in your style.

 

I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can also find tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

More Podcast Listener Interaction – PTC Episode 029

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

MORE PODCAST LISTENER INTERACTION – EPISODE 29

Many podcasters ask me how to get more listener interaction with their show. How can you get more listener feedback and comments? We need to transform your information into engaging entertainment. When your content is engaging, people take notice and take action. If you want your listeners to interact more with your show, make your content engaging.

When you tell stories on your podcast, you reveal things about yourself. Vivid details are critical elements of great storytelling. You are creating theater of the mind. Draw pictures in the mind of your listener.

Details are more believable than generalities.

Details reveal specifics about your thoughts, beliefs and character.

Details put your listener in the moment helping them envision your story in their mind.

Garrison Keillor, in one of his “Stories From Lake Wobegon”, describes a woman who endures crushing loneliness and town gossip. Keillor says, “She got into bed with a dying man – so she could sing ‘Abide With Me’ in his good ear”. You can see the details in your mind. Envision the man’s hearing aid. Can you hear the song? There are so many details in that sentence, many of which aren’t even described.

Lake Wobegon is a fictitious place, yet is believable due to the details. The story details reveal what Keillor finds amusing. The story is also vivid enough that you can see it in your mind.

That’s the wonderful thing about audio. Everyone sees their own personal, mental images in their own way. Those differences add to the enjoyment and entertainment of the story. Each listener can enjoy the unspoken details in their own way. They are not at the mercy of the interpretation of a movie director.

Tell great stories. Use vivid details. What did you reveal today?

1. Tell me great stories

I’m not simply talking about your integrity. By character, I mean all of the attributes that create you, as in character in a play.

The purpose of your show is to attract an audience. Whether you want to monetize that relationship, encourage a call-to-action, or simply create an audience for your ideas, creating the audience is where you begin.

The stories you choose to tell reveal how open you are to others. Your openness is a sign of trust. Trust is a big piece of a relationship. Reveal things about yourself through your stories and you’ll begin to build trust with your listener.

The details you include tell your listener what you value. If the listener feels you value things they too value, you solidify the relationship. People like to hang out with similar people. If your values are opposite of your listener, you may also attract them. It is like a love/hate relationship. They may dislike it, but they continue to listen. This often happens when talking politics.

What you find entertaining will be evident by the stories you tell. Since people like other people who have similar tastes, revealing those things you find entertaining will also build the relationship.

Stories also have the power to demonstrate your vulnerability. Stories can show that you are a real person. Your listener will see you as approachable. They also may begin to see you as a friend. That is when true relationships begin to form.

Next time you watch a late night talk show, notice how the great, memorable interviews contain great stories. Interviews that focus on facts and information rarely cut through. Those guests come off more as a lecturer than as a friend. The guests that tell stories appear more personal, warm and friendly. Their stories reveal things and help you feel like you know them personally. Take note next time you watch.

Foster a relationship with your listener by revealing things about yourself through stories. Stories will define your character.

2. Put your audience in the story

If you truly want to engage your listener, put her in your story. This doesn’t mean create a fictitious part of your story where she becomes a fake character. Include details that are so vivid that your listener feels like she is right there in the moment. Stir the passion within your listener with great emotion.

You have probably seen a movie like “Silence of the Lambs” where you completely lose awareness of your surroundings as you’re sucked into the scene. It may have been a movie like “Casablanca” where they say goodbye at the very end. Those are two great stories that put you right there in the moment.

Stories told by great storytellers do the same thing. Garrison Keillor is probably one of the best storytellers of our time. When listening to this story, you can see the guy Keillor describes in a few short seconds. He includes great lines like, “… In the midst of drinking a Bombardier at the Moonlight Bay Supper Club and she’d gone off with him to the Romeo Motel.” The story is short, yet the details are vivid.

If you can create details so vivid that your listeners can almost feel them, you can truly put her in the story. Your listener will be fully engaged. That is where information becomes entertainment. Strengthen your relationship with your listener at every opportunity. Put the audience in the story.

Create a movie and put your listener in it

3. Make them forget they are listening to a podcast

When your audience is listening to your podcast, make them forget they are listening to a recording. Take them to another place. Make your storytelling so strong that their imaginations put your listener in another time and place. That’s what great storytelling is all about. That’s what great relationships are all about.

People seek entertainment to escape from reality. They want entertainment like movies, concerts, television, radio and podcasts to make them forget about all of their problems. Entertainment that succeeds will take the audience member to some other place and time.

When you record your podcast, you need to create that wonderful theater of the mind. It doesn’t matter if you’re reading fiction or talking about gardening, put your audience in the moment. Make your listener forget they are listening to a recording.

4. Intrigue & Suspense

What will happen next?

Anticipation is a key feature to storytelling. Your story should build just like a good plot builds in a movie. You need to make your audience anticipate the content that is on the way. It is like a vacation you are planning to take. The fantastic anticipation for the trip is almost as pleasurable as the trip itself. You can’t wait for the trip to arrive. You want your listener to feel the same way about your content. When they can’t wait for the story to arrive, you have created some great content.

Teasing is the art of creating anticipation for your audience to entice them to stick around for the payoff to your setup. It is a critical element of your show. Teasing helps create momentum for your podcast.

When you promote parts of the show that are coming up, you must creatively tease your audience. You must give them a reason to stick around. It isn’t enough to simply say, “A great story about this weekend is coming up.” Few will stick around for the payoff. Tease. Create anticipation. Instead, use something like, “You’re never gonna believe what I found in the attic this past weekend.”

The evening news does a wonderful job at teasing. Create anticipation. Tease me.

5. Use active language

Your details should contain active language. Words like walking, carrying, and eating are current tense. They create images in your mind. You can see a clown walking. If I am telling a story about a clown that walked, using the past tense, it is more difficult to envision in your mind. It already happened. He isn’t doing it anymore. I can see walking. I can’t see walked.

When you use active language, your story comes to life. Use rich, vivid words that will draw fantastic pictures in the minds of your audience. “The old man, small and fragile, came slowly walking into the art shop gingerly carrying the tattered, leather-bound, black-and-white photo album he had been saving from his depression-era childhood.” You can see the old man. Active language paints those photos.

I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can also find tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.

Podcast

Creating Powerful, Podcast Relationships – PTC Episode 022

Leave a comment

Play

Podcast: Play in new window | Download

Subscribe: RSS

Creating Powerful, Podcast Relationships

It has been said may times before. People do business with people they know, like and trust.

To make your podcast successful, you must create meaningful, powerful relationships with your listeners.

In this episode, we review five of the many ways to improve and foster your listener relationships.

 

Their Voice Will Always Be More Meaningful

One major purpose of your podcast is to foster relationships with your listeners. Many podcasters use e-mail, texts, tweets and posts to interact with their audience. The podcast host typically reads these on the air.

Unfortunately, using these methods of communication puts distance between you and your listener. (read more)

 

Assume Your Listener Is New

The opening of your podcast should explain the purpose of your podcast and let your listeners know exactly what to expect as if this is the first time they have ever heard the show.

A well-crafted introduction serves two purposes.

First, it tells the brand new listener who is hearing the show for the very first time exactly what to expect from the show. Second, those that have heard the show before are confident that they are in the right place.

Your audience size is always changing. It is either growing or shrinking. The direction of the movement is your choice. Always work to grow your audience.

Your show will always lose listeners for various reasons. Sometimes they no longer have a use for your content. Sometimes other shows take the place of your show. Maybe they got a new phone and simply didn’t subscribe again. The size of your audience is always changing.

Since listeners are always moving through the “out” door, you need to continuously work to bring listeners through the “in” door. Always work to find new listeners.

As new listeners constantly join your show, treat each episode like it is your first, because it could be the first episode for your listeners.

 

Your Listeners Deserve a “Thank You”

Thanks for listening. I appreciate the help you give me.

It is such an easy way to strengthen your relationship with your listener. Time is something your listener will never get back. She has just chosen to give it to you.

Show your appreciation. If your listeners know you are honestly grateful for their time, you begin to strengthen your relationship. The relationship is a two-way street.

You must be honest and authentic. You can’t thank them in a gas-station-attendant-I’ll-never-see-you-again kind of way. You must deliver it from the heart. It should be the kind of thank you that you would give a stranger who stopped to help when you ran out of gas.

Your listener is your lifeblood. Your audience is the reason you exist. Without your listener you have no show. She has many, many choices when allocating her time. Let her know you appreciate her for spending her time with you.

Thank you for giving me your time. You have done a ton for me just by being here. I truly appreciate you.

 

You vs. Me

Great marketing is like a mirror. It is a reflection of the customer, not of the company. Great products that use great marketing are focused on the needs, wants and desires of their customers. To make turn your podcast into a great brand, focus on your listener and not on yourself.

Scheels had a great commercial for their snowboarding gear. The commercial was completely focused on the lifestyle of the snowboarder. (read more)

 

Be On Their Level

When you’re creating a relationship with someone, you never want to act as if you are better or above the other person. Even if your position allows you opportunities that your counterpart may not receive, you must be humble about those experiences. People like other people who are similar to themselves.

Take the approach of “I’ve been there and know what you’re going through.” You will empathize with your listener. When you come off like “I know everything”, you appear condescending. Nobody likes a know-it-all.

Show respect for your listener and her problems.

Because I am on the radio, I often get the incredible opportunity to meet many musicians. If I were to brag about these fantastic experiences, I would appear arrogant. It would sound as if I believe I was better than you. You probably wouldn’t find it easy to like me much.

Maintain your humility. Keep yourself on the same level as your audience. If you have an opportunity to interview someone famous, be as honored and excited as your listener would be.

You are building a relationship with your listener. Be likable. Be on the same level as your audience.

————

I’d like to thanks Andrew Hellmich and John Hames for their questions included in the show this week.

Find Andrew Photo Biz Xposed.  CLICK HERE

Find John at Sound Commentary.  CLICK HERE

I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.

You can also find FREE worksheets and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.

Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.